B&R PROgramming SYStem

User's Manual

Version: 2.00 (February 1992)

Published By: Bernecker und Rainer Industrie-Elektronik GmbH
Model. Nr. MAPROSYS-0

MS-DOS ® is a Trademark of Microsoft, Incorporated

This Description refers to the

B&R PROgramming SYStem Version 5.40

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem I

The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of the date of publication, however,
Bernecker und Rainer Industrie-Elektronik GmbH will not be liable for any damages, including indirect
or consequential, or reliance on the accuracy or this documentation. The information contained herein is
subject to change without notice.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem II

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Chapter 1 General Information Page-3

Contents: Chapter 2 Software Installation Page-3
Chapter 3 Introduction Page-3
Chapter 4 Sequence charts / Ladder diagrams
Logic diagrams / Function blocks Page-5
Chapter 5 Statement list Programming Page-6
Chapter 6 Symbolic NameEditor Page-7
Chapter 7 Data Table Editor Page-8
Chapter 8 Load, Save, ... Page-8
Chapter 9 Printing Page-9
Chapter 10 Creating Function Blocks Page-9
Chapter 11 Programming Online
with a Modem Page-10
Chapter 12 Online Hardware Interfaces Page-11
Appendix A Command Summary Page-12
Appendix B (STL) Instructions Page-12
Appendix C Additional Functions Page-12
Appendix D Error Messsages Page-13
Appendix E Word Index Page-13

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-1

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-2

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter 1 General Information

1. General 1-3
2. Compatability of the B&R PROgramming SYStem
and the PG1000 1-6
3. Important Notes on How to use the User Manuel 1-7

Chapter 2 Software Installation

1. Hardware and Software Requirements 2-3
2. Order Numbers and Model Numbers 2-4
3. Range of Functions for each Model 2-4
4. Portable PC-Configuration 2-5
5. Installation on the Hard Disk 2-6
5.1. New Install 2-6
5.2. Upgrading with a new Version of Software 2-12
6. The Install-Programm 2-13
6.1. Reconfiguration 2-13
6.2. Other Functions within the INSTALL-Programm
2-15
7. Software Requirements 2-16

Chapter 3 Introduction
1. Software Start Up 3-3
2. Initial Parameters upon Start Up in the
PROgramming SYStem 3-5
2.1. Defining new Start Up Parameters 3-5
2.2. Language 3-6
2.3. Mnemonics 3-6

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-3

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.4. Mode 3-7

2.5. Default-Directory 3-7
2.6. User-Directory 3-8
2.7. Standard-Directory 3-8
2.8. Standardklartexte 3-9
2.9. Aufruf einer LEARN-Datei 3-9
2.10. Parametrierung über eine Datei 3-10
2.11. Parameter ändern nach dem Start
des PROgrammierSYStemes 3-11
3. Tastatur 3-12
3.1. ESC-Taste 3-12
3.2. Funktionstasten 3-12
3.3. RESET-Tasten 3-13
4. Die Kommandozeile 3-16
5. Tabulators 3-17
6. Fenstertechnik 3-18
6.1. Fensterdefinition 3-18
6.2. Programmbearbeitung mit 2 Fenstern 3-19
7. Aussteigen aus dem PROgrammierSYStem 3-20
8. System-Reset 3-21
9. Überspielen von Programmen
zwischen PG1000 und PC 3-22
9.1. Überspielen vom PG1000 auf den PC 3-22
9.2. Überspielen vom PC auf das PG1000 3-23
10. Grundlegende Bedienbefehle 3-24
10.1. Ändern des Programmnamens 3-24
10.2. Ändern des Programmdatums 3-25
10.3. Löschen des Programmes 3-25
10.4. Einstellen der Online-Schnittstelle 3-26
10.5. Definition des Programmspeichers 3-26
10.6. Aufruf des MS-DOS Kommandointerpreters
3-27
10.7. Text-Einfügemodus in Editoren 3-27
10.8. “Kommando”-Namen
als Label-Namen verwenden 3-28

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-4

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Kapitel 4 Ablaufdefinition / Kontaktplan

Logikplan / Funktionsplan
1. Allgemeines 4-3
2. Ablaufdefinition 4-5
2.1. Allgemeines 4-5
2.2. Aufruf des ABL-Editors 4-5
2.3. Aufbau des ABL-Menüs 4-6
2.4. Funktionen des ABL-Editors 4-8
2.5. Starten eines Programmes 4-11
2.6. CLEAR - Löschen einer Ablaufdefinition 4-12
2.7. Ausstieg aus dem ABL-Editor 4-12
3. Kontaktplan-Programmierung 4-13
3.1. Allgemeines 4-13
3.2. Aufruf des KOP-Editors 4-13
3.3. Aufbau des KOP-Menüs 4-14
3.4. Grundlagen der KOP-Programmierung 4-16
3.5. Klartexte / KTZ-Modus 4-17
3.6. Kontakte und Verknüpfungen 4-18
3.7. Editierfunktionen 4-35
3.8. Dokumentation 4-40
3.9. Aufruf eines KOP’s 4-42
3.10. Löschen eines KOP’s 4-42
3.11. Ausstieg aus dem KOP-Editor 4-42
4. KOP-Statustest 4-43
4.1. Allgemeines 4-43
4.2. Aufruf des KOP-Statustestes 4-43
4.3. Aufbau des Menüs 4-45
4.4. Funktionen im KOP-Statustest 4-46
5. Logikplan-Programmierung 4-51
5.1. Allgemeines 4-51
5.2. Aufruf von Logikblöcken 4-51
5.3. Editieren von Logikblöcken 4-52

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-5

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6. Funktionsplan-Programmierung 4-55
6.1. Allgemeines 4-55
6.2. FUB-Übersichtsmenü 4-56
6.3. Aufruf schon geladener FUB’s 4-57
6.4. Laden von FUBs von Festplatte oder Diskette
4-58
6.5. Editieren von FUBs 4-59
6.6. Löschen eines FUB’s 4-60

Kapitel 5 Anweisungsliste
1. Allgemeines 5-3
2. Aufruf des AWL-Editors 5-4
3. Aufbau des AWL-Editors 5-4
4. Eingabezeile 5-6
4.1. Einfüge-Modus 5-6
4.2. Zeilennummer / Programmschrittnummer 5-8
4.3. Kommentarzeile 5-9
4.4. Label 5-9
4.5. Befehlsfeld 5-10
4.6. Negation und
erweiterte (extended) Adressierung 5-11
4.7. Adreßvorwahl 5-12
4.8. Adresse 5-13
4.9. Klartextfeld 5-16
4.10. Kommentarfeld 5-16
5. Funktionen im AWL-Editor 5-17
5.1. Softkey-Funktionen 5-17
5.2. Weitere Funktionen 5-19
5.3. Ausstieg aus dem AWL-Editor 5-19
6. Editierfunktionen aus der Kommandozeile 5-20
6.1. Ersetzen / Tauschen (CHAN) 5-20
6.2. Globales Tauschen/Ersetzen (GLOBCHAN) 5-24
6.3. Suchen (FIND) 5-25
6.4. Suchen und Auflisten (FINDL)
User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-6
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Suchen und Ausdrucken (FINDP) 5-27

6.5. Kopieren (COPY) 5-28
6.6. Verschieben (MOVE) 5-30
6.7. Löschen (DELETE BLOCK) 5-30
7. AWL-Statustest 5-31
7.1. Allgemeines 5-31
7.2. Einstieg in den AWL-Statustest 5-31
7.3. Aufbau des Menüs 5-33
7.4. Statusfelder 5-36
7.4.1. Aufbau eines Statusfeldes 5-36
7.4.2. Editieren eines Statusfeldes 5-43
7.5. Funktionen im AWL-Statustest 5-44
8. Weitere Funktionen 5-49
8.1. RNT 5-49
8.2. RUN P 5-49
8.3. EEPROM - PROM programmieren 5-50
8.4. LOAD PLC - Programm aus der SPS laden 5-53
8.5. P-VERS - Information
über das Programm in der SPS 5-54
8.6. XFER 5-55

Kapitel 6 Klartext-Editor
1. Allgemeines 6-3
2. Aufruf des KTZ-Editors 6-4
3. Aufbau des KTZ-Menüs 6-4
4. Funktionen im KTZ-Editor 6-6
4.1. Softkey-Funktionen 6-6
4.2. Weitere Funktionen 6-7
4.3. Ausstieg aus dem KTZ-Editor 6-7
5. Editierfunktionen aus der Kommandozeile 6-8
5.1. Verschieben (MOVE) 6-8
5.2. Kopieren (COPY) 6-8
5.3. Löschen (DELETE BLOCK) 6-9

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-7

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.4. Suchen (FREE) 6-9

Kapitel 7 Tabellen-Editor
1. Allgemeines 7-3
2. Aufruf des TAB-Editors 7-3
3. Aufbau des TAB-Menüs 7-4
4. Funktionen im TAB-Editor 7-6
4.1. Softkey-Funktionen 7-6
4.2. Weitere Funktionen 7-7
4.3. Ausstieg aus dem TAB-Editor 7-7
5. Editierfunktionen aus der Kommandozeile 7-8
5.1. Verschieben (MOVE) 7-8
5.2. Kopieren (COPY) 7-8
5.3. Löschen (DELETE BLOCK) 7-8
6. Tabellenprogrammierung 7-9
6.1. Datenformate 7-9
6.2. Aufruf von Tabellen 7-11
6.2.1. Aufruf in der AWL 7-11
6.2.2. Aufruf in KOPs 7-12
7. CLEAR - Löschen einer Tabelle 7-12

Kapitel 8 Laden, Speichern, ...

1. Auswahl des Pfades 8-3
1.1. Auswahl des Datenträgers 8-3
1.2. Ändern von Default-, Standard-
und User-Directory 8-4
2. Speichern 8-5
3. Laden 8-9
4. Datenformat der ASCII-Dateien 8-17
4.1. KTZ-Daten 8-17
4.2. TAB-Daten 8-18
5. Directory anzeigen 8-19

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-8

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6. Kopieren von Dateien 8-21

7. Umbenennen von Dateien 8-22
8. Löschen von Dateien 8-22
9. Formatieren von Disketten 8-22

Kapitel 9 Drucken
1. Aufruf des Druckermenüs 9-3
2. Aufbau das Druckermenüs 9-3
2.1. Ausbaustufe A 9-3
2.2. Ausbaustufe B 9-4
2.3. Ausbaustufe C 9-4
3. Das Menüfeld 9-6
3.1. Editieren des Menüfeldes 9-6
3.2. Drucken von ... 9-7
3.3. Weitere Menüoptionen 9-15
4. Drucken von Programmen oder Programmteilen 9-17
5. Ausgabe auf den Bildschirm 9-19
5.1. Allgemeines 9-19
5.2. Ausgabe von Programmen oder Programmteilen
9-19
5.3. Querverweisliste 9-19
6. “Drucken” in eine Datei 9-20
7. Schnittstelle definieren 9-20

Kapitel 10 Erstellen von Funktionsblöcken

1. Allgemeines 10-3
2. Grundlagen der FUB-Programmierung 10-5
2.1. Vorbereitungen 10-5
2.2. Funktionsweise eines FUB’s 10-5
2.3. Interne Speicherstellen 10-6

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-9

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.4. Private Speicherstellen 10-7

3. Aufruf des FUB-Editors 10-8
4. Aufbau des Menüs 10-8
5. Definition des FUB’s 10-10
5.1. Kommentarfeld 10-10
5.2. Kurzkommentar 10-11
5.3. FUB-Name 10-11
5.4. Definitionsfeld 10-11
5.4.1. Übergabe einer bestimmten
Anzahl von Bytes 10-12
5.4.2. Kennzeichnung für die
Übergabe einer Adresse 10-13
5.4.3. Kennzeichnung für die
Übergabe eines Labels 10-14
5.5. Namen der Ein-/Ausgänge 10-15
5.6. Anzahl der Ein-/Ausgänge 10-15
6. Ausstieg aus dem FUB-Editor 10-15
7. Das AWL-Programm eines FUB’s 10-16
8. Ändern eines bestehenden FUB’s 10-18

Kapitel 11 Online-Programmierung über Modem

1. Allgemeines 11-3
2. Modemkonfiguration 11-4
2.1. Belegung der Funktionstasten 11-4
2.2. Parameter der Modemkonfiguration 11-6
2.2.1. Kommandos 11-6
2.2.2. Parametrierung der COM1 Schnittstelle 11-7
2.2.3. Meldungen 11-8
2.3. Prinzipielle Einstellungen am Modem 11-9
3. Nummernverzeichnis 11-10
4. Stationsübersicht 11-14
5. Programmierung des S-EEPROMs 11-21
5.1. Passwortdienst 11-22
5.2. Rückrufparameter 11-25

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-10

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.3. Alarmbehandlung 11-27

5.4. Modemparameter 11-30
5.5. Timeout-Intern 11-32
5.6. Timeout-Busmaster 11-33
6. Standby Betrieb 11-35
6.1. Reaktionen bei Verbindungsaufbau 11-37
6.2. Standby nach Anstoß eines Rückrufes 11-38
7. Datenaustausch mit der SPS 11-39
7.1. Alarmparameter 11-39
7.2. Logbuch / Koppel-RAM 11-41
7.2.1. Logbuch 11-41
7.2.2. Koppel-RAM 11-46

Kapitel 12 Online Schnittstellen - Hardware

1. Allgemeines 12-3
2. Centronics ONLINE Schnittstelle 12-5
2.1. Bestellnummern - Bestellbezeichnungen 12-5
2.2. Technische Daten 12-5
2.3. Anschluß an PC und SPS 12-6
3. B&R ONLINE Schnittstelle 12-7
3.1. Bestellnummern - Bestellbezeichnungen 12-7
4. MODEM Online-Interface 12-9
4.1. Bestellnummern - Bestellbezeichnungen 12-9
4.2. Allgemeines 12-9
4.4. Schnittstellen 12-10
4.3. Erdung 12-10
4.5. Betriebsarten 12-12
4.6. Stationsnummernschalter 12-14
4.7. Status-LED 12-14
4.8. Verdrahtungsbeispiel 12-15
5. Zubehör 12-17
5.1. Kabel 12-17
5.2. ONLINE Adapter 12-20

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-11

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.3. Lichtleiter Adapter 12-21

5.3.1. Bestellnummer - Bestellbezeichnung 12-21
5.3.2. Technische Daten 12-21
5.3.3. Allgemeines 12-21
5.3.4. Anschluß 12-22
5.4. Netzteil 12-24

Anhang A Zusammenfassung - Bedienbefehle

Allgemeines A-3
Bedienbefehle des PROgrammierSYStemes A-4

Anhang B Übersicht - AWL Befehle

Erklärungen zur Syntax B-3
AWL Befehlsübersicht B-6
Nach B&R Mnemonics geordnet B-14
Nach Motorola Mnemonics geordnet B-15
AWL Befehle nach Gruppen geordnet B-16

Anhang C Zusatzeinrichtungen
1. LEARN - Funktion C-3
1.1. Starten der Aufzeichnung einer LEARN-Datei
C-3
1.2. Beenden der Aufzeichnung C-3
1.3. Aufruf (Wiedergabe) einer LEARN-Datei C-4
1.4. Format einer LEARN-Datei C-4

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-12

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2. PROVIT-Emulationen C-6
2.1. PROVIT 1000 - Tastaturemulation C-6
2.2. PROVIT 500/600 (MAESTRO) Emulation C-9
2.2.1. Einschränkungen C-10
2.2.2. Softwaremäßiges Ändern
des Zeichensatzes - Esc P c x0 ... xn C-10
2.2.3. Zeichensätze aus einer Datei lesen C-11
3. Aufbereitung des Programm-Abbildes
für EPROM-Programmer C-13
4. MS-DOS Environmentvariablen C-15
4.1. Test auf parallele Online Schnittstelle ausschalten
C-15
4.2. Verwendung eines anderen Parallelports C-15
4.3. Laden eines anderen Tastaturtreibers C-16
4.4. Druckausgabe in eine Datei C-16
4.5. Varianten der MAESTRO Terminalemulation
C-17
4.6. Anwenderspezifische Dateien C-17
4.7. Temporäre Dateien C-17
4.8. EMS-KTZ Verwaltung C-18

Anhang D Fehlermeldungen
FATAL-ERROR-Fehlermeldungen D-3

Anhang E Stichwortverzeichnis

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-13

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Contents-14

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

Contents: 1. General Information 1-3

2. Compatibility of the B&R PROgramming SYStem
and the PG1000 1-6
3. Important Notes on How to Use this Manual 1-7

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-1

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-2

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1. GENERAL

The efficiency of the PLC-System has been enhanced by the user-friendliness of the Programming
System and the available Standard Software. With the PROgramming SYStem B&R offers a unique
software package for MS-DOS that is efficient and comfortable to operate.

All B&R PLC's, from the MINICONTROL to the MULTICONTROL, can be programmed with the
B&R PROgramming SYStem. The PROgramming SYStem is also multilingual, leaving the
programming language used, completley up to the user. The B&R PROgramming SYStem has
unlimited resources when it comes to solving problems with ladder diagrams (LAD), function
blocks (FBK), logic diagrams (LD) or statement lists (STL). The PROgramming SYStem also has
no problems mixing programming languages in a programm.

A voluminous selection of Standard-Function blocks supports programming application and

shortens Software-Developement time considerably. Additionally a FBK-Editor makes life easy
for the applicator with application specific Function Blocks.

The B&R PROgramming SYStem speaks many languages and can switch between German,
English, Italian, Spanish and French with a single command. Naturally the PROgramming SYStem
User's Handbook is also just as flexible when it comes to languages.

THE PC
The B&R PROgramming SYStem will run with any IBM AT/XT compatible Personal Computer
(with MS-DOS Version 2.11 or above), including battery operated laptops and Portable ATs to the
powerful System 2 Office computers. For speed efficiency in Online-operation, data is sent at 60
Kbaud through CENTRONICS interfaces and special cabel to the PLC. For Online work with more
than one processor from the same programming unit, Two Port Interface Modules are available.

LADDER DIAGRAMS (LAD)

Ladder Diagrams are especially effective for logic programms. The LAD-Editor's menu technique
facilitates the comfortable application of Ladder Diagrams. The LAD debugger permits the
"online" observation and influencing of the program. When the contact is in a high state it is
displayed inversley. Naturally visible comments and printing capablilities are also at the user's
service.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-3

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

FUNCTIONAL PLAN (FP)

Functional plan programming is a type of programming that approaches structured programming.
Program units are represented as rectangles on the screen and the programmer only needs to
connect the input parameters and the outputs of the module. A collection of over 100 standard
function blocks - e.g., analog processing, mathematic functions, general data processing,
communication, and hardware support - is available from B&R. In addition, the PROgramming
SYStem permits the user to create his/her own application-specific function blocks.

LOGIC PLAN (LP)

Logic plan programming can be seen as a complement to the ladder diagram. AND/OR/XOR
connections are drawn using logic blocks very similar to logic gates used in digital engineering.
The size and number of the inputs can be determined arbitrarily. Logic plan symbols can be freely
combined with LAD elements and function blocks.

STATEMENT LIST (STL)

Statement list programming facilitates the solution of complex problems either in original
Motorola  mnemonics or in B&R-specific command abbreviations. STL is more than
assembler programming. The command set includes elementary processor commands (6303, 6809)
to complex floating point arithmetic routines that are integrated as standards in all B&R systems.

FBK-EDITOR
The FBK Editor enables the user to create his/her own application-specific function blocks. The
first step establishes the form of the module, i.e., the number of inputs and outputs. The
functionality of the FP is then programmed with an STL-program. Naturally the FBK Editor also
permits the editing of standard modules and their modification to meet specific requirements.

SYMBOL ASSIGNMENT (SYMB)

Symbols are identifiers assigned to an input, output or storage. The user can either use the physical
address of the storage or the symbolic name. The B&R PROgramming SYStem automaticlly and
interactively complements the missing information. The SYMB list can be displayed or printed
completely or selectively for a group of registers, flags, inputs or outputs.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-4

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

DATA TABLES
Data tables are constant data records that the user can access. Input is handled by a comfortable
Data table Editor. Decimal, binary, hexadecimal and ASCII number formats can be mixed within a
table or even within a row of a table. Tables are components of the application program and are
stored in the non-volatile protected application program storage.

PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION
Particular attention was devoted to the documentation capabilities of the B&R-PROgramming
SYStem. Comments can be written at any location in a program, in STL as well as LAD/FP/LP.
The program printout contains the complete program documentation, including cross references,
symbol tables, function modules and symbol assignments.

DEBUGGING
A number of powerful tools are available to aid in locating errors. The STL debugger permits the
stepwise execution of STL programs, the setting of break points, and the use of trace functions. The
LAD debugger inversely displays set contacts and superimposes current values within the scope of
function blocks. The utilization of windows gives the advantage of simultaneous monitoring of
multiple processors.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-5

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

2. B&R PROgramming SYStem and PG1000 compatibility

Neither A or B levels of programming software are completley compatible with the PG1000.

PROgramming SYStem level C differentiates between the PG1000 and PG-PC Modes.

Starting the software in PG1000 Mode provides complete compatibility between the PG1000 and
the PC generated programs. This enables the exchange of programs or program sections between
PC and PG1000 via serial interface.

Switching from
PG1000 to PG-PC Mode A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
● ● ●

↵] gives access to functions additional to those in the PG1000.

The operating command PC [↵

The large number of additional functions enable much more efficient and comfortable
programming with a personal computer (sequence charts, logic diagrams,...)

Programs or macros generated in PG-PC Mode can be loaded and used only in this working mode.
They are not compatible with PG1000 Mode.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-6

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

3. IMPORTANT NOTES ON THIS MANUAL

Prerequisites
It is necessary for the user to know the basic facts about his/her personal computer and the B&R
control system (MULTI, MIDI or MINICONTROL) to utilize this manual properly.

For more detailed information about the operating system of the PC, refer to the corresponding user
manual.

For more detailed information about the control system, refer to the relevant hardware manuals
(distributed by B&R) or contact a B&R engineer.

How to use this manual

Chapter 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION and Chapter 2 - INSTALLATION: We recommend that

this section be read in any case.

Chapter 3 - INTRODUCTION TO USAGE: is a start with the basics and fundamentals and a good
introduction to the B&R PROgramming SYStem .

Chapter 4 - Chapter 10 - is a reference guide for users with a certain amount of basic knowledge
with regard to programming software. These chapters comprise detailed descriptions of
all programming options and softkey functions.

Chapter 11 - ONLINE PROGRAMMING OVER A MODEM describes all necessary functions for
programming a B&R-controller over a modem.

Chapter 12 - ONLINE INTERFACES lists the various hardware possibilities, and connections
involving your PC and the B&R-controller.

Technical Appendix - This chapter is a reference for all commands and instructions necessary for
programming.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-7

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

This user's manual describes three distinct levels of the PROgramming SYStem in conjunction with
their operation possibilities, and this table shows which operation function fits into which
expansion level respectivley.

Expansion levels:
• Level A
• Level B
• Level C

Operation:
• PG1000 Mode, CPU Type A
• PG1000 Mode, CPU Type B
• PC Mode, CPU Type A
• PC Mode, CPU Type B

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80 CPU Typ A ... CP30, CP31, CP40, CP41
● ● ● NTCP3#, PP40
CPU Typ B ... CP60, CP80,
NTCP6#, PP60

Example:

Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM / LOGIC PLAN / FUNCTIONAL PLAN

4. LOGIC PLAN PROGRAMMING A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

Logic plan programming is available in all three levels, A, B and C, and exists in the PG-PC and
PC80 operations. Logic plan programming is impossible in PG1000 mode.

Important Note

Particularly important notes are framed to stand out on the page and attract attention.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-8

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

Key Designation
All keys are shown in square brackets []:

Key Description
Engl. Germ.

[↑] [↑] Cursor up

[↓] [↓] Cursor down

[←] [←] Cursor left

[→] [→] Cursor right

[↵] [↵] Enter / Return

[PgUp] [Bild↑] Cursor one page up

[PgDn] [Bild↓] Cursor one page down

[Ins] [Einfg] Insert character before cursor

[Del] [Entf] Delete character at cursor position

[Esc] [Esc] Interrupt, exit from editors and/or menus

[Space] Space bar

[Ctrl] [Ctrl] Control key

[⇑] [⇑] SHIFT key

[Alt] [Alt] Alternate key

[❖] [❖] One of the four cursor movement keys

[⇐] [⇐] Back Space

If two keys must be pressed simultaneously, then the two key symbols are connected by a "+" sign.

Example: [Ctrl] + [Ins]

Text which must be entered directly into the programming device is printed in bold face and
italics.

Example: CLEAR

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-9

 Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

Input Commands and Descriptions

Certain requests are shown using the following symbols:

<NAME> enter a name comprising of up to 4 characters (e.g. Functional

plan name...)
<LAD_NAME> enter a name comprising of up to 4 characters (e.g. Ladder
diagram name...)
<TBL_NAME> enter a data table name comprising of up to 4 chacters
<FNAME> enter a file name comprising of up to 8 characters (when
storing and loading)
<LINE> enter a Line number
<LINE/LAB> enter a Line number or Label
<NR> enter a number (e.g.:number of lines to delete)

Abbreviations
The abbreviations used in this user's manuel are:

SEQC Sequence Chart

STL Statement List
FBK Function Block
FP Functional plan
LAD Ladder diagram
SYMB Symbol assignment
LP Logic plan
TAB Data table

Operating Commands
While the cursor is in the command line, all function key commands can be entered directly from
the keyboard.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 1-10

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION

Contents: 1. Hardware and software prerequisites 2-3

2. Model numbers - descriptions 2-4
3. Functions provided in the expansion levels 2-4
4. Portable PC-configuration 2-5
5. Installation on the hard disk 2-6
5.1. New installation 2-6
5.2. Substituting with a new software release 2-12
6. The Install Program 2-13
6.1. Changing the configuration 2-13
6.2. Additional functions of the install program 2-15
7. Usable PC-Version 2-16

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-1

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-2

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

1. HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE PREREQUISITES

The B&R PROgramming SYStem software is available on two 5¼"diskettes and one 3½" disk.

Before installing the software, be sure you have the following requirements:

- your personal computer must be IBM AT or IBM XT compatible (Processor

80386, 80286, 8088 or 8086)

- IBM compatible monochrome or color adapter

- Hard Disk (with 2 MB free space)

- Floppy Drive 5¼" (360 kByte or 1,2 MByte) or 3½" (720 kByte or 1,44 MByte)

- 640 kBytes RAM; of which at least 553 kBytes (565.840 Bytes) must be avail-
able. If necessary programs like FDO, CHAD, Device Drivers (e.g.: Mouse
driver), loaded character sets (DOS 3.X) must be deleted to achieve this free
space.

- MS-DOS Version 2.11 and above or PC-DOS

- No expansion boards using the COM 2 Interrupt.

If these prerequisites apply, the software can readily be installed on the hard disk.

To fully utilize all operational functions additional hardware is required:

- Transfers from PC to PG1000

V24 serial interface COM 1

- For printing:
V24 serial interface COM 1
or parallel port

- For Online-communication to the PLC (Chapter 11 - ONLINE-INTERFACES)

Centronics Online-interface on a parallel interface,
B&R Online-interface and cable or
Modem for Online-Programming over the telephone.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-3

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

2. MODEL NUMBERS - DESCRIPTIONS

Expansion levels without Centronics Online Interface with Centronics Online Interface

Level A PROgramming SYStem PROgramming SYStem

Programming software, Level A Programming package, Level A

Model No. SWPIA-0 PGPROSLA-0

Level B PROgramming SYStem PROgramming SYStem

Programming software, Level B Programming package, Level B

Model No. SWPIB-0 PGPROSLB-0

Level C PROgramming SYStem PROgramming SYStem

Programming software, Level C Programming package, Level C

Model No. SWPIC-0 PGPROSLC-0

The software is always delivered with the “User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem”.

3. FUNCTIONS PROVIDED IN THE EXPANSION LEVELS

Function Level A Level B Level C

LAD YES YES YES

Standard-FBKs YES YES YES
Comments, SYMB YES YES YES
Additional FBKs NO YES YES
Data tables NO YES YES
STL NO NO YES
FBK-Editor NO NO YES

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-4

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

4. PORTABLE PC-CONFIGURATION
One very important step in having a problem free B&R PROgramming SYStem is the proper
configuration in the PC's setup menu. With the wrong configuration, the B&R PROgramming
SYStem will run only partially or not at all.

SYSTEM SETUP
- Performance - - Memory -
Resume Mode = Boot Total = 1024 KB
BIOS = RAM Conventional = 640 KB
CPU Sleep Mode = Disable Hard RAM = 0 KB
HDD Auto Off = Disable EMS = 0 KB
Display Auto Off = Disable Extended = 256 KB

- Communications -
- System - Serial A = COM1
System Speaker = On Serial B = COM2
Battery Alarm = On
Extended FDD = ( A:, B: ) Parallel PRT = Bidirectional Port

- Display -
Display Type = ( Enhanced Color, Standard Color, Monochrome )
Internal EGA = Enable
Internal Display = ( 8*14, 8*16 )
Gray Scale Mode = Off
Auto Gray Scale = Off

Instruction

The selections "HDD Auto Off" and "Display Auto Off" must stay set to "Disable".

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-5

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

5. INSTALLATION ON THE HARD DISK

5.1. NEW INSTALLATION

To start a new install, insert setup diskette number one into the source drive. The installation can
be started from drive A by typing the MSDOS command as follows:

a:setup[↵]

The installation can also be started from drive B:

b:setup[↵]

From this point on you will be guided by menu's. Here the screen displays the language menu and
from here the language choice for conversation to and from the PC is made.

The [F7] HELP key will bring down the help text for the language selection of the PROgramming
SYStem.

The function key [F8] DOS cancels the installation process.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-6

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

After the language selection is made, the installation menu is displayed.

a
b
c
d
e
f

The installation menu contains the following configuration information:

a) Source Path - Path where the software installation can be accessed

b) Destination Path - Path name under which the software is installed
c) PC type - (IBM AT, IBM XT, AT COMPATIBILITY, ....)
d) Processor Type - (8088, 8086, 80286, 80386)
e) Main Memory - Size of RAM memory in kBytes, allocated by DOS
f) MS-DOS Version
g) Function key commands

[F1] Choosing another destination path for the PROgramming SYStem:

The PROgramming SYStem sets a default path of C:\PG but with the F1 option you can set up a
path to suit your system.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-7

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

[F2] INSTALL:

The INSTALL program is installed on the hard disk, and will configure the PROgramming SYStem
to be utilized properly. The files necessary to configure the software, are at the same time
copied to the chosen destination path, in the directory (C:\PG).

[F3] Software installation:

The directory listed in the destination path is set up automatically by the installation program.

To set up the screen and keyboard the menus SCREEN CONFIGURATION and KEYBOARD
CONFIGURATION are chosen respectively.

Screen configuration:

The menu for the SCREEN CONFIGURATION looks like this. The function keys in this menu are
allocated as follows:

The desired screen driver is selected by means of the function keys. The selected screen driver is
displayed in inverse video, and the configuration is installed on the hard disk.

When the correct driver has been chosen the keyboard must be configured. The installation
program automatically switches to the KEYBOARD CONFIGURATION menu:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-8

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

Keyboard configuration:

configuration menu:

The keyboard language is chosen, by pressing the respective function key. The selected keyboard
language is displayed in inverse video, and the configuration is installed to the hard disk.

Copying the software to the hard disk:

With the screen and keyboard configuration completed, the files from the setup disk are copied to
the hard [Link] then the software will ask for the second diskette. The following message will
blink on the screen

After the second diskette is inserted the installation can be continued by pressing the enter/return
↵] key.
[↵

When all files are copied to the hard disk a message is displayed on the screen regarding the PC-
setup menu and the COM-2 interrupt (online interface). This message is the same as is displayed
when the [F4] REMARKS function key is pressed from the main menu.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-9

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

After pressing any key, the [Link] file can be changed. Two modifications are made if to
the file if needed.

If the two system files [Link] and [Link] on your hard disk have been changed,
the following message will appear on the screen.

At this point, pressing any key will bring you back to the main menu.

[F4] Remarks:
The key brings down a piece of text explaining a bit about running a failure free PROgramming
SYStem and also shows some installation information (PC setup menu and COM 2 port interrupt).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-10

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

[F5] New screen configuration:

The [F5] is only used to now to change the screen if a wrong key has been pressed before. If this is
the case F5 will bring you back to the screen configuration menu where another choice can be
made.

The selection made previously is shown in inverse video. By pressing the corresponding function
key a new screen driver will be installed. The chosen item will be displayed in inverse video.

The [F8] function key will take you back to the main installation menu.

[F6] New keyboard configuration:

By pressing the [F6] function key, a new keyboard driver can be installed. This function should
only have to be used if you have made an incorrect entry the first time around. If you must change
the keyboard driver, press [F6] and the following menu will be displayed on the screen.

The previously selected keyboard is shown in inverse video. By pressing the function key that
corresponds to the keyboard of your choice, the new driver will be installed and the selection will
be displayed in inverse video.

The [F7] function key gives a larger selection of keyboard drivers to choose from.

[F8] will take you back to the installation menu.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-11

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

[F7] HELP

A help text will be displayed giving a short description of the [F1] - [F8] function keys and what
they do.

[F8] EXIT INSTALL PROGRAM

Before starting the PROgramming SYStem for the first time, the PC must be rebooted to put into
effect the modifications to the system files. When the [F8] EXIT function key is pressed you will
be asked if the system should be restarted.

[Y] Is a PC warmstart which restarts the system.

[N] Exits to the MS-DOS interpreter.

Note:
The installation has created the following directories:
Default Directory: (Working software Directory): PGDEF
Standard Directory: (Directory for Standard function blocks): PGSTD
User Directory: (Directory for your own function blocks): PGUSER

5.2. SUBSTITUTING WITH A NEW SOFTWARE RELEASE

To replace your old software with a new release follow the exact same procedure as a new install.
The new software will overwrite the old.

The setup program looks for the file path of the old B&R PROgramming SYStem. When the
program is found you are asked if the [Link] file should be over written.

By pressing [N] you can give the new [Link] file another name.

With [↵↵], the [Link] file is over written. From this point on the process is exactly like a new
installation.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-12

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

6. THE INSTALL PROGRAM

6.1. CHANGING THE CONFIGURATION

There are two ways to go about changing the configuration of the B&R PROgramming SYStem.

- with the PROgramming SYStem setup disk. Reconfiguring the B&R

PROgramming SYStem with the setup disk is done the same as the installation.
Information about the installation can be found under 5. INSTALLATION ON THE
HARD DISK

- with the INSTALL-Program on the hard disk.

The INSTALL program is called from MS-DOS with the following command:

C:\PG> install [↵]

The configuration starts just like the installation with the language menu from the INSTALL
program showing on the screen.

From the menu, select the language you would like to communicate with the PC in.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-13

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

After choosing the language, the installation menu from the INSTALL program is displayed:

The following function keys are used for configuring :

[F1] Configuration
[F5] Screen configuration
[F6] Keyboard configuration

[F1] Configuration

The screen and keyboard can be reconfigured from the SCREEN CONFIGURATION and
KEYBOARD CONFIGURATION menus. These menus are exactly the same as the software
installation setup menus (Pg.8&9 of this chapter). When the proper drivers are selected, the
program copies the files to the correct destination directory. When the copy process is finished,
pressing any key will bring you back to the installation menu.

[F5] New screen configuration and [F6] new keyboard configuration

Both of these functions are exactly the same as in the setup program (Pg. 11).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-14

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

[Link] FUNCTIONS OFTHE INSTALL PROGRAM

[F3] Standard software installation:

This function installs the B&R standard software. The installation is explained more precisely in
the Users Manual / Standard software, (Volume 1, General)

[F4] Remarks:
This is a short text giving information on how to run a failure free B&R PROgramming SYStem
and some operation requirements (PC setup and COM 2 interrupt).

[F7] HELP:

A help text giving the operation of function keys [F1] - [F8].

[F8] EXIT:

Quits the install program and exits to MS- DOS.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-15

 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION

7. USABLE PC-VERSION
For a usable PC version you must have the following files:
Language dependent files:
[Link] .... Command names and function keys text
[Link] .... Error messages
[Link] .... Other messages
[Link] .... Status test messages
[Link] .... Function block FBK - Outline - Text
[Link] .... Title screen with parameters
Normal data files:
[Link] .... Keyboard definition
[Link] .... OPCODE-Data table
[Link] .... EDITOR-Parameters, Field length and attributes
[Link] .... Control strings for B&R Mnemonics
EDITOR.CT0 .... Control strings for MOTOROLA Mnemonics
[Link] .... Function key definition
PRV_AEGA.DEF .... Output code definition for MAESTRO-Emulation
(EGA-Graphics card)
PRV_AVGA.DEF .... Output code definition for MAESTRO-Emulation
(VGA-Graphics card)
Program:
[Link] .... Device drivers for ONLINE, SERIAL, CRT, KBD, ...
[Link] .... PG-Software
Modem:
Modem operation files:
[Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]
[Link] [Link] [Link]
Screen masks for Modem operation in the PG\MASK\PG directory:
[Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]
[Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]
[Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]
[Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]
[Link] [Link] [Link] [Link]
[Link] [Link] [Link]

Files created by PC-PG (These files can be deleted without loss of data).
V_MEM.TMN .... Temporary memory for <UNDO>
V_MEM.TM1 .... Files in temporary memory
V_MEM.TM2 .... STL-Programs
[Link] .... Window configuration

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 2-16

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 3
INSTRUCTIONS

Contents: 1. Starting the Software 3-3

2. Startup parameters of the PROgramming SYStem 3-5
2.1. Start parameter details 3-5
2.2. Languages in the PROgramming SYStem 3-6
2.3. Statement list Mnemonics 3-6
2.4. Operating Mode 3-7
2.5. Default-Directory 3-7
2.6. User-Directory 3-8
2.7. Standard-Directory 3-8
2.8. Standard Symbols 3-9
2.9. Calling up a learn file 3-9
2.10. Startup parameter file 3-10
2.11. Changing parameters after startup 3-11
3. Keyboard 3-12
3.1. ESC-key 3-12
3.2. Function keys 3-12
3.3. RESET-key 3-13

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-1

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

4. The Command line 3-16

5. Tabulators 3-17
6. Window Techniques 3-18
6.1. Window definition 3-18
6.2. Programming in Windows 3-19
7. Quitting the PROgramming SYStem 3-20
8. System-Reset 3-21
9. Programming transfers
betweenPG1000 and PC 3-22
9.1. Switching from PG1000 to PC 3-22
9.2. Switching from PC to PG1000 3-23
10. Basic Operation Commands 3-24
10.1. Change Program Name 3-24
10.2. Change Program Date 3-25
10.3. Deleting a Program 3-25
10.4. Setting the Online Interface 3-26
10.5. Definition of the Program Memory 3-26
10.6. MS-DOS Command Interpreter Call 3-27
10.7. Text Insert mode in Editors 3-27
10.8. Use "Command" Name as
Label Name 3-28

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-2

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

1. STARTING THE SOFTWARE

To start the PROgramming SYStem after the installation is finished, just:

1. Turn on the power to the PC

2. Type pg and press the [↵] key. This is possible from any directory.

The PROgramming SYStem is started.

At the top, left of your screen “MEMSIZE: XXXX paragraphs” is displayed. The number of
paragraphs must be at least 3000 for the PROgramming SYStem to run. If not enough memory is
available the program is ended with FATAL ERROR 9.

After a few seconds the opening menu screen is displayed:

f
b
g
c

d
e
The opening menu screen gives the following information:

a) LEVEL Installation level (A, B or C)

b) VERSION [Link] Version of the system module and PROgramming SYStem

Example: 36.54 Version number of PROgramming SYStem: 5.4
Version number of CP60/80 System module: 3.6

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-3

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

c) Command line: The command line is where all operating commands for the
PROgramming SYStem are given.

d) Blinking cursor: Shows the point, that the next character can be placed on the
screen.

e) Softkeys: At the bottom of your screen eight function keys are shown.
These keys are for the most important operating commands
that should have to call while working in the PROgramming
SYStem.

A, B and C levels are different in their softkey functions.

For example in the main menu:

Level A:

Level B:

Level C:

f) Operating system: Version of operating system in your PC

g) Memory: Amount of base memory in your PC

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-4

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

2. STARTUP PARAMETERS OF THE

PROGRAMMING SYSTEM

Upon startup of the B&R PROgramming SYStem, certain parameters can be set.

The following parameters can be assigned:

- PROgramming SYStem language: LANG = <Language>

- Mnemonics used for instructions: MNEM = <Mnemonic>

- Operating mode: PGMODE = <Mode>

- Default-Directories 1) : DDIR = \xxxxxxxx\...

- User-Directories 1) : UDIR = \xxxxxxxx\...

- Standard-Directories 1) : SDIR = \xxxxxxxx\...

- Standard symbols STDSYM = <FNAME>

- LEARN-File , is invoked directly after EXE = <FNAME>

starting the software.

- set parameters in one file: PAR = <FNAME>

2.1. START PARAMETER DETAILS

The B&R PROgramming SYStem can start up with any parameters that you would like to set up by
typeing them into the MS-DOS command line:

C:\> cd\pg [↵]

C:\PG\> run pg02 <Parameter1> <Parameter2> ... [↵]

More parameters can be entered, with a space between each.

1)
These parameters can only be used on the same drive that the PROgramming SYStem is
installed.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-5

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

2.2. LANGUAGES IN THE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM

The desired communicating language can be set or reset using this parameter. With it you can
choose one of five different languages.

Syntax: C:\PG\> run pg02 lang=<Language> [↵]

Parameters: <Language> GR (German)

USA (English)
F (French)
ITA (Italian)
SP (Spanish)

Example: C:\PG\> run pg02 lang=usa [↵]

Language is now English

2.3. STATEMENT LIST MNEMONICS

This parameter sets the input mnemonics for the PROgramming SYStem and it also gives a choice
of which mnemonics you would like displayed. Four choices are given.

Syntax: C:\PG\> run pg02 mnem=<Mnemonic> [↵]

Parameters: <Mnemonic> B&R B&R Mnemonic

MOTOROLA MOTOROLA® Mnemonic
MIXM Displayed in MOTOROLA ® Mnemonic
Entered in B&R Mnemonic
MIXB Displayed in B&R Mnemonic
Entered in MOTOROLA® Mnemonic

Example: C:\PG\> run pg02 mnem=b&r [↵]

The STL commands are now entered in B&R mnemonics.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-6

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

2.4. OPERATING MODE

The desired mode of the PROgramming SYStem is chosen with this parameter. The functions you
would like to use depend on the selection of operating mode that you make.

Syntax: C:\PG\> run pg02 pgmode=<Mode> [↵]

Parameters: <Mode> PC PG-PC Mode

(not compatible with PG1000-Mode)
PG1000 PG1000 Modus1)
(not compatible with PC-Mode)
CP80 CP80 Mode1)
CP80PC PC80 Mode

Example: C:\PG\> run pg02 pgmode=cp80 [↵]

The program is started in CP80 mode.

2.5. DEFAULT-DIRECTORY
This parameter sets the desired Default Directory. When a program or program part is loaded or
saved this is the directory that is used. If no parameter is set then the program assumes c:\pgdef to
be the Default Directory.

Syntax: C:\PG\> run pg02 ddir=<Directory> [↵]

parameters: <Directory> \xxxxxxxx ...Directory name, up to eight

chacters Longer path names can also be
given.

Example: C:\PG\> run pg02 ddir=\test [↵]

c:\test is now defined as the default directory.

1)
Only possible in Level C.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-7

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

2.6. USER-DIRECTORY
The User Directory that you would like to use is selected with this parameter. This directory is used
when a program or program part is loaded or [Link] this start parameter is not set up, the program
assumes c:\pguser to be the User Directory.
Syntax: C:\PG\> run pg02 udir=<Directory> [↵]

Parameter: <Directory> \xxxxxxxx ..Directory name up to eight

characters A longer path name can also
be given.

Example: C:\PG\>run pg02 udir=\test [↵]

c:\test is now the defined User Directory.

2.7. STANDARD-DIRECTORY
This parameter sets the Standard Directory that you wish to [Link] Standard FBK's are
automatically loaded to this directory. If no parameter is set, the program assumes c:pgstd to be the
Standard Directory.

Syntax: C:\PG\> run pg02 sdir=<Directory> [↵]

Parameter: <Directory> \xxxxxxxx ...Directory name up to eight

characters. A longer path name can
also be given.

Example: C:\PG\>run pg02 sdir=\test

c:\test is now the defined Standard Directory.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-8

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

2.8. STANDARD SYMBOLS

To define the start parameters with STDSYM=<FNAME>, puts all Standard Symbols in
<FNAME> upon startup and after every NEW.

Syntax: C:\PG>run pg02 stdsym=<FNAME>[↵]

Parameter: <FNAME> ...Drive + Path + Filename without extension; if no path is

given the file is looked for in \PG

Example: C:\PG\> run pg02 STDSYM=c:\prosys\usa [↵]

In the directory of c:\prosys the usa file must have the extension .sym. The
SYM file [Link] will be loaded.

If the file holding the STDSYM parameters does not exist, the PROgramming SYStem will start up
nevertheless and no error message will be shown.

2.9. CALLING UP A LEARN FILE

By entering the start parameters EXE=<FNAME>, a LEARN-File is loaded and output. (LEARN
see appendix C)

Syntax: C:\PG> run pg02 exe=<FNAME> [↵]

Parameter: <FNAME> ...Drive + Path+ File name; If no path is given the directory
\PG\ is searched

Example: C:\PG> run pg02 exe=[Link] [↵]

The file [Link] is loaded to the directory c:\pg and called from it as well.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-9

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

2.10. STARTUP PARAMETER FILE

With this parameter a file can be created which will contain any other parameters you wish to start
up with.
Syntax: C:\PG\> run pg02 par=<FNAME> [↵]
Parameter: <FNAME> ...Up to an eight character file name. A longer path name can
also be given.
Example: The following are held in thec:\pg\start file:
lang=gr
mnem=b&r
ddir=\test
udir=\fub
The following calls have identical functions:
C:\PG\> run pg02 par=start [↵]
C:\PG\> run pg02 lang=gr mnem=b&r ddir=\test udir=\fub
[↵]

Note:
During the Programming SYStem installation a separate parameter file is created, which is
↵]. The [Link] File looks like this:
activated by starting the program with pg [↵
C:
cd C:\PG
run pg02 PAR=[Link]
cd ..
The parameter file [Link] contains these Parameters:
mnem=b&r
stdsym=gr

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-10

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

2.11. CHANGING PARAMETERS AFTER STARTUP

Start parameters can also be set, after the startup of the software, in the command line.

Command Function

↵]
MOTOROLA [↵ Switch to MOTOROLA® Mnemonics
↵]
B&R [↵ Switch to B&R Mnemonics
MIXM [↵↵] Displayed in MOTOROLA® Mnemonics and
Input in B&R Mnemonics
↵]
MIXB [↵ Displayed in B&R Mnemonics and
Input in MOTOROLA® Mnemonics
↵] Language options
LANG <LANGUAGE> [↵
↵]
PC [↵ Switch from PG1000 to PG-PC Mode
Switch from CP80 to PC80 Mode
↵]
CP80 [↵ Switch from PG1000 to CP80 Mode
Switch from PG-PC to PC80 Mode
↵]
CP40 [↵ Switch from CP80 to PG1000 Mode
Switch from PC80 to PG-PC Mode
↵]
DDIR <\PATH> [↵ Default-Directorie options
↵]
SDIR <\PATH> [↵ Standard-Directorie options
↵]
UDIR <\PATH> [↵ User-Directorie options

After switching from PC mode to PG1000 mode you can not switch back. Working
in PG1000 mode is only possible if the PROgramming SYStem has been started in
this mode or with the command NEW. (PG 1000 only operates if the PROgramming
SYStem has started with it.)

Example: Switching from B&R Mnemonics to MOTOROLA® Mnemonics.

↵]
Enter in the command line: MOTOROLA [↵

The command automatically loads the MOTOROLA® Mnemonics to the program

and uses them from this point.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-11

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

3. KEYBOARD

3.1. ESC-KEY
This key is used quite often. Pressing the [Esc] puts you in the nest higher menu or breaks out af a
currently running command.

If the keyboard that you have does not have an [Esc] key the [5] key in the number
block replaces it.

3.2. FUNCTION KEYS

The function keys are used to call up the corresponding commands seen at the bottom of the screen.

The function keys [F9] and [F10] bring up alternate softkey functions that are used by holding the
[F9] or [F10] key down and pressing the function key corresponding to the desired command.

Example: The start of the PROgramming SYStem shows the following softkey functions:

Pressing [F9] or [F10] changes them:

By pressing [F9]

By pressing [F10]

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-12

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

3.3. RESET-KEY
If you need to momentarily break into a currently executing program, a RESET key is available on
the programming device keyboard. To take a look at where the keys are situated on your keyboard
the illustrations on page 3-14 and 3-15 should provide an answere.

If your keyboard has no number block, the RESET keys are [F11] nad [F12]. When the keyboard
has both a number block and function keys either can be used. If you are running the B&R
PROgramming SYStem on a TOSHIBA laptop computer the RESET keys are [Sys Req] and [Prt
Sc] keys, situated in the top right corner of the keyboard.

The RESET key functions differently depending on how the Online Interface is utilized:

If a B&R Online-Interface,has been incorporated for use in your computer, then

you have the possibility of working in two windows simultaneously. So, there are
also two RESET keys (one for each window).

If using a Centronics Online-Interface on a parallel interface, then both RESET

keys are for one window.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-13

 Chapter3 INTRODUCTION

AT-KEYBOARD XT-TASTATUR
Reset key for Reset key for Reset key for Reset key for
Window 1 Window 2 Window 1 Window 2

+
Scroll
Lock

PgDn
PgUp

3
9

Del
,
2
8

5
Num
Lock

Home

End
1
7

Ins
0
PrtSc
*
~
#

Caps
Lock
}
]
+

@
=

’
[
{

?
/
_
-

:
;
P

>
.
0
)

L
O

<
,
9
(

K
I

M
8
*

J
U

N
7
&

H
Y

B
6
^

G
T

V
%
5

F
R

C
4
$

D
E

X
3
£

S
W

Z
2
"

A
Q

/
|
1
!

Alt
Ctrl

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-14

 Print Scroll Pause Num Caps Scroll
Screen Lock Lock Lock Lock
Sys Rq Break

! " § $ % & / ( ) = ? Pg Up Num

Window 1
˚ ´ Insert Home ÷ ×
2 3 { [ ] } \ −
^ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ß ´
Reset key for

Q W E R T Y U I O P Ü * Pg Dn 7 8 9
Delete End
@ +~ Home Pg Up
+
A S D F G H J K L Ö Ä ’ 4 5 6
#
> Z X C V B N M ; : _ 1 2 3
< | µ , . - End Pg Dn
Enter
,
EUROPIAN-KEYBOARD

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem

Ctrl Alt Alt Gr Ctrl 0
Ins Del
Window 2
Resettaste for

Window 2

Window 1
Print Pause
Num Caps Scroll
Screen Scroll Lock Lock Lock
Sys Rq
Lock Break
Window 1

~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + Page
Backspace Insert Home Num -
/ *
Reset key for

´ 5 6 9 - = Up Lock
1 2 3 4 7 8 0

Q W E R T Y U I O P { } | Page 7 8 9
Tab Delete End
[ ] \ Down Home PgUp
+
A S D F G H J K L : " 4 5 6
Caps Lock Enter
; ’
US-KEYBOARD

Z X C V B N M < > ? 1 2 3
Shift Shift
, . / End PgDn
Enter
0 ,
Window 2

Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl

Ins Del
Reset key for
Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

3-15
 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

4. THE COMMAND LINE

This is where all operational commands are [Link] the initial call up of the PROgramming
SYStem, the cursor will flash in the command line. The command line also shows the actual drive
where all loading and saving will be done.

All commands controlled by the function keys are also entered in the command [Link] a
command is entered in the command line from the keyboard, the function key allocation is changed

Example: By entering STL in the command line the function key commands change:

Functions, from the command line:

[↑] or [↓] SEQC 1), STL, SYMB or TAB-Editor, moves one line up or one line
down. (depends on which editor the commands are entered in).
[PgUp] SEQC 1), STL, SYMB or TAB-Editor, moves to the next page up.
[PgDn] SEQC 1), STL, SYMB or TAB-Editor, moves to the next page down.
[Ctrl] + [↑] or [↓] Input line (The line that is displayed inversley in the editor)moves up
or down one line.
[Ctrl] + [Del] Command line is deleted
[Ctrl] +[Alt] + [↑] or [↓] Repeats the previous command (up to 10 commands are stored).
[Alt] + [TAB] Tabulator line turned off.
[↵] Depending on the editor the cursor will go to the chosen input line.

1)
Dies ist nur in den Ausbaustufen A und B möglich.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-16

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

5. TABULATORS
Tabulators are utilized in the following editors: STL, SYMB and TAB-Editor.

To set the tabs place the cursor in the desired position and with the following key combinations ...

...tab is set: [Ctrl] + [TAB]

...tab is removed: [Ctrl] + [TAB]

...the tabulator line is switched on: [Alt] + [TAB]

tabulator set
current curtsor position

...the tabulator line is switched off: [Alt] + [TAB]

The tabulator line can be switched on directly from the command line. However it is impossible to
set or remove tabs from it.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-17

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

6. WINDOW TECHNIQUES

6.1. WINDOW DEFINITION

The B&R PROgramming SYStem makes working on two programs at the same time, possible.
You can alternate between the two windows or work in both simultaneously. With a B&R two port
Online interface you can connect two controllers (or 2 Processors) and work with them both.

With the "WINDOW" command you can position and size the windows

Command: ↵]
[F10] + [F7 WINDOW] [↵

Both window are displayed, according to the last set position and size.

Window 1

Window 2

Softkey allocation:

[F1 WINDOW 1] When the cursor is in the command line of window

1, the size of the window can be changed.

[F2 WINDOW 2] When the cursor is in the command line of window 2,

the size of the window can be changed.

[F6 EXIT] Switches back to the previous menu.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-18

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

Window defining functions :

[F10] + [F7 WINDOW] [↵] Start editing windows

[F1 WINDOW 1] Edit window 1
[F2 WINDOW 2] Edit window 2
[❖] Entire window moves
[PgUp] Window moves diagnally up and right
[PgDn] Window moves diagnally down and right
[Home] Window moves up and left
[End] Window moves down and left
[Ctrl] + [❖] Changes window size
[Alt] + [←] or [→] Moves visable window interior horizontally
[Esc] or [F6 EXIT] Exits to the previous menu

Note: The B&R PROgramming SYStem stores all window size and position changes
automatically in a file called [Link], so that the last changes made are the start
up parameters for your windows.

6.2. PROGRAMMING IN WINDOWS

With the key combination [Ctrl] + [F1] or [Ctrl] + [F2], you can switch between the two windows
as they have been previously set up. The cursor changes to the window that you have chosen:
Window 1 [Ctrl] + [F1]
Window 2 [Ctrl] + [F2]
Once the windows have been organized and you are again working with a program, the windows
cannot be changed. Window sizing and positioning can only be done while in the window edit
operation.
When the softkey line displays the standard operating commands, the window chosen with the
previous command is the one that you can program in.
This window can be switched to the full size of the screen:
Switch window 1 to full size [⇑] + [F1]
Switch window 2 to full size [⇑] + [F2]

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-19

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

7. QUITTING THE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM

When your PROgramming SYStem work is done, enter in the command line the operating
command END. By choosing this command the following information will be displayed on the
screen:

In the softkey line the following functions are available:

[F8 END] Ends the program

[F1 WINDOW 1] Return to window 1.

[F2 WINDOW 2] Return to window 2.

[F5 EEPROM] If a program hasn't yet been saved to the PROM-user memory, it can still be
done without going back into the STL. By pressing [F5 EEPROM], the
EEPROM menu wil be displayed.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-20

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

8. SYSTEM-RESET

A warm start (reboot) can be done by pressing the [CTRL], ALT] and [DEL] keys at the same time.
This causes the MS-DOS operating system to start again.

To avoid a SYSTEM RESET occuring by accident the operating system asks the following
question:

SYSTEM RESET

<F10> to CONFIRM

<ANY OTHER KEY>

to CONTINUE

To carry out the SYSTEM RESET, press function key [F10].

If the operating system does not restart, you must press any other key to carry out the procedure.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-21

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

9. PROGRAMMING TRANSFERS
BETWEEN PG1000 AND PC
It is possible in Level C to transfer programs from the PG1000 to the PC in PG1000 mode or
programs in the PC (in PG1000 mode) can be transfered to the PG1000.

9.1. SWITCHING
A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
FROM PG1000 TO PC ● ●

1) Make connection from PG1000 (serial interface) to PC (serial interface COM 1) (cable
BRKAPC-0)

2) Enter [F7 LOAD] [F6 PG1000] [↵ ↵] command to PC.

The PROgramming SYStem switches to the PG1000 mode. After a short time the
following message is displayed in the message line of the PC:
W042 QUIT WITH <ESC> KEY
When the message appears, continue with the next step.

↵] command to the PG1000.

3) Enter PRIBM [↵
If a CP80 program is in the PG1000, this is recognized by the PROgramming SYStem in
the PC and the following message is displayed:

W236 Convert to 3 byte mnemonics ( Y / N ) ?

Every command in the PG1000 has a 3 byte length - even with CP80 programs.
Contrary to the PC, where CP80-program commands aren't always 3 bytes long. The
user can now decide if during the program transmission he/she wants a conversion to 3
byte mnemonics to occur or not:
[Y] Generates 3 byte commands, i.e. every command that is shorter than 3 bytes is
expanded to a 3 byte length..
This function is applied if step-by-step switching devices, which only function with
a command length of 3 byte, are used in the program to be transfered.
[N] No conversion to 3 byte mnemonics.

The program loaded by the PG1000 can be processed. Also the additional functions of the PC-mode
can be used, when switching to the PC mode when entering the command PC .It is very important
to remember, that it can't be switched back to the PG1000 mode.

Note: The STL instructions of ladder diagrams are inserted to the PC after the last
existing program END . If t he field is filled with NOP's, there might not be
enough program memory.
Remedy: Delete unnecessary ENDs in the PG1000 before the transfer.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-22

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

9.2. SWITCHING A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ●
FROM PC TO PG1000
Programming can only be switched to PG1000, if the PC has been started in PG1000 or PG-PC
mode.

1) Make connection from PG1000 (serial Interface) to PC (serial Interface COM 1)

(Cable BRKAPC-0)

2) ↵] command to PG1000.
Enter LIBM [↵

3) Enter [F8 SAVE] PG1000 to PC.

4) ↵], if the program should switch in MOTOROLA® Mnemonics

Enter [F1 INTER] [↵
to the PG1000.

↵], if the program should switch in B&R Mnemonic to the

Enter [F2 GERMAN] [↵
PG1000.

If a program written in the PG-PC mode is found, the following question is displayed in the
messageline:

W228 SAVE PG1000 in Mode PG-PC ? ( Y / N )

With [Y] or [N] the user can decide, if he/she should quit the current transfer or go ahead to
the PG1000 mode.

The program can be edited again in PG1000 mode.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-23

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

10. BASIC OPERATION COMMANDS

Following are some important commands used in the PROgramming SYStem:

• Change the program name NAME

• Change program date DATE
• Delete entire program NEW
• Select online interface ONL
• Define program memory SMALL / LARGE
• Call MS-DOS command interpreter DOS
• Text insert mode in the editor [Alt] + [Ctrl] + [Ins]
• Use “command” name as label name

10.1. CHANGE PROGRAM NAME

Syntax: ↵]
NAME <Program name> [↵

Parameter: <Program name> text with max. 10 ASCII characters.

Function: The input of program names.

This is the name given by the user that is indicated in the command line when you call up the
PROgramming SYStem. This name is set as a default for every new start or every time the
command NEW is [Link] also defaults when you use "PROGRAM 01"for window 1 and
"PROGRAM02"for window2.

The program name is ...

...saved together with a program (SAVE <FNAME> PROG)

...loaded with a program (LOAD PROG <FNAME>)

...printed on documentation

...transfered in the control with the program

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-24

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

10.2. CHANGE PROGRAM DATE

Syntax: ↵]
DATE <Date> [↵

Parameter: For <Date>, text can be entered that is 8 characters long. No letters may be used.
The default setting after the start up of the PROgramming SYStem, e.g. after the
command NEW the date is shown in the following format

Year
Month
Day
[Link]

Example: 91.04.25

Function: The program date is set with <date>.

The program date is, just as the program name, saved with the program, transfered in the PLC and
printed.

10.3. DELETING A PROGRAM

Syntax: ↵]
NEW [↵

Function: The entire program of the current window is deleted. The following default values
are set:

• STL-Mnemonic: B&R or the selection defined on start up (MNEM=...).

• Operation: PG1000 or the choice made on start up (PGMODE=...).
• Symbols: SYMBs are deleted or the SYMB files that were defined on
start up are loaded.

To prevent an accidential program deletion, the following question is displayed in the command
line:

W010 ARE YOU SURE ? ( Y / N )

Input: [Y] The entire program is deleted.

[N] The procedure is interrupted.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-25

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

10.4. SETTING THE ONLINE INTERFACE

Syntax: ↵]
ONL<interface> [↵

Parameter: After the input of ONL different <interface> possibilities are offered in the
softkey line:

[F1 B&R0] Selection of the installed B&R online interface.

[F2 LPT1] Selection of the centronics online-interface on the parallel interface
LPT 1 of the PC's
[F3 COM1] Selection of the modem on the serial interface COM 1 of the PC's

Function: Selection and definition, of the online interface that should be applied, for
programming a PLC.

10.5. DEFINITION OF THE A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●
PROGRAM MEMORY
Syntax: ↵]
LARGE [↵
↵]
SMALL [↵

Function: Program memory definition for different CPU-memory modules of type A.

Available Program Lines

Mode
Command PG1000 PG-PC Memory Module

LARGE 4766 4766 EP05 (16 KByte EPROM)

SMALL 2719 2719 RA02 (8 KByte RAM)

Note: LARGE is the default setting.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-26

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

10.6. MS-DOS COMMAND INTERPRETER CALL

Syntax: ↵]
DOS [↵
↵]
DOS "command" [↵

Parameter: "Command" can be any MS-DOS command.

Function: Call up and execution of the MS-DOS command interpreter. The PROgramming
SYStem is not terminated, and remains in the PC work memory.

1) ↵]
DOS [↵

Accessing the MS-DOS interpreter. The MS-DOS input prompt appears. All MS-
DOS commands and other application programs can be executed on this level, if the
remaining PC work memory is sufficient.

The MS-DOS command interpreter can be exited with the EXIT command.

2) ↵]
DOS "command" [↵

MS-DOS "command" and automatically returns to the PROgramming SYStem after

command termination.

Example: Copying all programs of directory c:\project to a disk in drive A:

↵]
DOS "COPY C:\project\*.prg a:" [↵

10.7. TEXT INSERT MODE IN EDITORS

Syntax: [Alt] + [Ctrl] + [Ins]

Function: If the cursor is located in one of the editors, the text insert mode is either turned on
or off with this key combination.

Text insert mode on: When entering text with the keyboard, the existing text is not
overwritten, but moved to the right.. The newly entered text is inserted.

Text in sert mode off: When entering text with the keyboard the existing text is
overwritten beginning at the cursor position.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-27

 Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION

10.8. USE "COMMAND" NAME AS

LABEL NAME
It is possible to use all operating commands like LIST, RUN, COPY, MOVE etc., as label names.
These names can be enteredwithout any difficulties as label names to the STL editor. But to enter
these labels in the command line, they must be put in quotation marks.

Example: A program part, beginning at label LIST should be printed to the line number 1000 .
The followimg line is to be entered:

↵]
[F10] + [F1 PRINT] [F1 PROG] [F1 FROM] "LIST" [F2 TO] 1000 [↵

If the STL program line should be accessed to edit the STL, "LIST" has to be
entered in the command line.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 3-28

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART / LADDER DIAGRAM / LOGIC PLAN / FUNCTION PLAN

CHAPTER 4
SEQUENCE CHART / LADDER DIAGRAM
LOGIC PLAN / FUNCTION PLAN

Contents: 1. General Information 4-3

2. Sequence Chart 4-5
2.1. General Information 4-5
2.2. STL Editor Call 4-5
2.3. SEQC Menu Structure 4-6
2.4. SEQC Editor Functions 4-8
2.5. Starting a Programm 4-11
2.6. CLEAR - Deleting a Sequence Chart 4-12
2.7. SEQC Editor Exit 4-12
3. Ladder Diagram Programming 4-
13 3.1. General Information 4-13
3.2. LAD Editor Call 4-13
3.3. The LAD Menu Structure 4-14
3.4. LAD Programming Basics 4-16
3.5. SYMBOLS / SYMB Mode 4-17
3.6. Contacts and Connections 4-18
3.7. Edit Functions 4-13
3.8. Documentation 4-18
3.9. LAD Call 4-20
3.10. Deleting a LAD 4-20
3.11. Exiting the LAD Editor 4-20

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-1

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART/ LADDER DIAGRAM/ LOGIC PLAN / FUNCTION PLAN

4. LAD Status Test 4-21

4.1. General Information 4-21
4.2. LAD Status Test Call 4-21
4.2.1. [F1 RUN] 4-21
4.2.2. LDMO <NAME> [↵] 4-22
4.3. Menu Structure 4-23
4.4. LAD Status Test Functions 4-24
5. Logic Plan Programming 4-29
5.1. General Information 4-29
5.2. Logic Block 4-29
5.3. Logic Block Editing 4-30
6. Function Plan Programming 4-33
6.1. General Information 4-33
6.2. FBK overview Menu 4-34
6.3. Call of existing loaded FBK's 4-35
6.4. Loading FBKs from Hard Disk or Diskette 4-36
6.5. FBK Editing 4-37
6.6. Deleting a FBK 4-38

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-2

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART / LADDER DIAGRAM / LOGIC PLAN / FUNCTION PLAN

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

The B&R PROgramming SYStem offers the possibility of writing in a graphic programming
language. This programming mode has the advantage, of visualizing "abstract" STL commands
making them clearer and easier to look at. This programming mode is comparable with the design
of a circuit diagram. The user doesn't necessarily need to know the functions of STL commands.

This chapter explains four important PROgramming SYStem functions, that are part of the graphic
programming:

- Sequence Chart

- Ladder Diagram Programming

- Logic Plan Programming (only in the PC mode)

- Function Plan Programming

Advantages: - This type of programming is easier to understand than STL.

- Complex tasks can be completed in a clearly arranged format.

- Ladder diagrams are easier to read than STL programs. Especially, when a
program should be changed and processed after a lengthy period of use.

- In the ladder diagram status test, contact status and internal memory
locations are visualized. This makes control of a running program possible
and is a great support for error detection.

Disadvantages: - Since the graphic programming language of PROgramming SYStem must be

translated into a STL program, the final result will be longer than a program
written in STL.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-3

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART/ LADDER DIAGRAM/ LOGIC PLAN / FUNCTION PLAN

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-4

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART

2. SEQUENCE CHART A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

2.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

The Sequence Chart (SEQC) serves to establish a programming procedure. The sequence for ladder
diagrams that must be processed, STL subprograms and other SEQCs is defined. The call can only
be performed in series, i.e. in the SEQC no options influencing the processing sequence are
possible.

2.2. STL EDITOR CALL

Command: ↵]
[F2 SEQC] <NAME> [↵

With definition of a name An existing or a newly defined SEQC with the name entered is
called and displayed on screen.

Without name definition The last processed SEQC is called.

If no SEQC is existing, an SEQC is called with the name $PRG.

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ●
Important for expansion levels A and B:

A sequence chart with the name $PRG is absolutely necessary in expansion levels
A and B. This sequence chart $PRG corresponds with the main program, from
which all ladder diagrams and additional sequence charts are called.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-5

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART

2.3. SEQC MENU STRUCTURE

e
f

a) Status line: Various information is displayed in the status line:

window number
program name
SEQC name
program date
last SEQC line
number of free user commands
programming mode

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-6

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART

b) Line numbering:
The SEQC editor is numbered from 0 to 49 on the left side of the screen. In a SEQC a maximum of
50 LAD calls can be located. If this is not sufficient, an SEQC can be called up instead of an LAD.

c) SEQC input field

All calls are entered and graphically represented in the input field. Comments can be entered at any
location.

d) Column numbering

The SEQC editor input field is divided into 16 columns (0 - 15). LADs or a different sequence chart
can always be called in column 1. The graphic illustration of a call occupies column 1 to 3. A
comment can be entered in any location that is not occupied with a call.

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ●

In expansion levels A and B after pressing [Esc] in a numbered line, a command line in the SEQC
editor is displayed. Here all PROgramming SYStem operator commands can be entered.

e) Message line

In the message line all messages, that apply to the operator, are displayed. These are error
messages that are caused by the user because of inorrect operation. Messages that require an input
of parameters, can also be displayed.

f) Softley line

In the softkey line the functions [F1] - [F7] of the SEQC editor are offered.

If the cursor is located in the command line of the expansion levels A or B, the SEQC $PRG or the
last processed SEQC is displayed on screen. In this case the function keys are provided with the
most important PROgramming SYStem operating commands.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-7

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART

2.4. SEQC EDITOR FUNCTIONS

All SEQC editor functions can be called up with function keys [F1] to [F7]. If the cursor is located
in the SEQC input field, the function keys are allocated as follows:

[F1 CALLS]

With this function ladder diagrams, sequence charts or statement list subprograms (only in
expansion level C) can be accessed. Only if the cursor is positioned in column 1, can a call be
made. When this key is pressed, the following figure is displayed in the current input field (the
linethat the cursor is in):

blinking cursor

The blinking cursor is in a four-character input field. The user can now enter a name with a
maximum length of four characters. The name must start with a letter.

If a name is entered, to which no ladder diagram, SEQC program, or sequence chart exists, the call
is marked with a “*”.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-8

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART

[F2 EDIT_BLK]

In order to edit an existing call, it must be first selected. This is possible in two different ways:
[F2 EDIT_BLK] + [❖] or
[Alt] + [❖]

A selected call can be displayed in inverse video on the screen:

If a call is selected, the allocation of the function keys changes:

● [F1 DEL_PIC]

Deletes the call from the SEQC. The softkey line is reset again.

● [F2 EDIT_BLK]

With [F2 EDIT_BLK] + [❖] or [Alt] + [❖] a different call can be selected.

● [F3 CHG NAME]

After pressing this function key, the name of the

selected call is displayed in inverse video. The name
can be changed. The change is confirmed with [↵].

[❖]

● By pressing one of the four cursor keys, the selected call is exited and the softkey
line is switched back again.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-9

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART

[F3 DEL_LINE] or [Ctrl] + [Del]

A line in the SEQC input field is deleted with this function. If a call or comment has been inserted
in this line, it can't be deleted.

[F4 INS_LINE] or [Ctrl] + [Ins]

With this function a line in inserted in the SEQC input field. As soon as a call or comment is in line
49, the following error is displayed in the message line:

E106 CANNOT INSERT LINE !

[F5 PRINT]

The current sequence chart is displayed.

1 PROG: PROGRAM01 SEQC:TEST DATE: 91.02.22 END: 03 FPROGS: 4634 PG-PC

00 LAD1

01 LAD2

02 LAD3

[F6 TEXT]

In order to make an operation or program editing possible later on, it is important to create clear
and comprehensive documentation for the program. For this purpose comments can be entered with
the function [F6 TEXT]. After pressing the function key, text can be entered beginning at the
current cursor position. The text input is terminated with [↵].

[F7 ***]

With this function a call is marked, so that it is not considered during the program processing. This
is necessary for example, if certain program parts should not be executed during the program test.

Before pressing [F7 ***] the cursor must be located to the left of the respective call. The call is
marked with “***” and is deactivated. Repeating this procedure activates the call and it is included
in the program execution again.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-10

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART

2.5. STARTING A PROGRAMM

The program can be transfered to the PLC and started in two different ways:
- Pressing the function key [F1 RUN] of the ladder diagram
↵] in the command line.
- Typing RUN [↵

a) Expansion Level A and B:

A sequence chart with the name $PRG must be available. If not, an error message is
displayed after the program start:
E051 INVALID BRANCH
This error message is also displayed, when an invalid call is entered.

b) Expansion Level C:

If sequence charts are used in expansion level C, they must be called up like subprograms
in the SEQC editor.
Example: JSR xxxx xxxx.... SEQC name
"Calls", that are entered in a sequence chart, are automatically transformed when exiting the
sequence chart. A transformed sequence chart can look like this:

$PRG... (Sequence chart name)

$PRG JSR LAD1

JSR LAD2
JSR ....
.
.
RTS

The main program, from which the program is called, is quit with the command
"END".

0000 JSR $PRG

.
.
END

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-11

 Chapter 4 SEQUENCE CHART

2.6. CLEAR - DELETING A SEQUENCE CHART

COMMAND: CLEAR [F7 SEQC] <name> [↵]

With the operating command CLEAR a SEQC can be deleted. If this command is entered to the
command line, the function key allocation changes:

With the selection of [F7 SEQC], input of a SEQC name and confirming with [↵] the respective
SEQC is deleted.

2.7. SEQC EDITOR EXIT

[Esc] Exits the SEQC editor to the command line. The last edited sequence chart is
translated to the STL. This STL translation is only available in level C.

[Ctrl] + [Esc] Exitsfrom the SEQC editor to the command line, and changes after the last
access are not considered. The SEQC is not translated.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-12

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

3. LADDER DIAGRAM A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●
PROGRAMMING

3.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

Ladder diagram programming is a graphic programming language, that is comparable to the
representation of a circuit diagram.

For ladder diagram programming all conventional contact symbols (NC and NO contacts,...) can
optionally be connected.

A 9 character name (symbol) can be assigned to all contacts that are used in the ladder diagram,
making it much easier to read.

B&R PROgramming SYStem gives the possibility to mix programming of ladder diagrams, logic
plans and function plans. For this reason it is possible to resolve the most complex tasks in a
clearly arranged representation.

3.2. LAD EDITOR CALL

Command line input: ↵]
LAD <NAME> [↵

Pressing the function key: ↵]

[F3 LAD] <NAME> [↵

A LAD with the name entered is called or created.

Without the definition of a name, the LAD, that was processed last, is called and displayed. If no
LAD exists, the following error message is displayed:

E174 DEFAULT NAME NOT DEFINED OR WRONG !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-13

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

3.3. THE LAD MENU STRUCTURE

e
f

a) Status line: Various information is given in the status line:

Window number
Program name
LAD name
Program date
Last line in the LAD
Current cursor line
Current cursor column
Programming mode

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-14

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

b) Line numbering

In every LAD created, a maximum of 50 lines are available. The LAD editor is numbered from 0 to
49 on the left side of the screen.

c) LAD Editing field

In the LAD editing field all connections and contacts are inserted and represented graphically. For
LAD documentation, comments can be entered as well.

After accessing a LAD, the cursor is located in line 0 / column 0. Within the editing field the cursor
can be moved by means of [❖].

d) Column numbering

PG1000 mode The LAD is divided into 8 columns (00 to 07) .

PG-PC mode The LAD is divided into 16 columns (00 to 15) .

e) Message line

In the message line, messages concerning user errors or messages requiring the input of parameters
are displayed.

f) Softkey line

In the softkey line, the most important commands of the LAD editor are offered on function keys
[F1] to [F8]. [F9] serves as a shift key for further functions.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-15

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

3.4. LAD PROGRAMMING BASICS A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Allocations
All paths are started in the column 0 with input allocations (load commands) and ended with
output allocations in column 15. Input and output allocations are presented differently.
Input allocation Output allocation

The remaining columns are used for the creation of connections and the installation of logic and
function blocks.

Path
In the ladder diagram the horizontal lines are called PATHS. These paths are provided with an 8
bit value contrary to “digital transmission”.

Address preselections
The following address preselections are possible in an LAD:
I Digital Input S Start Timer
O Digital Output T 1 bit Signal elapsed time
F Flag (1 bit memory) P Peripheral module
R Register (8 bit memory) G Global RAM in the PP601)
# Immediate constant value B Block memory in the PP601)

The input of these address preselections makes the call of a contact possible.

Example: Call of an Input allocation. The I 040

should be loaded . The cursor is located in
column 0. After
pressing the key [I] the following contact
appears:

Entering 040 [↵↵] completes the input. The

cursor is now located to the right of entered
input allocation.

1)
Only possible in the PC80 mode

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-16

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

3.5. SYMBOLS / SYMB MODE A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

In the SYMB editor (chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR) a 9 character symbol can be allocated to every
address used in the LAD editor, displayed under the contact in the LAD. Reading and understand-
ing a LAD is made easier, like the following example shows:

With [F9] + [F1 SYMB MODE] it is switched to the symbol mode. By again pressing this key
combination, the display mode is exited. So it can be selected between two address representations:

1) Symbol allocation display above the contact

(Only addresses, that are not provided with SYMB, are displayed)

2) Address display above the contact and SYMB display under the contact

A contact can also be called up with the direct input of a symbol. The advantage is, that the user
doesn't have to remember a lot of addresses. A contact is simply called up with the key [K], after
which a 9 character input field for the SYMB is displayed above the contact:

The user can now enter an address with the input of

an symbol allocation, that is already distributed in
the SYMB-editor.
E.g.: NOT OUT (see example above)

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-17

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

3.6. CONTACTS AND A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●
CONNECTIONS
All contacts are offered by the function keys. Pressing [F2 CONTACT] opens the contact input menu;
the occupancy of the softkey line changes:

With the function key [F9] the occupancy of the softkey line is switched and additional contacts are
offered:

With the function keys any contacts and connections, that can be used in the LAD editor, are accessible.
With the [Esc] key the contact input menu can be exited. The softkey line is switched back and the
most important LAD functions are displayed again.

CONTACT OVERVIEW

[F1...F8] [F9] + [F1...F8]

Contact (NO) F1 - Negative Edge Generation

F1
Positive and Negative Edge
F2 / Negation (NC) F2 &
Generation

Temporary Storage in a
F3 Horizontal Connection F3 * Flag or Counter

Vertical Connection left of Exclusive-Or Connection

F4 the cursor to top F4 X

Vertical Connection right of Address contact to the

F5 the cursor to top
F5 [ADR
Connection to a function
block
Latch a 1 bit address Connecting a Label to a
F6 L F6 [AL
Function Block

Unlatch a 1 bit address Temporary Storage without

F7 U F7 >MARKE Address Definition

F8 + Positive Edge Generation F8 >>LABEL Conditional Branch

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-18

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

F1 A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Contact
Representation:

Call: - <address preselection> <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F1] <address preselection> <address> [↵]
- [F2 CONTACT] [F1] [F3 SYMB_INP] <Symbol allocation> [↵]
- [K] <Symbol allocation> [↵]

Function: The contents of the specified address is loaded (input allocation).

If the contact is not located in the first or last column, it is loaded in the defined
memory location and is connected in AND relation with the status of the path.

If the contact is in the last column, the status of the path is saved under the
defined address (Output allocation). The contact has a different appearance in
the right column:

In order to call up an output allocation, there is another possibility in the LAD

editor main menu:

Call: - Exiting the contact input menu with [Esc], to get into the main menu.
- [F9] + [F2] <address preselection> <address> [↵]
- [F9] + [F2] [F3 SYMB_INP] <symbol assignment> [↵]

[F9] + F2
Function: With this function a path is made from the current cursor position to the last
column and in the last column a contact is automatically assigned for an output.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-19

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

F2 /
● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Negation (Normal Closed Contact)

Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F2] <address preselection> <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F2] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]
- [N] <address preselection> <address> [↵]
- [N] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]
- [/] <address preselection> <address> [↵]
- [/] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]

Restrictions: only 1 bit addresses (I, O, F, S, T)

Function: To load the contents of the defined memory location.

If this contact is in the last column, the value of the path is negated and stored in
the defined memory location.

If the contact is located in a different column, the contents of the defined

memory location are inverted and connected in AND relation with the path.

If existing contacts should be negated or the negation should be interrupted, the

cursor must be positioned in the contact and the key [N] or [/] must be pressed.

Note: The negation for the addresses G to N of extended output/input modules

(24 channel cards) is not possible.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-20

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

F3 A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Horizontal Connections
Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F3]

- [Space]

Function: This function is used, to draw a horizontal path or to delete an existing path.

If the cursor is located on an existing path, it is deleted by pressing [Space] or

[F2 CONTACT] [F3].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-21

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

F4 F5 A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Vertical Connection
Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F4]

to the left of the cursor
[V]
- [F2 CONTACT] [F5]
[Ctrl] [V] to the right of the cursor

Function: The connection is made to the left/right of the cursor up to the next path. With
the same function an existing connection to the next horizontal path is deleted.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-22

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

F6 L A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Latch a 1 bit address

Representation

Call: - [L] <address preselection> <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F6] <address preselection> <address> [↵]
- [F2 CONTACT] [F6] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]
- [L] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]

Restrictions: This contact can be called up in the last column of the LAD in connection with 1
bit addresses (F, O, S).

Function: The terminated memory location is set to “1”, if the low value bit of a path is
“1”. The application of [L] is only recommended in connection with [U].

Note: Presetting the addresses G to N with extended input/output modules (24

channel cards) is not possible.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-23

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

F7 U
● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Unlatch a 1 bit address

Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F7] <address preselection> <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F7] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocations> [↵]
- [U] <address preselection> <address> [↵]
- [U] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocations> [↵]

Restrictions: This contact can be called up in the last column of the LAD in connection with
1 bit addresses (F, O, S).

Function: The connected memory location is set “0”, if the low value bit of the path is
“1”. The application of [U] is only recommended in connection with [L].

Note: Resetting addresses G to N of extended input/output modules (24 channel

cards) is impossible.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-24

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

F8 + A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Positive Edge Generation

Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F8] [F] <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F8] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocations> [↵]
- [+] [F] <address> [↵]
- [+] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocations> [↵]

Function : If a least significant bit of a path changes status from “0” to “1”, this contact
gives a pulse with the length of exactly one program cycle “1”.

Note: An edge-flag must be defined for this function, that can't be changed by
the program in another location. If positive edge generation is used more
often, a new flag must be distributed every time.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-25

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F9] + F1 -
● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Negative Edge Generation

Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F1] [F] <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F1] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]
- [-] [F] <address> [↵]
- [-] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]

Function: If the least significant bit of the path changes its status from “1” to “0”, this
contact gives a pulse that is exactly one program cycle long “1”.

Note: For this function an edge flag must be defined, that may not be changed
by the program in a different location. If negative edge generation is used
more often, a different flag must be defined every time.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-26

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F9] + F2 &
● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Positive and Negative Edge Generation

Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F2] [F] <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F2] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]
- [&] [F] <address> [↵]
- [&] [F3 SYM_INP] <Symbol allocation> [↵]

Function: If the least significant bit changes its status, this contact gives a pulse, that is
exactly one program cycle long “1”.

Note: For this function an edge-flag must be defined, that may not be changed
by the program in a different location. If the edge generation is used
more often, a different flag must be distributed every time.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-27

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F9] + F3 * ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Temporary Storage
Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F3] <address preselection> <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F3] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]
- [*] <address preselection> <address> [↵]
- [*] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]

Restrictions: Only F, R, O or S can be entered as <address preselection >.

This function can not be called up in the first or last column.

Function: The path connections are stored in the specified address. The status of the path
does not change.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-28

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F9] + F4 X
● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Exclusive-OR Relation

Representation

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F4] <address preselection> <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F4] [F3 SYMB_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]
- [X] <address preselection> <address> [↵]
- [X] [F3 SYMB_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]

Function: The existing result of a path is connected in exclusive Or relation to the contents
of the defined memory location.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-29

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F9] + F5 [ADR
● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Address Contact
Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F5] <address preselection> <address> [↵]

- [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F5] [F3 SYM_INP] <symbol allocation> [↵]

Function: This contact is used, to connect the address of a memory location to a function
block. I.e.: The address is submitted to the FBK, not the contents of the memory
location.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-30

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

[F9] + F6 [AL A B
●
C
●
PG1000 CP80 PG-PC
● ● ●
PC80
●

Label contact
Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F6] <LABEL> [↵]

Function: This contact is used, to connect the address of a label to a function block. It is
used for example for the connection of tables to the FBKs.

Note: A label may have a maximum length of four characters and must start
with a letter.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-31

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F9] + F7 >MARKE ● ● ● ● ●

Temporary storage without address definition

Representation:

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F7] <Marke> [↵]

Restrictions: <Marke> may have a maximum of 6 characters.

Function: The connection result of a 1 byte path is temporarily stored in an internal

memory location of the PLC, that can't be accessed by the user. A defined marke
may be present only twice in the ladder diagram; once as the source and once as
the destination.

The path (line number) which is to continue or to be interrupted is displayed

below the marke.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-32

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F9] + F8 >>LABEL ● ● ● ● ●

Conditional Branch
Representation :

Call: - [F2 CONTACT] [F9] + [F8] <LABEL> [↵]

Note: <LABEL> may have a maximum length of four characters and must start with a
letter.

In the line, where the second LABEL is entered, no additional contact may
be entered.

Function: A conditional branch is allowed with the input of a label in a path. The branch is
executed, if the path is not zero. (In the above example, line 9 is not executed
any more.)

Under the label is displayed, in which line the processing is to be continued or

interrupted.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-33

 Chapter 4 Ladder Diagram

Contact Input Interruption

If a contact has been called with one of the described function keys, the PROgramming SYStem
waits for the input of an address, label or marke. This input can be interrupted with the [Esc] key.
The contact is deleted and the cursor appears again in the LAD editor.

AND Relation A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

An AND relation corresponds with the serial switch of contacts.

Example:

The input I 001 is connected with the input I002 in AND relation and the result is assigned to the
output O 010. The corresponding STL program is as follows:

LDAA I 001
ANDA I 002
STAA O 010

OR Relation A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

An OR relation is equivalent to the parallel connection of contacts.

Example:

The input I 001 is connected to the input I 002 in OR relation and the result is assigned to the
output O 010. The respective STL program is as follows:

LDAA I 001
ORAA I 002
STAA O 010

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-34

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM

3.7. EDIT FUNCTIONS A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

In order to subsequently change and process ladder diagrams several editing functions are avail-
able. When shifting the softkey line with the [F9] key the following functions are offered:

Delete Column
Command: - [F9] + [F3 DEL_CLMN]
- [Del]
Function: The contact or path segment in which the cursor is located, is deleted. The
cursor is moved to the left by one position.

Insert Column
Command: - [F9] + [F4 INS_CLMN]
- [Ins]
Function: A line draw (one column wide) is inserted in the path. The contacts to the right
of the cursor are moved to the right. The cursor must be located on a contact, or
directly to the left of a contact, to be able to perform this function.

Delete Line
Command: - [F9] + [F5 DEL-LINE]
- [Ctrl] + [Del]
Function: The line in which the cursor is positioned, is deleted.

Insert line
Command: - [F9] + [F6 INS_LINE]
- [Ctrl] + [Ins]
Function: The line in which the cursor is positioned, is moved down. A line is inserted in
the current cursor position.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-35

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM

SRCH_FUNCTION
Command : - [F9] + [F7 SEARCH]

Function: With this function the softkey line allocation is changed. Different possibilities
are offered, for which criteria the user can search:

[F1 S_LINE] - Search for line:

In an input field a line number between 0 and 49 can be entered. The cursor is set to the
specified line.

[F2 S_ADDR] - Search for address:

A search mask is displayed, where the desired addresses or address parts are to be entered.
After quitting with [↵] the LAD is searched for the specified address from the current
cursor position to the end.
If no contact, which is identical to the defined search mask exists, the following message is
displayed:
E129 VARIABLE NOT FOUND
When a contact with the corresponding address is located, the LAD cursor is positioned on
the contact.
In both cases the allocation of the softkey line is changed :

[F1 CONT] After locating a contact, the search for other addresses can be continued
by pressing this key.
[F3 SRCH_UP] The search goes from the current cursor position to the top.
[F4 SRCH_DWN] The search goes from the current cursor position to the bottom.
To continue the search procedure in a new direction, the function key
[F1 CONT] must be pressed. The current search direction is marked by
the text in the soft key line that is displayed in inverse video.
[F7 END] The search is ended with this function key.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-36

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM

[F3 S_SYMB] - Search for Symbols:

A search mask appears, in which the desired symbol must be entered. After quitting with
[↵] the LAD is searched for the defined SYMB from the current cursor position to the end.

If no contact exists, that is identical to the specified search mask, the following message is
displayed:

E129 VARIABLE NOT FOUND

When a contact with the corresponding SYMB is located, the LAD cursor is positioned on
the contact.

In both cases the softkey line allocation is changed:

The rest of the operation is the same as the address search.

[F4 S_FBK] - Search for function blocks:

A search mask appears, where the desired FBK name must be entered. After quitting with
[↵] the LAD is searched for the defined FBK from the current cursor position to the end.

If no FBK exists, that is identical with the search mask, the following message is displayed:

E129 VARIABLE NOT FOUND

When locating a FBK, the LAD cursor is positioned on it.

In both cases the softkey line allocation is changed:

The rest of the operation is the same as the address search.

If a FBK is found, it is displayed in inverse video. With [F7 END] the user gets back to the
LAD editor. The FBK is still displayed in inverse video, and the LAD editor is positioned in
the FBK editor mode (more information is given in this chapter, section 6.5. Editing FBKs).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-37

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM

[F5 S-LABEL] - Search for Label:

A search mask is defined, in which the desired label must be entered. After quitting with
[↵] the LAD is searched for the specified label from the current cursor position to the end.

If no label exists, that is identical with the defined search mask, the following message is
displayed:

E129 VARIABLE NOT FOUND

When locating a label, the LAD cursor is positioned on it.

In both cases the softkey line allocation is changed:

The rest of the operation is the same as the address search.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-38

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM

Exchange-Function
Command: - [F9] + [F8 CHANGE]

Function: Searches for an address (address part), to be exchanged with another address
(address part) of your choice.

Two masks must be defined for this function; the search and exchange mask:

Search mask: Input of the address (address part), that should be exchanged
Exchange mask: Input of the address (address part), that should be inserted.

After the input of both masks is ended with [↵], the address that is identical with the search
mask is searched for. The search procedure begins from the cursor position, downwards, to
the end of the LAD.

Be sure to include spaces in the address. If no address exists, that is identical with the
specified search mask, the exchange procedure is interrupted.

When locating an address, the LAD cursor is positioned there, and the allocation of the
softkey line is changed:

[F1 CONT] The located address is not exchanged by the exchange mask and the
search for the next address is continued.

[F3 EXCHANGE] The located address is exchanged by the exchange mask, and the
search for the next address is continued.

[F3 REST] All addresses, that are identical with the search mask, are replaced by the
exchange mask without any questions.

[F7 END] With this function key the exchange procedure is interrupted.

Note: To guarantee that an exchange procedure is executed in the entire LAD,

the cursor must first be positioned in line 0 / column 0.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-39

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM

3.8. DOCUMENTATION
In order to make subsequent editing and processing of the program possible, it is important, to
create clear and comprehensive documentation for the program. The clearer and the more definite a
document is, the more understandable and efficient the program will be, even after several years.

The program readability is influenced by several elements:

- Structured Programming

- useful allocation of Label, LAD, SEQC and FBK name

- definite and clear symbol allocation

- comments, that are easy to understand

[F6 TEXT] - Comment allocation

Any comment can be allocated with this function on every LAD position, where no contact, path,
FBK or logic block is located.

The entry of comments is terminated with [↵], and the input mode for the LAD is displayed again.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-40

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM

[F5 PRINT] - Print of the called LAD

With this function, the last selected LAD is printed. This print out can be used for correction, since
a copy is easier to read, than the display on screen. Also, the user has complete documentation in
hand.

Example:

1 PROG:MOTOR-CTRL LAD:MO-1 DATE:92.02.19 END:16 LINE:01 COLUMN:00 PG PC

******************************************************************************
00** M O T O R 1 assembly line supply **
******************************************************************************

01 * Motor off, if NOT OUT is pressed!

I 000 O 010
02 | | (U)
NOT OUT Motor

I 000 no additional function

03 | | >>END processing!
NOT OUT 13

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
05 * Motor off, if object passed the light barrier!

I 001 F 100 O 010

06 | | |-| (U)
Light barr. Motor

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
08 * Motor on, if supply is required!
* Motor is not turned on, if an object is located in the
range of the light barrier.
09

I 002 F 101 I 001 O 010

10 | | |+| |/| (L)
Supply Light barr. Motor

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
12

13>>END
03

O 010 O 011
14 | | ( )
Motor Lamp M1

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-41

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM

3.9. LAD CALL

Sequence Chart Call A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

In all expansion levels of the PROgramming SYStem a LAD can be called from a SEQC. Detailed
information on the LAD call from a SEQC is given in this chapter in 2. SEQUENCE CHARTS
(SEQC-Editor)”.

Statement List Call A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

In expansion level C calling a LAD from a STL is also possible. The following command must be
inserted in the desired location of the STL program:

JSR xxxx xxxx .... name of the LAD to be called

3.10. DELETING A LAD

Command: ↵]
CLEAR [F6 LAD] <Name> [↵

With the operating command CLEAR a LAD can be deleted. If this command is entered in the
command line, the softkey allocation line is deleted:

With the selection of [F6 LAD], input of a LAD name and confirmation with [↵] the respective
LAD is deleted.

3.11. EXITING THE LAD EDITOR

[Esc] Exits the LAD editor into the command line. The last processed LAD is
translated to the processed STL. This STL translation is only accessible in
expansion level C.

[Ctrl] + [Esc] Exits the LAD editor into the command line. The changes since the last
access are not considered. The LAD is not translated new.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-42

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM STATUS TEST

4. LAD STATUS TEST A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

The LAD status test is an efficient device for an ONLINE watch of the PLC and for visualizing of
the contact status and the internal memory locations.

The contacts and connections in the LAD are displayed at “logic 1” in inverse video or as double
line. Active values are displayed in the function blocks.

The LAD status test is an important device for the installation of programs and for error detection.

4.2. LAD STATUS TEST CALL

4.2.1. [F1 RUN]

Command: [F1 RUN]

Function: 1) The program is translated and transferred to the PLC.

2) Contrary to a RUN from the command line no RESET is triggered in the

PLC CPU.

3) The menu of the LAD status test is called.

4) If a status test is running in the other window, the following error message is
displayed:

E188 LDMO NOT POSSIBLE

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-43

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM STATUS TEST

↵]
4.2.2. LDMO <NAME> [↵
Command: ↵]
LDMO <NAME> [↵

Function: 1) The menu of the LAD status test is called. The program is not transferred to the PLC
CPU.

2) If the program has been changed since the last status test, it is realized by the
PROgramming SYStem. The following warning is displayed in the message line:

W233 MAKE PROGRAM INFO ( Y / N ) ?

[Y] program in PLC and PG are compared

[N] command is interrupted

If [N] is entered or the program in the PG is not identical with the one in the PLC,
an error message is displayed:

E179 PROGRAM IN CPU AND PG DIFFERENT !

3) If a STL status test is running in the other window, the following error message is
displayed:

E188 LDMO NOT POSSIBLE

4) When calling LDMO without entering a name, the last used LAD status test is
called.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-44

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM STATUS TEST

4.3. MENU STRUCTURE

c 1

d 3
e
f
a) Status line is identical to the LAD editor status line.

b) Line numbering
In every LAD created, a maximum of 50 lines are available. The left part on the screen is num-
bered from 0 to 49.

c) LAD-Status Display Field

In the LAD status display field the logic states of the path and the contacts are graphically dis-
played. Active values are displayed in function blocks:
1) Active values in FBKs (different display formats)
2) Path status (double line => 8-Bit value of the path is higher than zero)
3) Contact status (inverse => value higher than zero)
If the LAD is larger than the screen, the displayed section can be moved with the [↑], [↓], [PgUp],
[PgDn], [Ctrl] + [PgUp] and [Ctrl] + [PgDn] keys.

d) Column numbering
PG1000-mode The LAD is divided into 8 columns (00 to 07).
PG-PC-mode The LAD is divided into 16 columns (00 to 15).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-45

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM STATUS TEST

e) Message line
In the message, line messages concerning user errors or messages requiring the input of parameters
are displayed.

f) Softkey line
In the softkey line, the most important functions of the LAD status test are offered on the function
keys [F1] to [F8].

4.4. LAD STATUS TEST FUNCTIONS

All functions of the LAD status test are accessible with the function keys [F1] to [F8]. The softkey
line is allocated as follows:

[F1 MODE_ALL]
All contacts and paths used in the ladder diagram are represented in inverse video or as a double
line according to their logic states .
All other active values (in function blocks) are displayed as numbers (the display format can be
selected).

[F2 MODE_FBK]
Only the active values, that are used in the function blocks, are displayed. The logic states of the
contacts and the path are not displayed.
With this representation , no time for the graphic illustration is required. This display mode is used,
if active values, that rapidly change, should be displayed by FBKs.

[F3 MODE_CON]
Only the logic states of the contacts are displayed. Active values and status of the path are not
considered for the representation.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-46

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM STATUS TEST

With the function keys [F4] to [F7] different display formats for active values can be selected:

[F4 UNSIGNED] The display of active values is decimal without sign.

[F5 DECIMAL] The display of active values is decimal with sign.

[F6 HEX] The display of active values is hexadecimal.

[F7 BINARY] The display of active values is binary. It is only possible to display a
value with a maximum size of one byte in the binary format. If the
value is higher than one byte it is displayed in the hexadecimal
format.

REPRESENTATION LIMITS OF ACTIVE VALUES

F1 MODE_ALL F2 MODE_FBK

Min. Max. Min. Max.

UNSIGNED 0 9 999 999 0 16 777 215

(=$FFFFFF)

DECIMAL -999 999 9 999 999 -9 999 999 16 777 215

(=$FFFFFF)

HEX $0 $FFFFFF $0 $FFFFFF

BINARY % 00 0000 % 11 1111 % 0000 0000 % 1111 1111

overflow-display >>>>>>> >>>>>>>>

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-47

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM STATUS TEST

[F8 LM_EDIT]
With this function, memory locations can be displayed and changed in the LAD status test.
The user also gets information about the CPU, operating system and the currently running program.

The screen format is changed as follows:

a
b c

a) Symbol display
In this field the symbol allocation of the address, in which the cursor is positioned, is displayed.

b) Status fields address preselection

address
Status field structure:
number of bytes
display format

1) address field

2) display field

3) input field

A full description of the usage of status fields is given in chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST section
“7. STL Status Test”.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-48

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM STATUS TEST

c) Module information
This three-line display field contains the following information:

Program name program date

module series module type

program version number of

runs in RAM/PROM operating system

additional information
A = arithmetic processor
S = serial interface

SOFTKEY LINE ALLOCATION IN THE LM-EDIT MODE

[F1] to [F5] display formats
These function keys allow the change of the display format in the status field. The use of [F1] to
[F5] is only possible, if the cursor is located in the field “display formats”.
[F1 DECIMAL] Memory location contents are represented in decimal format.
[F2 HEX] Memory location contents are represented in hexadecimal format.
[F3 BINARY] Memory location contents are represented in binary-format.
[F4 ASCII] Memory location contents are represented in ASCII-format.
[F5 BIT] Only the least significant bit with a maximum of 8 memory locations
is displayed. This display format is used more efficiently in connection
with 1 bit memory locations.
With direct input via keyboard, additional display formats are possible. Detailed information about it
and the handling of status fields is given in chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST section “7. STL status
test”.
[F7 EXIT 0]
Exits the LM-EDIT-mode. The defined addresses (status fields) and the information about the
module are still displayed.
[F8 EXIT]
Exits the LM-EDIT mode but status fields and module information are not displayed any more.
[Esc]
Pressing this key exits the LAD status test back into the LAD editor.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-49

 Chapter 4 LADDER DIAGRAM STATUS TEST

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-50

 Chapter 4 LOGIC PLAN

5. LOGIC PLAN A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●
PROGRAMMING

5.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

LP programming is to be considered as completion of the ladder diagram. The three basic types of
logic connections are available in form of blocks, that are very similar to gates in the digital
technique.

These logic blocks are included in the LAD and can be combined optionally with all LAD ele-
ments.

5.2. LOGIC BLOCK

Before a logic block is called up, the cursor must be positioned in the LAD editor in the line/
column, where a logic block should be inserted.

For the call of a logic block, the softkey line is switched by pressing the function key [F3 LOGIC_BK],
which is offered in the LAD editor. The softkey line allocation is changed:

With the function keys [F1 AND], [F2 OR] and [F3 EXOR] the desired logic block can be selected.

If the cursor is for example in line 1/column 1, one of the following logic blocks will be displayed
on screen:

With the [Esc] key it can be switched back to the softkey line. The usual functions for the LAD
editor appear.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-51

 Chapter 4 LOGIC PLAN

5.3. LOGIC BLOCK EDITING

To change a logic block, it must be selected with [F7 EDIT_BLK] + [❖] or [Alt] + [❖]. The cursor
is positioned within a logic block after its selection . The cursor can be moved within the logic
block with the [❖] keys. If a logic block is selected, the softkey allocation changes:

Key FUNCTION
Key combination

[F1 DEL_BLK] The selected logic block is deleted.

[Alt] + [Del]

[F2 NEGATE] The input/output, that is located on the cursor, is inverted.

[N]
[/]

[F3 CONNECT] With this function, an input is deleted or set.

[Space]

[F4] If the cursor is in the logic block, a vertical connection up to the next
[V] path is created directly left of the logic block.

[F5] If the cursor is in the initial page, a vertical connection up to the next
[Ctrl] + [V] path is created directly right to the logic block.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-52

 Chapter 4 LOGIC PLAN

Additional functions are available with the function key [F9]:

Key FUNCTION
Key combination

[F9] + [F3 BLK_LFT] The selected logic block is moved to the left by one column.
[Del]

[F9] + [F4 BLK_RT] The selected logic block is moved to the right by one column.
[Ins]

[F9] + [F5 INS_LINE] The selected logic block is expanded by one line. The cursor must be
[Ctrl] + [Ins] positioned on the input page for this function.

[F9] + [F6 The selected logic block is reduced by one line.

DEL-LINE] The cursor must be positioned on the input page for this function.
[Ctrl] + [Del]

When exiting the block with the [❖] keys the LP editing mode is exited. The usual allocation of the
softkey line in the LAD editor appears.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-53

 Chapter 4 LOGIC PLAN

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-54

 Chapter 4 FUNCTION PLAN

6. FUNCTION PLAN A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●
PROGRAMMING

6.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

The FP programming is similar to structured programming. Program parts are displayed as rectan-
gles on the screen. The user only connects input parameters and the outputs of the block. An
extensive collection of standard function blocks is available at B&R, which makes specific
programming easier. Standard FBKs exist for:

- analogue value processing

- mathematics function

- general data processing

- communication

- software for support of the hardware available at B&R.

These FBKs are included in the LAD and can be combined with all LAD elements.

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

Note ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

In the expansion level A only the standard function blocks of B&R are loaded and
included in the LAD.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-55

 Chapter 4 FUNCTION PLAN

6.2. FBK OVERVIEW MENU

Before an FBK can be called, the cursor must be positioned in the LAD editor in the line, where the
FBK should be inserted. If the cursor is in column 0, no FBK can be positioned/loaded.

Pressing the function key [F4 FBK] opens the FBK overview menu for a FBK call. This overview
displays the FBKs, that have already been loaded in the application program.

b
c
d
a) FBK Overview

All FBKs, that are used in the program, are listed in this overview. If the FBK list is longer than
one screen page, it can be leafed through with [↑], [↓], [PgDn] or [PgUp].

For easier recognition of an FBK, a short information line about the respective FBK is displayed.
This short information is defined by the creation of a FBK (only possible in expansion level C,
chapter 10 CREATING FUNCTION BLOCKS ).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-56

 Chapter 4 FUNCTION PLAN

b) Input line
With the input of an FBK name, a desired FBK can be loaded without selecting [❖]. The input is
terminated with [↵].

c) Message line
In the message line messages concerning user errors or messages requiring the input of parameters
are displayed.

f) Softkey line
In the softkey line the most important functions are offered on keys [F1] to [F5].

6.3. CALLING EXISTING FBK'S

FBKs, that have been loaded once in the program, do not need to be called a second time from the
hard disk or floppy, even if a FBK is used more often in a LAD or in several LAD's, i.e. storage
space is saved.

KEY FUNCTION

↑]
[↑ Selection of a FBK from the FBK overview. '
↓]
[↓

[F4 LOAD_FBK] The selected FBK is included in the LAD.

If the inserted FBK uses private memory locations, these must be
entered. Private memory locations are register or flags, that are used
by the program of the FBK (e.g.: for the storage of results).
The FBK is displayed in inverse video in the LAD editor. In the softkey
line all functions are offered, that are necessary for the FBK editing.

[F5 DISP_FBK] The selected FBK is displayed, to check if the desired FBK corre-
sponds.
[Esc] leads back to the FBK overview menu.

[Esc]
Exiting to the LAD editor.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-57

 Chapter 4 FUNCTION PLAN

6.4. LOADING FBKS FROM HARD DISK OR DISKETTE

FBKs can only be read from the “current” drive. This drive can be changed only in the command
line with the operating command DRIVE <drive name> [↵ ↵].

KEY FUNCTION

[F1 FBK_STD] Loading a standard FBK for the standard library. After pressing this
function key, the standard FBKs, that are located in the directory
\PGSTD (standard directory) are displayed. FBKs, that are not
marked as standard FBKs by B&R, are not listed and can't, for this
reason, be read.

[F2 FBK_USER] Loading an FBK from the user library. After pressing this function
key, all FBKs are displayed, that are located in the directory
\PGUSER (user directory).

In both cases the softkey line changes as follows:

Key FUNCTION

[F1 NEXTDIR] If the cursor of the FBK overview menu is located in a directory, this
directory is opened. The contents of this directory are displayed. This
function corresponds with the DOS-command “cd <directory
name>”.

[F2 PREVDIR] The previous directory is changed and its contents are displayed. [F2
PREVDIR] corresponds with the DOS command “cd ..”.

[F3 DFLTDIR] The current directory is defined as the “standard-directory” or as the

“user-directory”, depending if [F1 FBK_STD] or [F2 FBK_USER]
was previously used.

[Esc] The FBK overview menu of existing FBKs is displayed again.

With [↑], [↓], [F4 LOAD_FBK] and [F5 DISP_FBK] a FBK can be selected and loaded from the
current drive the same as calling existing FBKs.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-58

 Chapter 4 FUNCTION PLAN

6.5. FBK EDITING

To change an FBK, it first must be selected. This is possible in two different ways:
- With either of the key combinations [F7 EDIT_BLK] + [❖ ❖] or [Alt] + [❖ ❖] the LAD
cursor is moved into a FBK. If a FBK is selected in this way, it is displayed in inverse
video.
- With the function [F8 SRCH_FBK] + [❖ ❖] or [Ctrl] + [❖
❖ ] an FBK is searched for in the
direction entered beginning from the current cursor position. The first FBK found is
selected and displayed in inverse video. If no FBK is found, an error message is
displayed:
E117 NO FBK IN SEARCH PATH

If a FBK is selected in one of these ways , the allocation of the softkey line changes:

Key FUNCTION
Key combination

[F1 DEL_FBK] The selected FBK is deleted of the LAD.

[Alt] + [Del]

[F2 CHNG_ADD] The addresses of private memory locations can be changed. Every
change must be terminated with [↵].
If an FBK has more private memory locations, these can be selected
with [❖].
This mode is exited with [Esc].

[F3 BLK_LFT] The FBK is moved left one column.

[Del]

[F4 BLK_RT] The FBK is moved right one column.

[Ins]

[F8 SRCH_FBK] + According to which of the [v] keys is pressed, the next FBK is
❖]
[❖ searched for in the respective direction. The located FBK is displayed
❖]
[Ctrl] + [❖ in inverse video, and can be edited.

The FBK editing mode is exited and the FBK is displayed normally
❖]
[❖ again.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-59

 Chapter 4 FUNCTION PLAN

6.6. DELETING A FBK A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

STL listings of FBKs that can't be used in the LAD, can be located in the working memory. The
FBK is also listed in the FBK overview menu and could be included again in a LAD. If such FBKs
are not required any more, valuable memory is occupied.

The STL listing of a FBK can only be deleted from the STL in the expansion level C .

DELETING A FBK FROM THE STL:

In order to delete a STL listing of a FBK from the STL, the start address and the end address must
be known. With the operating command DELETE BLOCK or [F9] + [F7 DELETE] [F7 BLOCK]
the specified range is deleted from the STL. The description of this command is given in chapter 5
STATEMENT LIST.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 4-60

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

CHAPTER 5
STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

Contents: 1. General Information 5-3

2. STL Editor Access 5-4
3. STL Editor Structure 5-4
4. Input Line 5-6
4.1. Insert-Mode 5-6
4.2. Line Number / Program Step Number 5-8
4.3. Comment Line 5-9
4.4. Label 5-9
4.5. Command Field 5-10
4.6. Negation and
Extended Addressing 5-11
4.7. Address Preselection 5-12
4.8. Address 5-13
4.9. Symbol Field 5-16
4.10. Comment Field 5-16
5. Functions in the STL Editor 5-17
5.1. Softkey Functions 5-17
5.2. Additional Functions 5-19
5.3. Exit the STL Editor 5-19

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-1

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

6. Edit Functions of the Command Line 5-20

6.1. Replace / Exchange (CHAN) 5-20
6.2. Global Exchange/Replacement(GLOBCHAN)
5-24
6.3. Search (FIND) 5-25
6.4. Search and List (FINDL)
Search and Print (FINDP) 5-27
6.5. Copy (COPY) 5-28
6.6. Move (MOVE) 5-30
6.7. Delete (DELETE BLOCK) 5-30
7. STL Status Test 5-31
7.1. General Information 5-31
7.2. Access to STL Status Test 5-31
7.3. Menu Structure 5-33
7.4. Status Fields 5-36
7.4.1. Status Field Structure 5-36
7.4.2. Status Field Editing 5-43
7.5. Functions in the STL Status Test 5-44
8. Additional Functions 5-49
8.1. RNT 5-49
8.2. RUN P 5-49
8.3. Program EEPROM - PROM 5-50
8.4. LOAD PLC - Load Program of PLC 5-53
8.5. P-VERS - PLC Program Information 5-54
8.6. XFER 5-55

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-2

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

1. GENERAL INFORMATION A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

The most complicated programming problems can be solved with status list programming - either
with B&R specific, German command abbreviations or with MOTOROLA® -mnemonics. STL is
more than assembler programming. The command block includes elementary processing commands
as well as complex floating point calculation routines, that are integrated as default in all B&R
systems.

Advantages: - Creating memory and time optimization programs is possible with the help
of STL-programming.

- Almost all problems are soluble in STL.

Disadvantages: - Good knowledge of STL-commands are required.

- An STL is not arranged as clearly as an LAD.

- An STL program is not as flexible as an LAD. It is not changed easily.

- STL programs must be documented more extensively than the LAD, because
the graphic representation of the LADs is already part of the docu-
mentation.

Requirements for this chapter:

In this chapter basic knowledge of STL commands are required because only the
STL editor is described. A summary of the STL commands is given in Appendix
B.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-3

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

2. STL EDITOR ACCESS A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
[F1 STL] <LN/LB> [↵

After confirming the command input with [↵], the STL editor is displayed. The input cursor
(blinking cursor) is located in the command line.

With the input of a line number (LN) or a label (LB), the respective line of the STL editor is
performed inverse (=input line of the STL editor). If no parameter follows the STL command, the
line that was previously processed in the STL is described inverse.

By pressing [↵↵] in the command line the cursor is positioned to the input line of the STL editor. If
something needs to be changed or inserted in a certain STL line, the input cursor can be set to the
respective line with the input of <LN/LB> [↵↵].

The cursor is set back to the command line with [Esc].

3. STL EDITOR STRUCTURE

↵] the following figure is displayed:
After accessing the STL editor with [F1 STL] [↵

c
d
e

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-4

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

a) Status line: contains information such as:

window number
program name
program date
time
programming mode
free application memory
number of
used labels

b) Input line

STL commands and comments can be entered in this line. The input line is divided into several
editing fields.

c) Command line

The command line serves for the input of operating commands. The most important commands are
also available with the function keys from [F1] to [F8].

d) Message line

Messages, that apply to the operator are displayed. A wrong command or bad operation causes an
error message to be displayed. Messages that demand parameter inputs can also be displayed.

e) Softkey line

In the softkey line the STL editor functions are offered on the keys [F1] - [F8].

With the keys [F9] and [F10] the occupancy of the softkey line is changed and additional functions
are offered.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-5

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

4. INPUT LINE A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

The input line is divided into the following editing fields:

insert mode
line number
comment line
label
command
negation / indirect addressing
address preselection
address
symbol allocation
comment

4.1. INSERT MODE A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

If the character “>” is in this position, the STL editor is in the insert mode. A new line is inserted
with every return [↵].

If the insert mode is activated, pressing the return key [↵] will move the STL one line up and the
next line can be edited.

Starting the insert mode

With the key combinations [Ctrl] + [Ins] an “NOP” line is added and [Alt] + [Ins] a comment line
is inserted. The insert mode is started in both cases.

Example: Lines should be inserted between the line 2 and 3

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-6

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

After pressing [Ctrl] + [Ins] a line is inserted:

With each pressing of [Ctrl] + [Ins], another line is inserted.

If the key combination [Alt] + [Ins] is pressed instead of [Ctrl] + [Ins] a comment
line is inserted between the line 2 and 3:

The insert mode is activated in both cases. This is identified by the character “>”.

Ending insert mode

Insert mode can be exited by pressing [↑], [↓], [PgUp], [PgDn] or [Esc].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-7

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

4.2. LINE NUMBER A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●
PROGRAM STEP NUMBER
All STL lines are provided with consecutive numbers. Comment lines are not counted. They always
receive the number of the following program line.

Numbering occurs automatically.

The numbering procedure depends on the programming mode:

1) Numbering in the PG1000 and PG-PC modes (CP40) succeeds after lines.

2) in the CP80 and PC80 modes (CP60, CP80) the line number is not displayed, but
the program step number (number of used bytes) is displayed. The numbering
proceeds in irregular intervals, since every command does not have the same
opcode length.

Example: PG1000 / PG-PC CP80 / PC80

Line number Program step number

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-8

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

4.3. COMMENT LINE A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

Comment lines supply the program documentation. Lines that are marked by the character “*” as
comment lines, don't have an individual line number. These are assigned to the succeeding program
line as a head line and, for this reason, have the same line number.

Example: PG1000 / PG-PC CP80 / PC80

4.4. LABEL A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

A label is a maximum four-digit letter-number combination that serves to distinguish certain

program lines (e.g.: start of a subprogram). The first character must always be a letter. A label
name can be given only once; but it can be called from the program at any time.
If a label is given, that already exists in the program, an error message is displayed:
E002 label already existing
In this case the cursor can not be moved out of the label field, until a different name is given.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-9

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

4.5. COMMAND FIELD A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

The assembler mnemonics for the processor commands are entered in this 4 character long field.
Optionally B&R or MOTOROLA® mnemonics can be used.
Every input is checked for errors. If the wrong mnemonics are entered, an error message will be
displayed and the command field can not be exited.

Switching the mnemonics:

instruction in the command line function

B&R input and display in B&R-mnemonics
MOTOROLA input and display in MOTOROLA ® -mnemonics
MIXM input in B&R-mnemonics
display in MOTOROLA® -mnemonics
MIXB input in MOTOROLA® -mnemonics
display in B&R-mnemonics

Example: B&R-mnemonics MOTOROLA ® -mnemonics

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-10

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

4.6. NEGATION AND EXTENDED ADDRESSING

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

4.6.1. Negation ● ● ● ● ●

The negation can not be applied with all addresses. It is only possible for 1 bit addresses.
The following address preselections are defined:
I digital input
O digital output
F flag (1-bit-memory)
S start timer (1 bit signal to start a time)
T timer (1 bit signal of the terminated time)
The negation occurs by pressing the key [N]; the cursor must be located in the address
preselection field. By pressing the [N] key again, the negation is made inactive. If a certain
address was negated, the respective field is marked by an “N” :

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

4.6.2. Extended addressing ● ● ● ● ●

This addressing method is only possible in connection with registers (R), index registers (X, Y) and
stack pointers (U, !).
When using this addressing method, the address to which the command refers, is taken out of the
memory location (2 byte) that was defined by the address preselection and the address.
Extended addressing results from pressing the key [[]; the cursor must be located in the address
preselection field. A repeated pressing of the key [[] will end this addressing procedure. The extended
addressing is displayed in the respective field by the “[” character.
Example: LDAA R 0100 load accumulator A with the contents of R 0100.
LDAA [ R 0100 load accumulator A with the contents of the memory location,
as well as a 16 bit address located in R 0100 and R 0101.

+ X 010 The index register X points to an address <ADDR>.

The command effects that the memory location
contents is added to the contents of the accumulator
A<ADDR +10>.
+ [ X 010 The index register X points to an address <ADDR>.
The command effects, that the memory location
contents along with the 16 bit address in
<ADDR + 10> and <ADDR + 11> is added to the
contents of the accumulator A.
User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-11
 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

4.7. ADDRESS PRESELECTION

The following address preselections are possible:

B&R MOTOROLA® description

E I digital input
A O digital output
C R register (8 bit memory location)
M F flag (1 bit memory location)
F S start timer (1 bit signal to start time)
Z T timer (1 bit signal of the terminated time )
P P peripheral address
G G global-RAM in the PP60 (available only in the PC80 mode)
(extended dual port RAM area)
B B block memory in the PP60 (available only in the PC80 mode)
# # immediate
I X index register X
Y Y index register Y
U U user-stack pointer
! ! system-stack pointer

Some statements exclude one or several address preselections. But if an inadmissible address
preselection is entered, a respective error message is displayed.

I007 invalid address

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-12

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

4.8. ADDRESS
The address of the desired memory location is entered in the address field. This address field may
be up to 17 characters long according to the entered address preselection. Advanced zeros must not
be entered.

address preselection address range notes

I I 000 - I 3EN > with bus control

I 000 - I 3FN > without bus control

rack address
slot number
channel number
I 035

O O 000 - O 3EN > with bus control

O 000 - O 3FN > without bus control

rack address
slot number
channel number
O 024

R R 0000 - R 7167

R 0800 - R 1499 This area is reserved for function blocks

and system routines.

R 0864 - R 0889 These registers are temporary storage for

function blocks. The user can also apply
these registers as temporary (!) storage.

F F 000 - F 799

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-13

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

address preselection address range notes

S,T
hardware times S 000 - S 3E7 > with bus control
S 000 - S 3F7 > without bus control
T 000 - T 3E7 > with bus control
T 000 - T 3F7 > without bus control
rack address
slot number
time number
S 1E5
T 1E5
software times S D00 - S D63 Time duration must be
T D00 - T D63 defined with individual commands.

time number

S D56
T D56
P P 0xr CPU programs: x ... slot
r ... register
P 000 - P 3FF PP-programs: the consequence of
individual P-addresses is different accord-
ing to the peripheral processor used.

I,Y,U,! I 000 - I 255 PG1000 - and PG-PC-mode

I -128 - I 127 CP80-mode
I -32768 - I 32767 PC80-mode
Y -32768 - Y 32767 The command length in the PC80-mode
U -32768 - U 32767 depends on the size of the offset:
! -32768 - ! 32767
offset value command length
-16 to +15 opcode + 1 byte
-128 to -17 opcode + 2 byte
+16 to +127
-32768 to -129 opcode + 3 byte
+128 to +32767

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-14

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

address preselection address range notes

B B 0000 - B 4095

G G 0000 - G 4095

address preselection notes

# The number format is defined by the first character of the address

field.

number format number range

decimal “ ”
1 byte-value # 000 to # 255
2 byte-value # 00000 to # 65535

hexadecimal “$”
1 byte-value # $00 to # $FF
2 byte-value # $0000 to # $FFFF

binary “%”
1 byte-value # %00000000 to # %11111111
2 byte-value # %0000000000000000 to # %1111111111111111

ASCII “'”
1 byte-value # 'x to # 'x
2 byte-value # 'xx to # 'xx

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-15

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

4.9. SYMBOL FIELD

This field is an indicating field, which is omitted when terminating the address input; the cursor is
immediately set to the comment field. To enter or change symbol assignments without selecting the
SYMB menu the cursor can be set to the symbol field with [F5 SYMBINP] and a new or changed
SYMB can be entered for the address.

A SYMB can have a length of up to 41 characters. According to the selected representation the
entire SYMB or only the first 14 characters are displayed. With [F6 SYMBLEN] it can be switched
between both possibilities.

The program print out is independent of this representation method!

The SYMB is always printed in full length!

4.10. COMMENT FIELD

Explanations for specific program lines can be entered in this field. The length of the comment is
not limited by the screen width. If a text is entered that doesn't fit completely on the screen, it is
moved to the left. Only a section of the text is visible. However, the comment is simultaneously
displayed in it's entire length in the message line.

A comment is limited to a maximum of 64 characters.

The display on the screen depends on the selected method of representing the symbols.

symbol comment

max. 14 characters A maximum of 39 characters is visible.

full length If the SYMB is longer than 14 characters, the comment begins with a
distance of two characters next to the SYMB, otherwise a maximum
of 39 characters is displayed.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-16

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

5. FUNCTIONS IN THE STL EDITOR

5.1. SOFTKEY-FUNCTIONS
If the cursor is positioned in the input line of the STL editor, the function keys are allocated as
follows:

[F1 STL]

By pressing this function key the STL editor is exited and the cursor is set to the command line.
The PROgramming SYStem requires the input of a line number or a label:

[F2 SYMB]

By pressing this function key the STL editor is exited and the cursor is set to the command line.
The PROgramming SYStem requires the input of an address:

[F3 TAB]

By pressing this function key the STL editor is exited and the cursor is set to the command line.
The PROgramming SYStem requires the input of a table name:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-17

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

[F4 UNDO]

The STL editor is provided with a LIFO-storage (Last-In-First-Out), in which the last 10 deleted
lines or characters respectively are stored. With the function [F4 UNDO] these are inserted in the
text at the cursor position.

With this function e. g.: up to 10 lines can be cut out (deleted with [Ctrl] + [Del]) and inserted
again at any position in the program.

[F5 SYMBINP]

In the STL editor, symbols can be assigned directly with this function (maximum length of
41 characters). The input or change is terminated with [↵].
This function is called from program lines, that are provided with the addresses I, O, R, B, G, F, P,
S or T. If a wrong SYMB is entered in a line, the following error message is displayed:

E043 NO SYMBOLIC NAME IN THIS LINE

If a SYMB is changed the following question is displayed after pressing [↵]:

W004 CHANGE SYMBOLIC NAMES ? ( Y / N )

The SYMB is changed or remains the same according to the needs of the user . The cursor is set to
the next program line.

If a SYMB display is limited to 14 characters, the input of longer SYMB text is moved to the left
and only the 14 section of text is displayed. The SYMB appears full length in the message line.

[F6 SYMBLEN]

According to the selected representation mode, the entire SYMB or only the first 14 characters are
displayed on the screen. With [F6 SYMBLEN] it can not be switched to the active representation
method.

[F7 RECALL]

If an existing program line is changed, the original line can be recalled with this function, if the
changes are not terminated with [↵].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-18

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

5.2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS

[↑] move STL one line down

[↓] move STL one line up

[PgUp] move STL one page down

[PgDn] move STL one page up

[Ctrl] + [PgUp] position cursor to the first program line (STL beginning)

[Ctrl] + [PgDn] position cursor to the last program line (STL end)

[Ctrl] + [↑] or [↓] move input line up/down

[Alt] + [↑] or [↓] move input line to the top/bottom screen margin

[Ctrl] + [Esc] move input line to the center of the screen

[Ctrl] + [Ins] insert NOP-line and activate insert mode

[Alt] + [Ins] insert comment line and activate insert mode

[Ctrl] + [Del] delete line and disable insert mode

[Tab] or [⇑] + [Tab] set cursor to the next right/left input field of the input line

[Ctrl] + [←] or [→] position cursor to the comment field

[@]

5.3. EXIT THE STL EDITOR

[Esc] Exit the STL editor to the command line, in which different edit
functions for the STL can be called.

[F2 SYMB] <ADR> [↵] Exit the STL editor and call up the SYMB editor.

[F3 TAB] <TNAME> [↵] Exit the STL editor and call up the TAB editor.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-19

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

6. EDIT FUNCTIONS OF THE COMMAND LINE

6.1. REPLACE / EXCHANGE (CHAN)

If the cursor is positioned in the command line, the softkey line looks like this:

By pressing the function key [F9] the allocation of the softkey's is changed:

By pressing [F9] + [F1 CHAN] or directly inputting CHAN, different functions are offered in the
softkey line:

These functions can also be entered with the keyboard:

[F1 EXCHANGE] or EXCHANGE

[F2 REPLACE] or REPLACE
[F3 EXCHANGE?] or EXCHANGE?
[F4 REPLACE?] or REPLACE?

[F1 EXCHA] All program lines, within the user defined limits are searched, and compared with
the two search masks, that are to be exchanged. If a search mask corresponds with
the program line, it is replaced by the other mask.
This procedure is applied, for example, in the exchange of modules. The following
masks must be defined for an exchange of the input card in slot 4 and the input card
in slot F:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-20

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

[F3 EXCHA?]This function is the same as the one just described [F1 EXCHA] with a difference.
With every exchange an inquiry is displayed in the message line:

The user can now decide whether or not the exchange is to be executed:
[F1 YES], [↵↵] or [Y] exchange
[F2 No] or [N] the program line remains the same
[F7 END] or [Esc] function interrupted

[F2 REPLA] All program lines, within the user defined limits are searched, and compared with
the first search mask entered. If this corresponds with the program line, this line is
then replaced by the second search mask.
This procedure is, for example, used to change the slot on modules. The following
masks must be defined to change the input card in rack 0 from slot “6” to slot“ A”:

[F4 REPLA?] This function is the same as the one described above [F2 REPLA] with the differ-
ence, that with every replacement an inquiry is displayed:

The user can now decide whether or not the replace function is executed:

↵] or [Y]
[F1 YES], [↵ replace
[F2 NO] or [N] the program line remains the same
[F7 END] or [Esc] function interrupted

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-21

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

Define the search range for replace/exchange:

The softkey allocation changes after the input of one of the following:

CHAN EXCHA
CHAN REPLA
CHAN EXCHA?
CHAN REPLA?

There are different ways of entering the search range:

Input Search range

↵]
[↵ global replacing; the entire STL is
searched (except LADs).

↵]
[F1 FROM] <LN/LB> [F2 UP_TO] <LN/LB> [↵ The STL is searched in the specified
range.

↵]
[F2 UP_ TO] <LN/LB> [↵ The STL is searched from the current
input line to the specified program line
<LN/LB>.

↵]
[F1 FROM] <LN/LB> [F3 #] <NR> [↵ The STL is searched <NR> lines
beginning with the specified line <LN/
LB>.
↵]
[F3 #] <NR> [↵
The STL is searched <NR> lines
beginning with the current input line.

For <LN/LB> a line number or a label is to be entered.

After the input of [↵] search masks are defined.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-22

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

Change of symbols
After ending the function CHAN, the following question is displayed in the message line:

changed
addresses

original
addresses

The user can decide if the SYMBs are also changed.

[Y] With the function exchange all SYMBs, with a corresponding address to both
entered masks, are exchanged. Even the SYMBs, with addresses that are not used in
STL, are changed.

With the function replace all SYMBs, with addresses that

correspond with the search masks, are changed. If the change
of a SYMB assigns an address twice, the SYMB of the
original address is deleted.

[N] The SYMBs remain the same.

The function CHAN does not effect the STL of ladder diagrams.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-23

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

6.2. GLOBAL EXCHANGE/REPLACEMENT (GLOBCHAN)

This function is valid for all addresses in the entire program including the LADs. But only ad-
dresses and not the address preselections can be changed (e.g.: registers can not be changed to
flags).

After the input of GLOBCHAN in the command line the function key allocation is changed as
follows:

[F1 EXCHA] All program lines are searched and compared with the two entered search masks to
be exchanged. If the search mask corresponds with the program line, it is replaced
by the other mask.

[F2 REPLA] All program lines are searched and compared with the first entered search mask. If
it corresponds with the program line, the located line is replaced by the second
search mask.

Example: The input card in rack 0 / slot 5 is exchanged with the input card in rack 1 / slot 1.
In order to change the addresses in the program the following search masks are to be
entered:

To change all registers in the range R1000-R1999 to R4000-R4999 the following

masks are to be entered:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-24

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

6.3. SEARCH (FIND)

With this function program lines can be searched in the entire program or in program parts just as
needed (search mask).

The softkey allocation is changed after the input of:

[F 9] + [F2 FIND]

Search range
The definition of a search range occurs just as with the function CHAN (page 5-20).

Search mask
After confirming the input with [↵] the user is asked to enter a search mask:

label
STL-commands
negation/ extended addressing
address preselection
address

Spaces in the search masks are not noticed during the search process. When the input of the mask is
terminated with [↵] the search is started.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-25

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

The line number of the program line, that is compared with the search mask, is displayed in the
message line. If a program line is located that corresponds with the search mask, the search
procedure is interrupted. The softkey allocation changes and the following question appears in the
message line:

key function

[F1 CONT] The next line that is identical to the search mask is searched.
[Y]

[F3 CORR] The search procedure is interrupted and the cursor is set to the found
line.

[F7 END] The search procedure is interrupted and the cursor is set to the com-
[N] mand line.
[Esc]

If no program line was found, that is identical to the search mask, the search procedure is ended
and the cursor is set to the command line.

Example: In the range, line 200 to label LAB2, all registers R1000 - R1999 should be
searched:
Command : ↵]
[F9] + [F2 FIND] [F1 FROM] 200 [F2 UP_ TO] LAB2 [↵

Input of the search mask:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-26

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

6.4. SEARCH AND LIST (FINDL)

SEARCH AND PRINT (FINDP)
With these functions certain program lines, in the program or in program parts can be searched, as
needed (search mask) and these can be listed/printed.

The function key allocation changes after the input of:

[F9] + [F3 FINDL] or [F9] + [F4 FINDP]

SEARCH MASK and SEARCH RANGE are defined like Search [F9] + [F2 FIND] function.

Example: list all inputs applied to slot 4 (I 040 to I 04E):

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-27

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

Example: print out of all used input cards:

237 BETS LDAA I 0A4

338 LDAA I 0A3
366 GR01 LDAA N I 0B1
369 ANDA N I 0B2
372 ANDA I 0B8
387 LDAA I 0A3
410 ANDA N I 0A3
472 LRK I 050
524 LRK I 060
560 HAAU LDAA I 0A2
569 ANDA N I 0A1
572 ANDA I 0A0
593 HAN1 LDAA I 0A5
599 LDAA I 0A6
605 LDAA I 0B6
611 LDAA I 0B7
617 LDAA I 0B0
620 ANDA N I 0B2
626 LDAA I 0A9
690 SCH1 LDAA N I 0C1 release of
918 LDAA I 0B3
924 KLEM LDAA I 0B1
927 ANDA I 0C0
951 LDAA N I 0B9
969 ANDA I 0BA
1018 TRAN LDAA I 0C0
1021 ANDA I 0B1
1036 LDAA N I 0C0
1039 ANDA N I 0B1
1057 LDAA I 0B8
1060 ANDA I 0B4
1090 ANDA I 0B2
1114 ANDA I 0B8
1117 ANDA N I 0B2

6.5. COPY
A defined program range can be copied and moved to another position in the program with this
function.

The function key allocation changes after the input of:

[F9] + [F5 COPY]

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-28

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

The range that should be copied, is entered like the search range for CHAN (see page 5-20). After
the definition of the desired range the function key allocations are changed:

With [F1 TO] <LN/LB> or TO <LN/LB> the destination address is specified. After confirming
with [↵] the entered block is copied.

Without the definition of a destination address and confirming with [↵] the specified range is
copied to the cursor position.

If a program part is copied, in which labels are present, all lines are copied up to the first doubled
label. An error message is then displayed and the cursor is positioned to the program line where the
first double label exists:

This program line can be optionally edited. If another label was distributed, the copying process
can be continued with [↵].

The copying process can be interrupted with [Esc].

Program parts that include protected lines (FBK, SEQC, LAD), can not be copied. An error
message is displayed:

E127 DELETE NOT POSSIBLE

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-29

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

6.6. MOVE
A specified program range can be moved to another position in the program with this function.
The function key allocation changes after the input of:
[F9] + [F5 MOVE]

The range that needs to be moved, is defined like a search range with CHAN (see page 5-20). After
the definition of the desired range the function key allocations are changed:

The destination address is entered with [F1 TO] <LN/LB> or TO <LN/LB>. The specified block is
moved after pressing [↵].
Without the definition of a destination address and confirmation with [↵] the specified range is
copied to the current cursor position

6.7. DELETE BLOCK

A defined program range can be deleted from the program with this function.
The function key allocation changes after the input of:
[F9] + [F7 DELETE]

Only [F7 BLOCK] refers to the presently active editor; the other functions files (programs, tables,
SYMBs, macros, LADs, ASCII-files) can be deleted from the active disk drive. These functions are
described in chapter 8 “load, save, ...”.
The function key allocations are changed after the input of [F7 BLOCK]. A program range, to be
deleted, must be defined. This range is defined like the search range of the function CHAN.
After confirming the input with [↵] the defined range is deleted.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-30

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

7. STL STATUS TEST

7.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

The STL status test is an efficient tool for error detection and debugging before program start. STL
programs can be executed in single steps, set in break points or used in trace functions.

Registers, flags, inputs etc. can be displayed in freely selectable number formats and be changed
for testing purposes. The user gets an exact image of the control and software operating status.

7.2. ACCESSING THE STL STATUS TEST

7.2.1. RUN
Command: ↵]
RUN [↵

Function: 1) The program is checked for completion of the label table (compared to RNT-
command). If the label table is not complete or if the maximum branch width is
exceeded, the program is not transferred to the PLC and an error message is
displayed:
E051 INVALID BRANCH

2) The program is transferred to the RAM of the PLC program and started no
matter if a program is stored in EEPROM (CP40, CP41, NTCP33, NTCP34,
PSCP35) or PROM (CP60, CP80, NTCP63, NTCP64, PSCP65).

3) The STL status test is called up.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-31

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

Transfer an application program to the central processing unit

CP40, CP41, NTCP33, NTCP34, PSCP35:

When transferring an application program from the

programming device to the CPU, it is stored in the
RAM of the EE32 and started no matter if another
program is stored in the EEPROM of the EE32.

CP60, CP80, NTCP63, NTCP64, PSCP65:

When transferring an application program from the

programming device to the CPU, it is stored in the
internal RAM of the CPU and started no matter if
an PROM memory exists.

7.2.2. STAT
Command: ↵]
STAT [↵
Function: 1) The STL status test menu is called up. The program is not transferred in the
PLC-CPU.

2) If the program was changed after the last status test, this is considered by the
PROgramming SYStem. The following warning is displayed in the
message line:
W233 MAKE PROGRAM INFO ( Y / N ) ?
[Y] program in the PLC and PG are compared.
[N] process is interrupted.
If [N] is entered or the program in the PG is not identical with the one in the PLC ,
an error message is displayed:
E179 PROGRAM IN CPU AND PG DIFFERENT !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-32

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

7.3. MENU STRUCTURE

a
b

c
h

d
e

ga) Status line

The status line contains different information, such as:

window number
program name
program date
time
programming mode
free application memory
number of
used labels

b) Symbol field
In this field, symbol assignments of the address are displayed, that are defined in the status field, in
which the cursor is positioned.

c) Status field
In this screen area up to 14 status fields can be applied.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-33

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

d) Break point line

In this line up to 5 breakpoints can be entered.

e) Processor status line

The current status of the processor and the contents of the program registers are displayed. The
processor status line, to which the cursor is set, has a different appearance in the PC80-mode.

Processor status line in the PG1000-, CP80- or PG-PC-mode:

Processor status line in the PC80-mode:

A accumulator A (AA)
B accumulator B (AB)
X index register X
Y index register Y
U user stack pointer
DP direct page register
NCZ flags: N ... negative flag
C ... carry flag
Z ... zero flag
! system stack pointer

f) STL field
The processor status and the program register can be displayed before or after the processing of a
line.

g) Softkey line
In the softkey line the most important commands of the STL status test are offered.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-34

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

h) Module information
In this field the following information is displayed:

program name program date

module series module type

program version number

runs in RAM/PROM of system module

additional information
A = arithmetic processor
S = serial interface

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-35

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

7.4. STATUS FIELDS

It is possible to apply up to 14 status fields, that can be contained in the following positions on the
screen.

If a status field requires more space because of the selected display format, the next field is used.

7.4.1. Status Field Structure

address preselection
address
number of bytes
display format

definition field

display field

input field

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-36

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

Address preselection
The possibilities for address preselection are:

I, O, F, R, P, S, T, B, G

Address range
The possible address range for a certain address preselection, is given in section “4.8. Address”.

Number of bytes
The maximum number of bytes depends on the defined address preselection and the selected
display format.

address preselection number of bytes according to the display format

$ % ' ^ I A F P no characters

for 1 bit memory location 1 1 x 1-8 x x x x 1

(I, O, F, S, T) 2-41) 1-81) 2-41)

for 8 bit memory location 1-4 1 1-8 1-8 1-4 1-4 42) 22) 1-4
(R, P, B, G)

1)
These values are possible for the address preselection, but it is not very useful to apply them for
1 bit memory locations.
2)
These values are automatically set, if the respective number format is set. This display format is
only relevant in connection with 8-bit memory locations.
x This number format is not efficient for the address preselection.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-37

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

Display Format
In this field the number format is shown, in which the contents of the defined memory location
should be displayed. 9 different formats can be selected.

If the number format in an existing status field is changed, the conversion to the new format occurs
automatically. If necessary, the number of bytes is changed.

format characters

decimal no character
hexadecimal $
binary %
ASCII '
low value bit ^
integer I
absolute with sign A
floating point F
pointer P

Decimal format
Character: no character
If no characters are entered in the display format field or the existing
characters are deleted, the decimal format is selected.

Number of bytes: 1 to 4

Restrictions: 2, 3 or 4 byte values are only useful with 8 bit memory locations.

Representable number range:

number of bytes number range

1 0 to 255 (2 8-1)
2 0 to 65535 (216-1)
3 0 to 16777215 (224-1)
4 0 to 4294967295 (232-1)

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-38

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

Hexadecimal format
Character: $
Number of bytes: 1 to 4
Restrictions: 2, 3 or 4 byte numbers only useful with 8 bit memory locations.
Representable number range:

number of bytes number range

1 0 to FF
2 0 to FFFF
3 0 to FFFFFF
4 0 to FFFFFFFF

Binary Format
Character: %
Number of bytes: 1
Representable number range: 00000000 to 11111111

ASCII Format
Character: '
Number of bytes: 1 to 8
1-8 bytes are represented as ASCII-characters. In the display field they
appear in the left, where the left character is respective of the contents of
the first memory location.
Restrictions: This display format is only useful when applied with 8 bit memories.

Example: The contents of the

memory locations R0123 R 0 1 2 3 5 ’
to R0127 should be
displayed in ASCII-
format:
a B 0 ? *
R0123
R0124
R0125
R0126
R0127
User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-39
 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

Bitwise representation
Character: ^
Number of bytes: 1 to 8
Restrictions: Only the bit with the lowest value is taken into account in the memory
location.
This representation is favourable for the control or change of the status
of digital input and output cards.
Example: Representation of the
states of the digital input
I 0 4 8 8 ^
cards rack 0 / slot 4. The
inputs 8 to F should be 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1
displayed:

I 048
I 049
I 04A
I 04B
I 04C
I 04D
I 04E
I 04F
Integer Format
Character: I
Number of bytes: 1 to 4

Representable number range:

-128 (-27)
1 byte integer 2's-complement to
7 0 127 (27-1)

-32768 (-215)
2 byte integer 2's-complement to
(= integer short) 15 87 0 32767 (215-1)

-8388608 (-2 23)

3 byte integer 2's-complement to
23 16 15 87 0 8388607 (223-1)

-2147483648 (-231)
4 byte integer 2's-complement to
(= integer long) 31 24 23 16 15 87 0 2147483647 (231-1)

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-40

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

Absolute Format
Character: A
Number of bytes: 1 to 4

Representable number range:

S ... sign

±(0 to 127)
1 byte absolute S absolute amount ±(27-1)
7 0

±(0 to 32767)
2 byte absolute S absolute amount
±(215-1)
(= absolute short) 15 87 0

3 byte absolute S absolute amount ±(0 to 8388607)

±(223-1)
23 16 15 87 0

4 byte absolute S absolute amount ±(0 to 2147483647)

±(231-1)
(=absolute long) 31 24 23 16 15 87 0

Floating Point Format

Character: F
Number of bytes: 4
Format: IEEE-Standard (Single Precision Floating Point Format)

1 bit mantissa sign

8 bit
23 bit

S exponent EXP Mantissa

31 23 22 16 15 87 0

Conversion: (-1) S • 2(EXP-127) • 1. mantissa

Representable number range:

-9.22 * 1018 -9.22 * 10-18 0 9.22 * 10-18 9.22 * 1018

Numbers from -9.22 * 10-18 to +9.22 * 10-18 except 0 can not be displayed, and
are processed like 0.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-41

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

Pointer Format
Character: P

Number of bytes : 2

Restrictions: The application of this format is only useful for the contents of 8 bit
memory locations.

Representation: The contents of two 8 bit memory locations is interpreted as 16 bit

address with this representation method displayed in the B&R-format:
x yyy
address preselection
address

X YYY

Example: The contents of R0000 and

R0001 should be displayed
as a pointer:

Valid for CP80 is e.g.: $0000 => “F 000”

$3000 => “R0000”

With addresses, that don't have an B&R-equivalent, a hexadecimal value

is displayed. E.g.: $5000 => “$5000”

A complete overview of B&R-addresses is given in the HARDWARE-MANUAL MULTI-

CONTROL / MIDICONTROL / M264 in chapter 4 central processing units.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-42

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

7.4.2. Edit Status Fields

After the first call of the status test, the cursor is in the field “address preselection” of the first
status field. The status field, in which the input cursor is positioned, is displayed inverse:

cursor

←] or [→
[← →] The cursor can be moved freely to the left and to the right.

If the cursor is moved left/right out of the status field, it is set in the next
status field.

[↓ ↑]
↓] or [↑ The address of the memory location of the active status field is decreased or
increased respectively.

❖]
[Ctrl] + [❖ The cursor is set to the field “address preselection” of the status field
selected with [❖].

❖]
[Alt] + [❖ The cursor is set to the input field of the status field selected with [❖].

[Ctrl] + [Del] The active status field is deleted and the cursor is set to the left status field.

↵]
[↵ If the cursor is located in the definition field, the definition is ended and the
cursor is set to the right status field.

If the cursor is in the input field, the input is terminated and the entered
values are transferred to the control.
When transferring multiple byte values, without stopping the PC it asks, if
the data should be transferred asynchronously:

W235 TRANSFER ASYNCHRON !!! CONTINUE ( Y / N ) ?

On newer system module versions (CP40: from V. 3.20; CP80: from V. 3.10)
the data transfer is executed in the END-routine - the transfer occurs in this
case without inquiry (synchronous)!

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-43

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

7.5. FUNCTIONS IN THE STL A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●
STATUS TEST

↵] it is displayed on the screen of the PC. The

↵] or STAT [↵
After starting the status test with RUN [↵
following functions are offered in the softkey line:

7.5.1. [F1 REGEDIT] - Editing program register

This function is possible in the HALT state of the processor! After pressing [F1 REGEDIT] the
cursor is positioned in the processor status line. The following registers and flags can be changed:

LN/LB line number / label

A accumulator A (AA)
B accumulator B (AB)
NCZ flags: N ... negative-flag
C ... carry-flag
Z ... zero-flag

input cursor

LN / LB A B NCZ

[→] or [←] The cursor can be moved in the fields LN/LB, A, B and NCZ.

[Esc] Ending the edit procedure of the program register. The values entered by the
user are saved.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-44

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

7.5.2. [F2 BRKEDIT] - Breakpoint Definition

Breakpoints are used for error detection. Breakpoints are software selected program lines, at which
the program is stopped after a defined number of passes. The PLC is stopped. This HALT state is
displayed in the processor status line.

It is possible to define up to four breakpoints.

By pressing the function key [F2 BRKEDIT], the cursor is set to the break point line:

line number/ label before which it should be stopped

remaining number of passes up to the HALT
(this field can not be edited)
number of the executed passes up to the HALT

If the program is stopped on a defined breakpoint, this is displayed in the processor status by the
word “HALT”. In the STL field the line, in which the program was stopped, is displayed inverse:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-45

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

7.5.3. [F3 STL] STL Mode

A particular program line of the STL can be watched with this function.

By pressing [F3 STL] the cursor is placed in the STL field:

Cursor

The STL can be moved up / down with the cursor keys [↑] / [↓].

↵] the cursor is positioned in the desired line.

With the input of <LN/LB> [↵

By pressing again [F3 STL] on the right side of the selected program line the program registers are
displayed (AA, AB, X, Y1), U1), DP 1), NCZ, SZ instead of SYMB and comment). The line is marked
by the character “<” on the left, i.e.: the contents of the program register is displayed before the
execution of the selected program line:

The function [⇑] + [F3 STL] displays the states of the individual program register after the
execution of the selected program lines. The line is marked on the left by the character “>”.

If the line, selected with the cursor, is not executed, periods are displayed instead of program
register contents:

1)
Only in the PC80-mode

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-46

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

7.5.4. [F4 STOP]

The program operation in the control is interrupted with this function. This is displayed in the
processor status line with “HALT”.

The status of the control remains the same, i.e. output states are not put back but remain in the
current state.

ATTENTION: Control outputs for motors remain unchanged.

7.5.5. [F5 CONT]

Pressing this key continues the interrupted program. If a certain time was given by [F3 STL], the
program is continued at this position.

7.5.6. [F6 RESET]

The control is stopped and set to a defined base status:
- all outputs are set to logic “0”
- R0000 to R0019 are deleted
- F 000 to F 499 are deleted
- all program registers are deleted
This function is also available beyond the status test. It depends on the PC, which keys are occu-
pied with this function (see chapter 3 INTRODUCTION).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-47

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST STATUS TEST

7.5.7. [F7 S-STEP] - Single Step Operation

This function is only possible in the HALT state of the processor.

With the single step operation program assignments can be individually executed (by pressing a
key). This operation is used for error detection and for error limitation.

The just processed program line is displayed with the program register:

With the function [⇑] + [F7 S-STEP] the number of the single step operations, which need to be
executed, can be entered. On screen an input request appears on the right top:

With the key [↵] the input is terminated.

With the function [Alt] + [F7 S-STEP] the program of a subprogram jump is stopped after the jump
in the subprogram.

7.5.8. [F8 RAM/PROM]

Switch from RAM to EEPROM operation and reversed. According to the choice, the program in the
PLC is operated in the RAM or in the EEPROM.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-48

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

8. ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS

8.1. RNT
Command: ↵]
RNT [↵

Function: The program in the current window is checked for missing labels and for exceeding
of the maximum branch width.

Result: If a branch instruction exists, that refers to an absent label or to an exceeding of the
maximum branch width, the input cursor is set to the respective line and the
following error message is displayed:

E051 INVALID BRANCH

If the label in the program was properly utilized, the test is ended with the following
message:

W023 RNT OK

The RNT-checking occurs automatically when transferring the program with RUN.
Incomplete programs can not be transferred to PLC.

8.2. RUN P
Command: ↵]
RUN P [↵

Function: This command is the same as the RUN-command, with the difference, that the
program transfer to the PLC is protected. I.e.: The program can not be loaded to the
PLC with LOAD PLC any more.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-49

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

8.3. EEPROM - PROM PROGRAMMING

Command: ↵]
EEPROM [↵

Function: 1) The program that is located in the RAM in the PLC is programmed to the
PROM-memory.
2) After accomplished programming of the PROM the program is executed from
the PROM-memory.

After the function call the display on the screen is as follows:

window-
number

module
Information information
for the user

Display
window of the
selected
function

Messages for
the user

[F1 PROGRAM] Programming the PROM-memory

The control must be in RAM mode, otherwise an error message occurs:

E165 PROM CAN ONLY BE PROGRAMMED IF PLC IN RAM MODE

If the programming of the PROM-memory is ended, the PROgramming

SYStem performs automatically a VERIFY (comparison between RAM and
PROM). If the PROM was properly programmed, the following message is
displayed:

W247 EEPROM VERIFY SUCCESSFUL !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-50

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

[F2 VERIFY] Compare programs in PROM and RAM.

If both programs are identical, the following is displayed:

W247 EEPROM VERIFY SUCCESSFUL !

If they aren't identical, an error message is displayed:

E167 VERIFY NOT OK ! (WP,NOT EMPTY, DEFECT)?

[F3 PROM>RAM] Copy program from PROM to RAM

The control must be in PROM mode, otherwise an error message is dis-

played:

E170 COPY PROM TO RAM ONLY IF PLC IN PROM MODE

[F4 RAM] Switch PLC to RAM.

program is executed in the RAM

[F5 PROM] Switch PLC to PROM.

program is executed in the PROM

[F6 CONT] If the PLC-CPU is in the HALT-state, the program in the PLC is continued.

[F7 RESET] The PLC is stopped and transferred into a defined base state.

[F8 EXIT] or [Esc] Existing the EEPROM-menu

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-51

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

EEPROM Programming
(CP40, CP41, NTCP33, NTCP34, PSCP35)
From the EEPROM-menu on your programming
device the [F1 PROGRAM] command will initiate
the PLC-CPU to program the EEPROM of the EE32
with the program stored in RAM. EEPROM
programming can also be performed while an
application program is running.
An EEPROM-program memory does not need to be
deleted, it can simply be overwritten with the new
program. The data in the EEPROM is non-volatile.
During EEPROM programming, the following is to
be considered:
- The PLC should not be turned off.
- The WE/WP-switch of the EE32 must be set to WE (Write Enable).

Programming the PROM-memory

(CP60, CP80, NTCP63, NTCP64, PSCP65)
From the EEPROM menu on your programming
device the [F1 PROGRAM] command will initiate
the PLC-CPU to program the PROM with the
program stored in the RAM.
An EEPROM-program memory does not need to be
deleted, it can simply be overwritten with the new
program. EEPROM programming can also be
performed while running application programs.
But an EPROM-memory must be deleted with UV
light, before new programming is possible. EPROM
programming can only occur when the PLC-CPU is
in the HALT-state.
The data in the PROM is non-volatile.
During PROM programming consider the following:
- The PLC should not be turned off.
- The WE/WP-switch must be set to WE (Write Enable).
- The PGM-LED is lit.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-52

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

8.4. LOAD PLC - LOAD A PROGRAM OF THE PLC

Command: ↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F7 PLC] [↵

Function: The program that is located in the RAM, is loaded in the working memory of the
PC. The program can be edited with the PROgramming SYStem.

1) After the function call it is first checked if the control is in the HALT-state:

a) PLC in the HALT-mode: the program is immediately loaded back into the PC.

b) PLC in the RUN-mode: In the message line the following enquiry is displayed:

STOP PLC ??? ( Y / N )

[Y] The execution of the program in the PLC is interrupted.

A RESET in the PLC results! Flag (F 000 to F 499), Register (R0000 to

R0019) and all outputs are set back. The program is transferred from the
PLC to the PC.

Continuing the program:

- In the STL status test: [F5 CONT]

- In the XFER-menu: [F6 CONT]
- transfer the new program with RUN [↵ ↵].
- disconnect the online cable and press RESET-key of the CPU
(only possible with CP40 and CP60 ).

[N] The program is transferred to the PC during processing. The transfer of a

program takes longer than if entering [Y].

2) When loading a program the programming mode in the PC is set, in which the
program was created.

NOTE:
Comments, symbol assignments, ladder diagrams and function plans are not loaded
↵] during the program copy.
back. They weren't transferred to the PLC with RUN [↵

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-53

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

8.5. P-VERS - PLC PROGRAM INFORMATION

Command: ↵]
P-VERS [↵

Function: Information display about the program in the PLC.

After this function input program information is displayed in the 25th line on screen:

program name
program date
module series
module type
program runs in:
RAM or PROM
additional information
A = arithmetic processor
S = serial interface
operating system:
version number
version date
memory module type
PLC status

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-54

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

8.6. XFER A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
XFER [↵
Function: After entering XFER [↵ ↵], information about the module type and the running
program are displayed (compare command P-VERS). The softkey allocation is
changed:

[F1 XFER] The application program is transferred to the RAM without interrupts of the
program running in the PROM of the CPU (PP). The procedure is running com-
pletely in the background. All control functions of the processor module remain the
same. For this reason the transfer can last up to a few minutes, depending on the
program length.
After ending the transfer the program is still executed in the PROM, until the user
switches manually to RAM. The command XFER allows no RESET, i.e. no
memory locations, flags or outputs are set back.

NOTE:
Outputs, that were set by the old program (PROM) and that can't be processed by the
new program and that are not processed any more , remain set.
The first scan flag is not set by the first cycle of the new program.

If the processor is in the HALT state, the following error message is displayed:

E182 XFER ONLY IF PLC IN RUN MODE

If the program of the CPU (PP) runs in the RAM, the following error message is displayed:

E180 XFER ONLY IF PLC IN RUN MODE

[F4 RAM] Switching to RAM (only if PLC in RUN mode)

[F5 PROM] Switching to PROM (only if PLC in RUN mode)
[F6 CONT] If the CPU or the PP are in HALT state, the program is continued again.
[F7 RESET] The CPU or the PP are stopped and set in a defined base state.
[F8 EXIT] Exiting the XFER-menu.
[Esc]

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-55

 Chapter 5 STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 5-56

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

CHAPTER 6
SYMBOL EDITOR

Contents: 1. General 6-3

2. Call Symb Editor 6-4
3. Structure of the Symb Menu 6-4
4. Functions in the Symb Editor 6-6
4.1. Softkey Functions 6-6
4.2. Additional Functions 6-7
4.3. Exit the Symb Editor 6-7
5. Editing Functions from the Command Line 6-8
5.1. Move 6-8
5.2. Copy 6-8
5.3. Delete Block 6-9
5.4. Free 6-9

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-1

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-2

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

1. GENERAL A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Symbols are names that are assigned to input, output, or memory location addresses . The user can
use either the physical address or the symbol name. The PROgramming SYStem automatically and
interactively fills in the missing information.

Symbols are an important part of documentation since the symbolic name gives information about
the purpose and function of input, output or memory location.

Symbols can be given for addresses with the following address codes:

I, O, R, F, P, S, T, B, G

A symbol name may be used only once! If you try to assign the same SYMB again, an error
message appears:

address code
address

SYMB already assigned to X YYY

Without EMS memory, up to 2000 symbols can be used.

If there is sufficient EMS memory (at least 128 Kbytes), a total of 8100 symbols can be assigned.
You must request the use of EMS memory with an environment variable (B&R$EMS=ON).

Detailed information on EMS management can be found in "Appendix C ADDITIONAL FEA-

TURES".

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-3

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

2. CALL SYMB EDITOR

Command: ↵]
[F6 SYMBOLS] <ADDR> [↵

The SYMB editor appears after the command has been entered with [↵]. The cursor (blinking
cursor) is in the command line.

If you enter an address <ADDR>, that line in the SYMB list is displayed in inverse video (= entry
line for the SYMB editor). If no address is given after the command [F6 SYMBOLS], the line of
the last address worked on (R0000 if SYMB editor was just called) is inverse.

If you press the [↵] key, the cursor moves to the entry line of the SYMB editor. If you would like
to enter or change something in another line of the SYMB editor, you can position the cursor there
by entering <ADDR> [↵].

If the cursor is located in the entry line, you can return to the command line with [Esc].

3. STRUCTURE OF THE SYMB MENU

↵], the following menu appears:
After you have called up the SYMB editor with SYMBOLS[↵

c
d
e

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-4

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

a) Status line: Various information is displayed in the status line:

window number
program name
program date
time
number of
SYMBs in use
max. number of
symbols possible

b) Entry line

Symbols can be entered in this line to the left and right of the address in the same line:

- to the left of the address a symbol of up to 9 characters can be entered that will be
displayed in ladder diagrams.
- to the right of the address a symbol of up to 41 characters can be entered which will be
displayed to the right of the address in the STL

If the cursor is located in the command line, it is moved to the entry line by pressing [↵].

c) Command line

The command line is for entering operating commands. The most important commands are also
available by function key.

d) Message line

In the message line, messages are displayed that concern the operator. These are error messages
that can be the result of an operator error, but messages that prompt the user to enter parameters
may also appear.

e) Softkey line

In the softkey line the functions of the SYMB editor are presented on keys [F1] to [F7].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-5

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

4. FUNCTIONS IN THE SYMB EDITOR

4.1. SOFTKEY FUNCTIONS

If the cursor is located in the entry line of the SYMB editor, the softkey line appears as follows:

[F1 S_LIST] By pressing this function key, you exit the SYMB editor and the cursor moves to the
command line. The PROgramming SYStem requests a line number or a label:

After you have completed the entry with [↵], the STL editor is called again.

[F2 SYMBOL] If you press this function key, you exit the SYMB editor and the cursor moves to
the command line. The PROgramming SYStem requests an address.

After you have completed the entry with [↵], the SYMB editor is called again.

[F3 TAB] If you press this function key, you exit the SYMB editor and the cursor moves to the
command line. The PROgramming SYStem requests the name of a data table:

After you have completed the entry with [↵], the TAB editor is called again.

[F4 UNDO] The SYMB editor has an LIFO memory (last-in-first-out) that stores the last 10
SYMBs or characters deleted. The function [F4 UNDO] calls these to the cursor
position in the text.

[F7 RECALL] If you have altered a symbol and you would like to call back the original, you can
use this function to do so, provided the change has not yet been completed with [↵].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-6

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

4.2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS

[↑] Move SYMB list down one line.

[↓] Move SYMB list up one line.

[PgUp] Move SYMB list down one page.

[PgDn] Move SYMB list up one page.

[Ctrl] + [PgUp] Move cursor to first line (R0000) (Beginning of symbol).

[Ctrl] + [PgDn] Move cursor to last line (Z D99) (end of SYMB).

[Ctrl] + [↑] or [↓] Move entry line up or down.

[Alt] + [↑] or [↓] Move entry line to upper or lower border of screen.

[Ctrl] + [Esc] Move entry line to center of screen.

[Ctrl] + [Del] Delete SYMB entries in the entry line.

[Tab] or [⇑] + [Tab] Move cursor to the left/right side of the address.
[Ctrl] + [←] or [→]

4.3. EXIT THE SYMB EDITOR

[Esc] Exits the SYMB editor and enters the command line where various
editing functions can be called up for the SYMB.

↵] Exits the SYMB editor and calls up the STL editor.

[F1 STL] <LINE/LAB> [↵

↵]
[F3 TAB] <TNAME> [↵ Exits the STL editor and calls up the TAB editor.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-7

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

5. EDITING FUNCTIONS FROM THE COMMAND LINE

5.1. MOVE
With this function the SYMBs of a specified address range can be moved to another place.
The function [F9] + [F6 MOVE] in the SYMB editor is basically the same as the one in the STL
editor. When specifying the area to be moved, no line number or label is given, just start, end, and
destination address.
Example: The SYMBs from address R0000 to R0099 are moved to R1300 to R1399 with the
command:
[F9] + [F6 MOVE] [F1 FROM] R0000 [F2 UP_TO] R0099 [F3 TO] R1300
↵]
[↵

If the destination addresses already contain symbols, these are overwritten.

5.2. COPY
With this function the SYMBs of a specified address range can be copied to another place.
The function [F9] + [F5 COPY] in the SYMB editor is basically the same as the one in the STL
editor. When specifying the area to be copied, no line number or label is given, just start, end, and
destination address.
Example: The SYMBs of the addresses from I 000 to I 03N are copied to I A00 to I ADN with
the following command:
↵]
[F9] + [F5 COPY] [F1 FROM] I000 [F2 UP_TO] I03N [F3 TO] IA00 [↵

Because copying would cause symbols to be used more than once, the following message appears:
SYMB already assigned to X YYY
The cursor is simultaneously placed in the line of the first SYMB that appears twice so that it can
be changed. Only after a SYMB is given that does not already exist can the next SYMB be
changed.
This procedure can be interrupted at any time with the [Esc] key.
Copying is only worthwhile if the SYMBs you would like to use in another address range are nearly
the same (e.g. just one character is different).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-8

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

5.3. DELETE BLOCK

With this function the SYMBs of a specified address range can be deleted.
The function [F9] + [F7 DELETE] [F7 BLOCK] in the SYMB editor is basically the same as the
one in the STL editor. When specifying the area to be deleted, no line number or label is given,
just start and end address of the block to be deleted.
Example: The SYMBs of addresses F300 to F 599 are deleted with the following command:
↵]
[F9] + [F7 DELETE] [F7 BLOCK] [F1 FROM] F 300 [F2 UP_TO] F599 [↵

5.4. FREE
Command: ↵]
FREE <ADDR/SYMB> [↵
Argument: For <ADDR>, either an address code, a complete address, or a symbol can be
entered.
Valid address codes: I, O, R, F, S, T, P, B, G
Complete addresses: I 000 to I 3FN
O 000 to O 3FN
R0000 to R7167
F 000 to F 799
S 000 to S 3F7
T 000 to T 3F7
P 000 to P 3FF
B0000 to B4095
G0000 to G4095
Symbol: Any valid symbol is allowed.
Symbols that contain spaces must be written between quotation
marks ("SYMB").
Function: Search for addresses without symbols. The search begins at the address indicated
<ADDR>.

If a free address is found, the cursor is moved to the free SYMB field of that
address.
Example: The search for the first digital input containing no SYMB is started with the
command:
↵]
↵] or FREE I [↵
FREE I000 [↵
The cursor is moved to the first line of the input address that contains no SYMB.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-9

 Chapter 6 SYMBOL EDITOR

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 6-10

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

CHAPTER 7
DATA TABLE EDITOR

Contents: 1. General Information 7-3

2. Call of the TAB Editor 7-3
3. TAB Menu Structure 7-4
4. Functions in the TAB Editor 7-6
4.1. Softkey Functions 7-6
4.2. Additional Functions 7-7
4.3. Exiting the TAB Editor 7-7
5. Editing Functions from the Command Line 7-8
5.1. Move 7-8
5.2. Copy 7-8
5.3. Delete Block 7-
8
6. Table Programming 7-9
6.1. Data Formats 7-9
6.2. Table Call 7-11
6.2.1. STL Call 7-11
6.2.2. LAD Call 7-12
7. CLEAR - Deleting a Table 7-12

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-1

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-2

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

1. GENERAL INFORMATION A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ●

Tables are constant data blocks, which can be accessed by the application program. Entries are
made by using a comfortable table editor. The number formats decimal, binary, hexadecimal and
ASCII can be optionally mixed within a table or line. Tables are components of the application
program and are stored in the non-volatile application program memory of the PLC.

2. CALL OF THE TAB EDITOR

Command: ↵]
[F5 TAB] <TNAME> [↵

Parameter: <TNAME> has a maximum length of 4 characters; the first character has to
be a letter.

After quitting the command input with [↵] the TAB editor appears. The input cursor (blinking
cursor) is in the command line.

With the input of the table name <TNAME> the corresponding table is called or created anew.
Without the definition of a name the last processed table is called up.

↵] in the command line. If

The cursor is set to the input line of the TAB editor with the input of [↵
something should be changed in a different line of the TAB editor, entering <LINE> [↵ ↵] will
position the input cursor to the respective line.

If the cursor is in the input line, the [Esc] key will return it to the command line.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-3

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

3. TAB MENU STRUCTURE

↵] the following menu is displayed:
After the call of the TAB editor with TAB [↵
a

c
d
e

a) Status line: Various information is displayed in the status line:

Window number
Table name
Program name
Program date
Time
Cursor to byte x of the table
Table length in byte
(without header)
Length of all tables
(with header)

b) Input line:
Input mode
Line number
Comment line
Editing line

>

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-4

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

Insert mode: If the character “>” is in this position, the TAB editor is in the insert mode.
Pressing [↵] inserts a new line. If the insert mode is not turned on, the table
is moved up one line, by pressing the [↵] key, and the next line can be
edited.

The insert mode is turned on, with [Ctrl] + [Ins] or [Alt] + [Ins].
The insert mode is turned off, if either [↑], [↓], [PgUp] or [PgDn] is
pressed.

Comment line: If the character “*” is at this position, the line is marked as comment line.
Blank TAB-lines are marked with a “*” automatically.

Comments can be entered next to data (marked with “*”):

:
:
15*This is a comment line!
16 23,%01110,$1AF0,'TEXT' *comment
:
:

c) Command line:

The command line serves for the input of operating commands. The most important commands are
available with the function keys.

d) Message line

In the message line messages concerning user errors or messages requiring the input of parameters
are displayed.

e) Softkey line

In the softkey line important functions for TAB editing are offered on keys [F1] - [F7].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-5

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

4. FUNCTIONS IN THE TAB EDITOR

4.1. SOFTKEY FUNCTIONS

If the cursor is in the input line of the TAB editor, the softkey line is allocated as follows:

[F1 S_LIST] Pressing this function key will exit the SYMB editor and the cursor is set to the
command line. The PROgramming SYStem requires the input of a line number or a
label:

After terminating the input with [↵] the STL editor is called.

[F2 SYMBOLS] By pressing this function key the SYMB editor is exited and the cursor is set in
the command line. The PROgramming SYStem demands the input of an address:

After terminating the input with [↵] the SYMB editor is called.

[F3 TAB] By pressing this function key the SYMB editor is exited and the cursor is set to the
command line. The PROgramming SYStem requires the input of a line number or a
table:

After terminating the input with [↵] the STL editor is called.

[F4 UNDO] The TAB editor is provided with a LIFO storage (Last-In-First-Out), where the last
10 deleted lines or characters are stored. By pressing [F4 UNDO] these are inserted
in the text at the cursor position (last character deleted is first character inserted).

[F7 RECALL] If a TAB line has been changed, the original line can be recalled with this
function, if the changes were not terminated with [↵].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-6

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

4.2. ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS

[↑] Move TAB down one line. 1)

1)
[↓] Move TAB up one line.
[PgUp] Move TAB down one screen page.1)
[PgDn] Move TAB up one screen page.1)
[Ctrl] + [PgUp] Position cursor in the first program line (beginning of TAB).1)
[Ctrl] + [PgDn] Position cursor in the last program line (end of TAB).1)
[Ctrl] + [↑] or [↓] Move input line up/down.1)
[Alt] + [↑] or [↓] Position input line to top/bottom of screen.1)
[Ctrl] + [Esc] Position input line to the center of the screen.1)
[Ctrl] + [Ins] Insert line 2)
[Alt] + [Ins] Insert a comment line. 2)
[Ctrl] + [Del] Delete line. 1)
[Tab] or Position cursor one tabulator position right.
[Ctrl] + [→]
[⇑] + [Tab] or Position cursor one tabulator position left.
[Ctrl] + [←]

1)
The insert mode is turned off.
2)
The insert mode is turned on.

4.3. EXITING THE TAB EDITOR

[Esc] Exits the TAB editor to the command line where different editing
functions for the TAB can be called.

↵] Exits the TAB editor and calls the STL editor.

[F1 STL] <LINE/LAB> [↵

↵]
[F2 SYMB] <ADDR> [↵ Exits the TAB editor and calls the SYMB editor.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-7

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

5. EDITING FUNCTIONS FROM THE COMMAND LINE

5.1. MOVE
With this function any line in a table can be moved to a different position.

The function [F9] + [F6 MOVE] in the TAB editor is basically identical to the same function in
the STL editor. To define the range to be moved a line number is entered.

Example: The lines 10 to 15 are moved to 20 with the following:

[F9] + [F6 MOVE] [F1 FROM] 10 [F2 UP TO] 15 [F3 TO] 20

↵]
[↵

5.2. COPY
With this function lines of a table can be copied to a different position.

The function [F9] + [F5 COPY] in the TAB editor is basically identical to the same function in the
STL editor. To define the range to be copied line numbers are given.

Example : The lines 0 to 10 are copied with the following command and inserted at line 30:

↵]
[F9] + [F5 COPY] [F1 FROM] 0 [F2 UP TO] 10 [F3 TO] 30 [↵

5.3. DELETE BLOCK

With this function certain lines of a table can be deleted.

The function [F9] + [F7 DELETE] [F7 BLOCK] in the TAB editor is basically identical to the
same function in the STL editor. To define the range to be deleted a line number is entered.

Example: The lines 15 to 30 are deleted with the following command:

↵]
[F9] + [F7 DELETE] [F7 BLOCK] [F1 FROM] 15 [F2 TO] 30 [↵

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-8

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

6. TABLE PROGRAMMING

6.1. DATA FORMATS

Decimal
Characteristics: none

Number of bytes: 1 to 3

Number range: 0 to 16777215 (224 - 1)

The PROgramming SYStem reserves the correct number of bytes for the value entered in
memory:

1 byte: 0 to 255 (2 8 - 1)
2 byte: 256 to 65535 (2 16 - 1)
3 byte: 65536 to 16777215 (2 24 - 1)

It is impossible to enter negative values.

Hexadecimal
Characteristic: $

Number of bytes: 1 to 3

Number range: $0 to $FFFFFF

The PROgramming SYStem reserves the correct number of bytes for the value entered in
memory:

1 byte: $00 to $FF

2 byte: $0100 to $FFFF
3 byte: $010000 to $FFFFFF

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-9

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

Binary
Characteristic: %

Number or bytes: 1 to 3

Number range: %0 to %11111111 11111111 11111111

The PROgramming SYStem reserves the correct number of bytes for the value entered in
memory:

1 byte: %0 to %11111111
2 byte: %1 00000000 to %11111111 11111111
3 byte: %1 00000000 00000000 to %11111111 11111111 11111111

ASCII
Characteristics: ' (before and after the ASCII character)

The length of the text between the characters “'.....'” is optional. Every ASCII character
occupies one byte.

Example: 'TEXTNUMBER 1' This text requires 12 bytes.

The input of the values in different formats can be mixed! It is important, that the separation
character “,” is inserted between individual values.

Example:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-10

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

6.2. TABLE CALL

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
6.2.1. From an STL ● ● ● ● ●

Tables can be called from an STL like subprograms:

JSR xxxx xxxx .... Table name

When calling a table with JSR, the address of the first byte is returned to index register X and the
length of the table to accumulator AB. If the table is longer than 255 bytes, the length of the table
is submitted to double accumulator AD. The length, that is submitted, corresponds with the actual
number of data bytes in the table. The table header of 15 bytes is not contained.

TAB1 TABLE The table header is the same as a small

HEADER subprogram, that stores table length and table
(15 byte) beginning in register AB or AD and X.
I 015
Table
data
(? byte)

The table beginning can be established in two different ways:

1) With JSR xxxx, as described above:

:
JSR TAB1
LDAA X 000 load the first data byte
:

2) Addition of an offset (=15) to the label TAB 1:

:
LDXL TAB1
LDAA X 015 load the first data byte
:

The length of a table can only be determined with choice number 1.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-11

 Chapter 7 DATA TABLE EDITOR

6.2.2. LAD CALL A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ●

Tables can be connected to a function block in a ladder diagram. The call of the table is made with
the label contact ( F6 [AL ).

Example:

See chapter 4, section 3.6. CONTACTS AND CONNECTIONS

7. CLEAR - DELETING A TABLE

Command: CLEAR [F3 TAB] <TNAME> [↵]

A TAB can be deleted with the operating command CLEAR. If this command is entered in the
command line, the allocation of the function keys changes:

By selecting [F3 TAB] and entering the TAB name terminated with [↵], the respective TAB is
deleted.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 7-12

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

CHAPTER 8
LOADING, SAVING, ...

Contents: 1. Selecting a Path 8-3

1.2. Changing from Default, Standard and
and User Directories 8-4
2. Saving 8-5
3. Loading 8-9
4. Data Format of the ASCII Files 8-17
4.1. SYMB-Data 8-17
4.2. TAB-Data 8-18
5. Display Directory 8-19
6. Copy Files 8-21
7. Rename Files 8-22
8. Deleting Files 8-22
9. Format Disks 8-22

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-1

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-2

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

1. SELECTING A PATH A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1.1. SELECTING A DRIVE

Command: ↵]
DRIVE <Drive Name> [↵

Function: With this function the drive is chosen for using commands like SAVE or LOAD
where a drive name is needed in the file name.

For the <Drive Name> you can give any name that the operating system of your PC
knows. For example A for a floppy disk drive and C for your hard disk drive.

The name of the actual drive is displayed in the command line.

↵] in the command line the actual drive changes to drive A.

After inputting DRIVE A [↵

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-3

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

1.2. CHANGING FROM DEFAULT, STANDARD

AND USER DIRECTORIES
Command: ↵] Default Directories
DDIR \PATH [↵
↵] Standard Directories
SDIR \PATH [↵
↵] User Directories
UDIR \PATH [↵

A PATH is not only restricted to one directory, but can contain several
subdirectories as well.
E.g.: DDIR \PROJECT\TEST [↵]

Function: This command determines the exact search path for the loading and saving of
programs or program parts.

The commands DDIR, SDIR and UDIR refer to the current designated drive. The
search paths of other drives are not altered in any way. For every drive, three search
paths can be defined.

If no start parameters are indicated when the PROgramming SYStem is started, the directories that were
automatically set up when the software was installed are used.

\pgdef Default Directory

\pgstd Standard Directory
\pguser User Directory

The procedure for setting other directories when starting the PROgramming SYSstem is described in
Chapter 3, INTRODUCTION.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-4

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

2. SAVING A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: [F8 SAVE]

Function: With this function, entire programs or program parts (tables, ladder diagrams,
symbol lists, STL macros, ...) can be saved on diskette or hard disk.

After you have entered [F8 SAVE], you will be asked to indicate the file name under which you
would like to save the program or program part.

For <FNAME>, you can enter a file name either with or without the full path. If you do not
indicate the entire path, the file is saved in the default directory.

NOTE: The file name must be up to 8 characters long without extension. The B&R
PROgramming SYStem automatically adds on the extension.

Possible file name extensions:

[Link] Program [Link] Statement list macro

[Link] Symbols [Link] ASCII table
[Link] Table [Link] ASCII symbols
[Link] Ladder diagram [Link] EMS symbols
[Link] Symbol macro [Link] PROVIT files
[Link] Table macro [Link] Basic files

xxxxxxxx ... max. 8-character file name

After the file name has been entered, the softkey line is altered:

only in extension C
only in extensions B and C

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-5

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

↵] without additional parameters A

SAVE [↵ B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Command: ↵]
[F8 SAVE] [↵
Function: The entire program is saved with the parameters that are defined by one of the
following commands:
1) ↵]
[F8 SAVE] <FNAME> [F1 PROG] [↵
2) ↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F1 PROG] <FNAME> [↵
The PROgramming SYStem remembers the file name and the directory and saves
the entire program according to those parameters. If you try to save the program
with this command but no parameters have been saved, the following error message
appears:
E143 MISSING FILE NAME

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[F1 PROG] - Save Program
Command: ↵]
[F8 SAVE] <FNAME> [F1 PROG] [↵
Function: The entire program is saved under the file name <FNAME>indicated. This in-
cludes: STL program, ladder diagrams, tables, function blocks, and symbols.

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[F2 SYMBOLS] - Save Symbol List
Command: ↵]
[F8 SAVE] <FNAME> [F2 SYMBOLS] [↵
Function: All of the symbols defined in an existing program are saved as separate program
parts under the file name <FNAME> indicated. If the EMS SYMB management is
activated, the file is automatically "saved with the extension ".ESM".

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ●
[F3 DATA_TBL] - Save Table
Command: ↵]
[F8 SAVE] <FNAME> [F3 DATA_TBL] <TBL_NAME> [↵
Function: The table <TBL_NAME> indicated is saved as a separate program part under the
file name <FNAME>.
A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
[F4 LAD] - Save Ladder Diagram
Command: ↵]
[F8 SAVE] <FNAME> [F4 LAD] <LAD_NAME> [↵
Function: The ladder diagram <LADNAME> indicated is saved as separate program part under
the file name <FNAME>.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-6

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

[F5 MACRO] - Save STL, TAB, or SYMB Parts as Macros

Command: [F8 SAVE] <FNAME> [F5 MACRO] ...

Function: With this function certain STL, TAB, or SYMB parts can be saved as macros.
These macros can be used again later (e.g. in other programs).

After you have entered [F8 SAVE] <FNAME> [F5 MACRO] the softkey line is altered:

You can enter, directly or by function key, whether a part of a STL, a TAB, or a SYMB is to be
saved as a macro. After you have made the selection, the softkey line is altered:

Now you must define the range that is to be saved as macro. The beginning and the end of the
range are defined by the following entries:

MACRO RANGE Level

Beginning End A B C

SYMBOLS [F1 FROM] <ADDR> [F2 UP_TO]<ADDR> ● ● ●

from the current entry line [F3 #] <NR>

DATA_TBL [F1 FROM] <LINE> [F2 UP_TO]<LINE> ● ●

from the current entry line [F3 #] <NR>

S_LIST [F1 FROM] <LINE/LAB> [F2 UP_TO]<LINE/LAB> ●

from the current entry line [F3 #] <NR>

Confirm the range definition you want to save with [↵] and it will be saved as a macro.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-7

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

Example: The STL lines 100 to 300 are to be saved under the file name TEST in the default
directory. This can be done in several different ways.
[F8 SAVE] TEST [F5 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] [F1 FROM] 100 [F2 UP_TO] 300 ↵]
[↵
[F8 SAVE] TEST [F5 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] [F1 FROM] LAB1 [F2 UP_TO] 300 ↵]
[↵
[F8 SAVE] TEST [F5 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] [F1 FROM] 100 [F3 #] 201 ↵]
[↵
Set the current entry line in the STL editor to line 100:
↵]
[F8 SAVE] TEST [F5 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] [F2 UP_TO] 300 [↵
↵]
[F8 SAVE] TEST [F5 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] [F3 #] 201 [↵

Note: If TAB, LAD, or subroutine calls exist in the STL macros, the TABs, LADs and
subprograms are not saved with the macro.
Symbols and comments within the macro area are saved as well.

[F8 ASCII] - Save Parts of TAB or A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●
SYMB in ASCII Format
Command: [F8 SAVE] <FNAME> [F8 ASCII] ...
Function: With this function, certain parts from TABs (levels B and C) or SYMBs (levels A, B and
C) can be saved in ASCII format so that they can also be used with other programming
systems (CAD systems, editors, ...).
The softkey line is altered after this command:

You can select whether to save an entire TAB or a part of a SYMB in ASCII format by direct entry
from the keyboard or by function key. After you have made your entry, the softkey line is altered:

The PROgramming SYStem asks you to enter The PROgramming SYStem asks you to
the STL area, which is defined in the same enter the table name <TBL_NAME>.
way as when saving macros. Confirm your ↵] and the TAB
Confirm your entry with [↵
↵] and the defined STL area will
entry with [↵ <TBL_NAME> will be saved under the file
be saved under the file name [Link]. name [Link].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-8

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

3. LOADING A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: [F7 LOAD]

Function: Programs or program parts (tables, ladder diagrams, etc.) can be loaded from a
diskette or a hard disk with this function.

After the input of [F7 LOAD] the softkey line is altered:

Loading the programming device PG1000 or the PLC is described in:

[F7 PLC] chapter 5 STL Editor

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F1 PROG] - Loading a program ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F1 PROG] <FNAME> [↵
Function: The program [Link] is loaded from the default directory. The last edited
program is deleted from memory.

A path can be entered with the file name. With the input of the following command in the command
line, the program [Link] is loaded from the drive A, directory \PROJECT1:
[F7 LOAD] [F1 PROG] A:\PROJECT1\TEST [↵ ↵]
If no filename is entered or the defined program doesn't exist, all files with the extension “.PRG” in
the default directories or the defined path are displayed. The desired program can be selected and
loaded from the directory with the cursor and function keys.
The following information is displayed by files/directories:
Number current number of the displayed files or directories
File [Link] file name (with extension = mode) or directory name
Size file size in byte; display, if directory: <DIR>
Date date of the last change
Comment information, if the file can be loaded by the PROgramming
SYStem:
no comment - can be loaded
no B&R-file - can not be loaded
- also valid for directories

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-9

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

Window number
Drive
Directory
Function

Key FUNCTION

[F1 NEXTDIR] If the cursor is in a directory (marked by <DIR>), it is opened. The

contents of the directory is displayed. This function is equivalent to
the DOS command “cd <directory name>”.

[F2 PREVDIR] The previous directory is changed and its contents displayed. [F2
PREVDIR] is equivalent to the DOS command “cd ..”.

[F3 DFLTDIR] The current directory is defined as the “default-directory”.

[F6 SELECT] The program, that is selected with the [❖] keys is loaded (the respec-
↵]
[↵ tive line is displayed in inverse viedeo).

[F7 PRINT] The displayed directory is printed.

[F8 EXIT] Exit back to the command line.

[Esc]

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-10

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

[F2 SYMB] - Load SYMBs A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F2 SYMBOLS] <FNAME> [↵
Function: The SYMB [Link] is loaded from the default directory.
A path can be entered in additon to the file name. When entering the following command in the
command line the SYMB [Link] is loaded from the directory \PROJECT1 on the current
drive:
↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F2 SYMBOLS] \PROJECT1\TEST [↵
If no file name is specified, or if the defined SYMB doesn't exist, all files with the extension
“.SYM” in the default-directories or the defined path are displayed. The desired SYMB can be
selected or loaded from this directory with the cursor or function keys (see [F1 PROG]).
All SYMBs that existed in memory before the loading procedure, are deleted from the memory.
SYMBs, that were created and stored without EMS-SYMB management, can easily be loaded, if
the EMS-SYMB is turned on.
A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F3 TAB] - Load Tables ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F3 DATA_TBL] <TBL_NAME> <FNAME> [↵
Function: The SYMB [Link] is loaded from the default directory. The loaded table is
provided with the defined name <TBL_NAME>.
A path can be entered with the file name. With the input of the following command to the com-
mand line, the TAB [Link] is loaded from the root directory of the current drive:
↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F3 DATA_TBL] \TEST [↵
If no file name is defined, or if the specified TAB doesn't exist, all files with the extension “.TAB”
are displayed in the default directory or the defined path. The desired TAB can be selected and
loaded of the this overview with the cursor and the function keys. (see [F1 PROG]).
If a table with this name <TBL_NAME> exists already, an error message is displayed:
E040 NAME USED FOR DATA TABLE
If a label is entered for <TBL_NAME>, that is already used in the program, the following error
message is displayed:
E022 NAME USED AS LABEL

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-11

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

[F4 MACRO] - Loading a STL, TAB or SYMB Macro

Command: ↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F4 MACRO] [F2 SYMBOLS] <FNAME> [F1 TO] <ADDR>[↵
↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F4 MACRO] [F3 DATA_TBL] <FNAME> [F1 TO] <LINE>[↵
↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F4 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] <FNAME> [F1 TO] <LINE/LAB>[↵
Function: This function offers the possibility of including STL, SYMB or TAB parts, that are stored
in macros, within an existing program.
After the input of [F7 LOAD] [F4 MACRO] the softkey line is altered:

With the function keys a STL, TAB or SYMB macro can be selected. After entering one of these
three possibilities, the user is requested to enter a file name <FNAME>.
A path can be defined with the file name. With the input of the following command in the com-
mand line, the TAB macro [Link] is loaded from the directory \TEST on dirve A:
↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F4 MACRO] [F3 DATA_TBL] A:\TEST\TEST [↵
If no file name is defined, or if the specified macro doesn't exist, all files with the extension
“.MTA”(TAB-Macro), “.MSY” (SYMB-Macro) or “.MSL” (STL-Macro) in the default directories or
the specified paths are displayed. The desired macro can be selected and loaded from the directory with
the cursor and function keys (see [F1 PROG]).
The selected macro is inserted before the TAB, SYMB or STL editor location, that is defined with
[F1 TO]. If no parameter [F1 TO] <ADDR/LINE/LAB> was specified, the macro is inserted
before the current input line of the respective editor.
If a macro should be loaded to a position, where this is impossible, the following error message is
displayed:
E145 MACRO LOAD NOT ALLOWED
This occurs, for example, if an attempt to load a STL macro and insert it between protected lines of
a LAD, is made.

The command is available in the following expansion levels:

Macro Level
A B C
SYM ● ● ●
TAB ● ●
STL ●

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-12

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

Correction for double allocation of labels A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

If the STL macro contains labels, that are already available in the program, the following picture is
displayed on screen:
window number
path and macro name program date
time number of STL lines
without the new macro

number of used
labels

Display
doubled Labels

Input new
Labels

The user now has to change all double labels. This menu can only be exited with [F6 EXIT] or
[Esc], if all labels were changed.
In LIFO storage (Last-In-First-Out) the 10 last deleted characters are stored, which can be inserted
again in the cursor position with the function [F4 UNDO].

Correction for double allocation of Symbols A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

If the SYMB-marcro contains symbols, that were already used once, the following message is
displayed:
W140 SYMBOL USED FOR X YYY
The cursor is simultanously positioned on the first double SYMB, so it can be changed.
With the [Esc] key, the procedure can be interrupted any time.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-13

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

[F5 LAD] - Load Ladder Diagrams A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F5 LAD] <FNAME> [F1 TO] <LAD_NAME> [↵

Function: The LAD [Link] is loaded from the default directory and entered in the
existing program with the LAD name <LAD_NAME>.

A path can be defined with the file name. With the input of the following command in the com-
mand line, the LAD [Link] is loaded from the directory \PROJECT1 on the current dirve:
↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F5 LAD] \PROJECT1\TEST [F1 TO] <LAD_NAME> [↵

If no file name is defined or the specified LAD doesn't exist, all files with the extension “.LAD” in
the default directory or the specified paths are displayed. The desired LAD can be selected and
loaded of the overview with the cursor and function keys (see [F1 PROG]).

To load a LAD, a LAD name must be defined, that is not yet used as label in the program. The new
LAD gets the name <LAD_NAME>. After the loading process the LAD editor is called. The loaded
LAD is displayed.

In order to load a LAD, a name must be defined, that is not yet used in the program. If a LAD is
already existing in the program with the defined name <LAD_NAME> or a label with the same
name, an error message is displayed:

E022 NAME USED AS LABEL

If labels (conditional branches) are used in the loaded LAD, that are available elsewhere in the
program and the LAD editor is exited with [Esc], the following error message is displayed:
E065 LABEL ALREADY USED OUTSIDE THIS LADDER

After this label is changed, the LAD editor can be exited.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-14

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

[F6 EMSSYMB] - Loading SYMBs A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F6 EMSSYMB] <FNAME> [↵

Function: The SYMB [Link] is loaded for the default directory.

A path can be defined in with the file name. With the input of the following command in the
command line, the SYMB [Link] can be loaded from the directory \PROJECT1 on the
current drive:
↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F6 EMSSYMB] \PROJECT1\TEST [↵

If no file name is defined or if the specified SYMB doesn't exist, all files with the extension
“.EMS” in the default directories or the defined paths are displayed. The desired SYMB can be
selected and loaded from the directory with the cursor and function keys (see [F1 PROG]).

All SYMBs that existed in memory before the load procedure are deleted from memory and
replaced by the one selected.

A file with the extension “*.EMS” was saved until the SYMB editor was open. It can only be
loaded in the PROgramming SYStem, if the SYMB editor is turned on, otherwise an error message
is displayed:

E189 CANNOT LOAD SYMBOLS WITHOUT EMS!

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-15

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

[F8 ASCII] Load Files in A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●
ASCII-format
Command: ↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F8 ASCII] [F2 SYMBOLS] <FNAME> [F1 TO] <ADDR> [↵
↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F8 ASCII] [F3 DATA_TBL] <FNAME> [F1 TO] <LINE> [↵

Function: This function offers the possibility of including SYMB lists and table data, that were
created with external programming systems (CAD systems, editors, ...) in an existing
program.

A path can be defined with the file name. With the input of the following command in the command
line the SYMB [Link] can be loaded from the directory \PROJECT1on the current drive and it can
be inserted in the current input line of the SYMB editor:
↵]
[F7 LOAD] [F8 ASCII] [F2 SYMBOLS] \PROJECT1\TEST [F1 TO] <ADDR>[↵

If no file name is defined, or if the specified LAD doesn't exist, all files with the extension “.ASY”
(ASCII-SYMB) or “.ATA” (ASCII-TAB) in the default directories or in the defined path are displayed.
The desired ASCII file can be selected from the directory with the cursor or function keys (see [F1
PROG]).

The load process is performed interactively, i.e.: the PROgramming SYStem checks every sentence of
the SYMB or the TAB for logical errors and offers the possibility to the user, to immediately eliminate
an error (within the SYMB or TAB editor) or to interrupt the load process with the [Esc] key.

Possible errors when loading an ASCII-SYMB:

• SYMBOLIC NAME ALRADY USED FOR OTHER ADDRESS
• INVALID SYMBOLIC NAME
• INVALID ADDRESS

Possible errors when loading an ASCII-TAB:

• INVALID VALUE
• ASCII-STRING NOT MARKED WITH '

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-16

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

4. DATA FORMAT OF ASCII-FILES

4.1. SYMB-DATA
File name extension: *.ASY

Data format:
The file is organized in “sentences”. Every sentence ends with control characters carriage
return <CR> and line feed <LF> ($0D and $0A).
The first sentence can also be a mnemonic identification.
For every SYMB address one sentence is necessary.

Mnemonic identification:
Since for the address preselction in the B&R PROgramming SYStem different characters,
according to the defined mnemonic, are valid, the identification must be stored in the file.
If the first sentence in the file is a “B&R<CRLF>”, the B&R address preselections are
valid. If the file starts with a SYMB address, the PROgramming SYStem interprets the
address preselections as MOTOROLA® mnemonics.
The PROgramming SYStem switches the mnemonic mode during the load procedure.

SYMB address sentence fomrat:

Short SYMB (LAD) is part of the Long SYMB (STL)

R0000 @Symbols xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx<CRLF>
If this SYMB is loaded, the short and long SYMB are as follows:
Short-SYMB: Symbolx
Long-SYMB: Symbolxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Short and long SYMB are specified separatly:

R0000 @ShortSYMB @Long
SYMBxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx<CRLF>
If this SYMB is loaded, the short and long SYMB are:
Short-SYMB: Short SYMB
Long-SYMB: Long SYMBxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Example: The address sequence is not relevant:

B&R
R0000 @A @Register 0
O 01F @S1.1 @Output x
I 000 @valve @Pass open/closed
R0001 @ @Register 1
:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-17

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

4.2. TAB-DATA
File name extension: *.ATA

Data format:
The file is organized in “sentences”. Every sentence ends with control characters <CR> and
<LF> ($0D and $0A).
For every TAB line one sentence is necessary.

Sentence format for a TAB line:

Comment line
*Commentline.......

Data line:
Data.... [*Comment]
The valid data formats are exactly listed in “chapter 7 TABLE-EDITOR”. If, for example,
a table is created in the text editor, it is important to observe the data formats!

Example: 'ASCII-Data sentence 1','ASCII-Data sentence n'

1,2,$FF,'ASCII-Data sentence x'
*Comment line
14,23,%00110101 *Comment
15
*Comment line
:
:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-18

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

5. DISPLAY DIRECTORY A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
[F9] + [F6 DIR] <PATH> [↵
↵]
[F9] + [F6 DIR] <File type> <PATH> [↵

Function: Display of directory conents.

Any directory path (\DIR1\DIR2\...\) including a drive name can be entered for <PATH>.
Without the specification the current drive is accessed.

If no <PATH> is defined, the contents of the default directory are displayed.

Files with certain extensions can be displayed with the additional parameter <File type>. After the
input of [F9] + [F6 DIR] the softkey line is changed:

With these function keys one of the following extensions can be selected:

Extension <File type> Level

A B C

*.PRG [F1 PROG] ● ● ●

*.SYM [F2 SYMBOLS] ● ● ●
*.TAB [F3 DATA_TBL] ● ● ●
*.LAD [F4 LAD] ● ● ●
*.MSY [F5 MACRO] [F2 SYMBOLS] ● ● ●
*.MTA [F5 MACRO] [F3 DATA_TBL] ● ●
*.MSL [F5 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] ●
*.ASY [F8 ACII] [F2 SYMBOLS] ●
*.ATA [F8 ACII] [F3 DATA_TBL] ●

Example: Display of all programs in the directory \PROJECT1 on the disk in drive A:

DIR PROG A:\PROJECT1\ [↵]

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-19

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

After terminating with the [↵] key the following picture is displayed:
Window number
Selected drive; if no drive is selected, the current
dirve is accessed.
Path name

Key FUNCTION

[F1 NEXTDIR] If the cursor is located in a directory (marked <DIR>), this directory
is opened. The contents of this dirctory are displayed. This function
corresponds with the DOS-command “cd <directory name>”.

[F2 PREVDIR] The previous directory is changed and its contents are displayed. [F2
PREVDIR] corresponds with the DOS-command “cd ..”.

[F3 DFLTDIR] The current directory is defined as the “default-directory”.

[F6 SELECT] No function

↵]
[↵

[F7 PRINT] The specified directory is printed.

[F8 EXIT] Exit to the command line.

[Esc]

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-20

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

Example: Print of a directory:

1 DIRECTORY: A:\PROJECT\
Nr.: [Link] Size Date comment
0001 HAUS <DIR> 91-04-10 no B&R file
0002 FREI <DIR> 91-04-10 no B&R file
0003 FLIESS <DIR> 91-04-10 no B&R file
0004 [Link] 12924 90-10-11
0005 [Link] 15708 90-10-11
0006 [Link] 16977 90-10-11
0007 [Link] 16987 90-10-11
0008 [Link] 1271 90-10-12
0009 [Link] 1468 90-10-12
0010 [Link] 4353 90-10-12
0011 [Link] 22074 90-10-12
0012 [Link] 22423 90-10-12
0013 [Link] 24095 90-10-12
0014 [Link] 30164 90-10-12
0015 [Link] 1646 90-10-22
0016 [Link] 24450 90-10-23
0017 [Link] 3193 91-01-24
0018 SEQC_01.PRG 2626 91-02-21
0019 SEQC_TEST.PRG 2626 91-02-21
0020 A_SEQC.PRG 4470 91-03-05
0021 [Link] 49377 91-03-05
0022 LAD_BSP.PRG 5656 91-03-13
0023 [Link] 3498 91-03-14
0024 BSP_FBK.PRG 8771 91-03-15
0025 CP_80BSP.PRG 1280 91-03-19
0026 CP_40BSP.PRG 1280 91-03-19
0027 BSP_ERS.PRG 2202 91-03-21
0028 BSP_CHAN.PRG 3804 91-03-21

6. COPY FILES A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: [F9] + [F5 COPY] [F7 DISK] <File type> <FNAME1> [F1 TO] <FNAME2>
↵]
[↵

<File type> ... Description on page 8-19

Function: It is possible to copy functions with this function. The parameter <FNAME1> and
<FNAME2> can also be included in a complete path name and drive name. If only a
file name is specified, the defined file is searched or stored in the default directory
of the current drive.

Example: The STL macro MACRO1 in the default directory on the current drive (hard disk)
should be copied to drive A with the same name:

↵]
[F9] + [F5 COPY] [F7 DISK] [F5 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] MACRO1 [F1 TO] A:\MACRO1 [↵

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-21

 Chapter 8 LOADING, SAVING, ...

7. RENAME FILES A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
[F10] + [F5 RENAME] <File type> <FNAME1> [F1 TO] <FNAME2> [↵

<File type> ... Description on page 8-19

Function: It is possible to give a file a different name with this function. The parameter
<FNAME1> and <FNAME2> can also have a complete path name and a drive name.
If only the file name is defined, the specified file name is searched for in the default
directory of the current drive and replaced with the new name.

Attention: If the drive name and the path are completely entered, these definitions must be
identical for both file names. Only the file name can be changed.

Example: To rename the STL macro MACRO1 on drive A to MACROX enter:

↵]
[F10] + [F5 RENAME] [F5 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] A:\MACRO1 [F1 TO] A:\MACROX [↵

8. DELETING FILES A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
[F9] + [F7 DELETE] <File type> <FNAME> [↵
<File type> ... Description on page 8-19
Function: It is possible to delete files with this function. The parameter <FNAME> can also
have a comlete path name and a drive name. If only a file name is specified, the
defined file is searched for and deleted from the default directory.

Example: To delete the STL macro MACRO1 on drive A enter:

↵]
[F9] + [F7 DELETE] [F5 MACRO] [F5 S_LIST] A:\MACRO1 [↵

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

9. FORMAT DISKS ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Command: ↵]
FORMAT <drive name:> [↵
Function: It is possible to format disks with this function.

Example: To format the disk in drive A enter:

↵]
FORMAT A: [↵

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 8-22

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

CHAPTER 9
PRINTING

Contents: 1. Call Printer Menu 9-3

2. Structure of the Printer Menu 9-3
2.1. Extension A 9-3
2.2. Extension B 9-4
2.3. Extension C 9-4
3. The Menu Field 9-6
3.1. Edit Menu Field 9-6
3.2. Print from ... 9-7
3.3. Additional Menu Options 9-15
4. Printing Programs or Program Parts 9-
17
[Link] on Screen 9-19
5.1. General Information 9-19
5.2. Output of Programs and Program Parts 9-19
5.3. Cross Reference List 9-19
6. “Printing” in a File 9-20
7. Define Interface 9-20

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-1

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-2

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

1. CALL PRINTER MENU

The printer menu can be called up with various commands:

Command: ↵]
PMEN [↵
↵]
[F10] + [F1 PRINT] [↵
↵]
[F10] + [F2 LIST] [↵

After one of the commands listed above has been given, the printer menu appears.

2. STRUCTURE OF THE PRINTER MENU

The structure of the printer menu depends on the level of the PROgramming SYStem. Levels A
and B do not offer all options.

2.1. LEVEL A

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-3

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

2.2. LEVEL B

2.3. LEVEL C
Window number
Menu name
Program date
Time
Status line

Title

Menu field

Softkey line

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-4

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

Title: A text can be entered in this field (e.g. project name, date, etc.).
This text can be printed on every page as a heading.

After the PROgramming SYStem has been started this Text field is defined as
follows by default:

blinking
cursor

The cursor is moved to the desired position for text entry with the [❖] keys. The "-
"
characters can be replaced by any ASCII characters.

Up to 4 lines of 45 characters each can be entered.

Menu field: Various printing options can be set in this menu field:

- What is to be printed?
- Interface selection
- Selection of character set
- Layout

Softkey line: Functions available in the print menu:

[F7 EXECUTE] Print/list according to parameters set.

[F8 EXIT] or [Esc] The print menu is exited. The paramters and values
set by the user are retained.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-5

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

3. THE MENU FIELD

3.1. EDIT MENU FIELD

The cursor is moved to the desired position with the [❖] keys.

If the cursor is located in the text field for the title, all ASCII characters that can be represented can
be entered. All of the functions for processing the text, like [BkSpc], [Ins], [Del] etc., are
available.

If the cursor is located in a selection field, only certain keys are accepted:

[Y] The menu point is activated and the cursor is moved to the next
selection field.
[N] The menu point is deactivated and the cursor is moved to the next
selection field.
↵]
[↵ The menu point is not altered. The cursor is moved to the next
selection field
[0] ... [9] Entry of decimal values where allowed (lines/page, characters/
lines).
[→ ↓]
→] or [↓ The cursor is moved to the next selection field.
[← ↑]
←] or [↑ The cursor is moved to the previous selection field.
↑] In the baud rate selection field the next higher value is set.
[Ctrl] + [↑
↓] In the baud rate selection field the next lower value is set.
[Ctrl] + [↓

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-6

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

3.2. PRINT FROM ...

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
... Program ● ● ● ● ●

If this menu point is activated with [Y], the entire STL program is printed. The LAD translations
are not printed.

STL lines containing NOP commands are not shown on the printout. The following line is inserted
for every block of NOP lines:

“-----------------------------------------” (see example)

Example:

*** PROGRAM ***

00000 JSR TEST 00130

00001 END
00002 *
00002 *
00002 ----------------------------------------- (each of the lines from 2 to 9 contains
00011 BNE DEC1 00008 the STL command NOP)
00012 CLR O 005
00013 LDD # 00000
00014 STD R 1000

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

... Tables ● ● ● ● ● ●

If this menu point is activated with [Y], all of the tables in the program are printed out.

Example:

*** DATA TABLE***

TABLE:TIN2

00000 2, * Node number 2

00001 3, * 19,200 baud
00002 1,0,0,0,0,0,0,0, * Group 1
00003 0, * reception of node 0

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-7

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

... Symbol Tables A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ●

If this menu point is activated with [Y], all of the labels in the program are printed out.

- STL labels
- LAD names
- TAB names (marked with T)

Example:

*** LABEL ***

$KST S $US2 S R016 0062 R017 0086 R018 0098

R019 0109 R020 0093 R021 0125 R022 0114 R023 0111
CM0 0027 CM1 0033 CM2 0037 CMPA2 0022 CMPAH 0054
CMPAR 0039 DEC1 0008 DEC2 0012 DEC3 0016 DECD 0003
DECR 0021 FEK0 0043 FEK1 0049 FEKO 0040 FEKR 0053
TEST 0130 TIN2 T

The following can appear next to the label:

- xxxx Lines or number of program steps

- S System call
- T Table

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

... Title ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

If this menu point is activated with [Y], the text defined in the text field of the print menu is
printed as the heading on every page. In addition to the specified text, an information line is
printed on every page and a table of contents is printed on the last page.

Example:
This text is printed on
----------------------------------------------
every page.
Heading
Text specified by user.
Any text can be entered.
----------------------------------------------
PROJECT: NETWORK DATE: 91.04.11 Page: 001 Information line that
accompanies each
*** PROGRAM *** heading and contains the
00000 JSR IN 01540 following information:
00001 JSR COMM 01430 • program name
00002 JSR OUT 00005 • program date
00003 JSR WRT 00021 • page number
00004 END
00005 *
00005 *

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-8

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

... Symbols A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

If this menu point is activated with [Y], all addresses with SYMBs assigned to them are printed out
with the symbols.
Example:
*** ASSIGNMENTS ***

DISPL. 0 R0000 DISPLAY 0

FBK ADDR. R0864 & FBK DATA ADDR
FBK DEST0 R0868 & FBK DEST 0
:

The SYMB for the LAD is to the left of the address, and the SYMB for the STL to the right.

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

... Sequence Charts ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

If this menu point is activated with [Y], all of the sequence charts in the program are printed out.
Example:

1 PROG:TEST SEQ:$PRG DATE: 91.04.12 END: 02 FPROGS: 4625 PG-PC

00 TEST

01 HIGH

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

... Ladder Diagrams ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

If this menu point is activated with [Y], all of the ladder diagrams in the program are printed out.
Example:

1 PROG:BSP_FBK LAD:TEST DATE:91.03.08 END: LINE: COLUMN: PG-PC

19 Multiplication
1 * 1 Byte
F 100
20 | | ENABLE MULA
1
R0000
21 | | OP1
DISPL. 0 1
R0001 F 101
22 | | OP2 ACTIVE ( )
1 1
#00000 R1000
23 | | SIGNED RESULT ( )
1 2

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-9

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

... LAD Addresses A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

[Y] In LADs, addresses are printed above the ladder and SYMBs below it.

[N] In LADs only the SYMBs above the ladder are printed out. If there is no SYMB defined,
the address is printed (see SYMB mode in "Symbols Editor - Chapter 4).

... LAD List A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

If this menu point is activated with [Y], a list of all of the LADs in the program is printed out.

Example:

*** LAD List ***

IN 1540 90.10.23
COMM 1430 90.10.23
:

LAD Name Line number or Program date

Program step number of
the LAD translation in the STL

... FBK List A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

If this menu point is activated with [Y], a list of all of the FBKs in the program is printed out.

Example:

*** FBK List ***

AINB 1459 Analog input PE82 & PE42 V2.10 Vers.: 2
NETA 29 MULTINET COMMUNICATION V2.02 Vers.: 5
:

FBK Name FBK Translation FBK Designation

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-10

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

... LAD - XREF A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

When activating this menu with [Y] all existing address cross references in this line are listed to
the next LAD line.

Example:

1 PROG:EXA_FBK LAD:TEST DATE:91

F 100
19 Multiplication *TEST/06
1 * 1 Byte R0000 DISPLAY 0
F 100 F 102
20 | | ENABLE MULA *TEST/21
1 R0001
R0000 F 102 F 103
..............................................
21 | | OP1 |x| (*) F 103
DISPL. 0 1 *TEST/21 LDA1/02
R0001 F 101
..............................................
22 | | OP2 ACTIVE ( ) F 101
1 1 *TEST/06 *TEST/22 LDA1/02
#00000 R1000 R1000
23 | | SIGNED RESULT ( ) 8 12 21
*TEST/04
1 2 *TEST/11 *TEST/23

The LAD-XREF is only printed if the menu item “ladder diagrams” is activated.

Since the LAD-XREF is printed next, on the right to the LAD, a printer that can print at least 132
characters / line is required. The corresponding font (e.g.: condensed font) must be set directly on
the printer.

To print a LAD-XREF a LAD is divided into blocks. A block consists of all components, that are
directly connected with each other by a connecting line (vertical and horizontal). Comments are
assigned to the subsequent block, except a comment still starts within the lower block limit. A
space remains between the blocks.

The LAD-XREF contains all addresses with their long SYMBs, that are used in a block. All address
locations are given in the entire program, on which the memory location is changes. The following
references are possible:

• STL line number

• LAD name / line number

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-11

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

The LAD-XREF next to a block is divided in maximal 3 parts, that are separated from each other
by a dotted line:

P A R T 1
..............................................
LAD block P A R T 2
..............................................
P A R T 3

Example explanation:

Part 1: In this section all memory location addresses of which the contents is
loaded, are listed, (load command: all contacts with the angular contact
symbol:
| | ).

The contents of the following memory location is loaded:

F 100, R0000, F 102, R0001

Part 2: In this section all memory location addresses are listed, that are present in a
FBK (internal memory locationds) and of which the contents within a block
is changed (intermediate storage with address specification: contacts with
the following symbol: (*) ).

F 103 in changed in the following ladder diagrams:

*TEST / line 21
LAD1 / line 2

Part 3: In this section all output addresses (contacts in the last column) and
locations, where they were changed, are listed.

F 101 is changed in the following ladder diagrams:

*TEST / line 6 and 22
LAD1/ line 2

R1000 is changed in the following STL lines: 8, 12, 21,

are changed in the following ladder diagrams:
*TEST / line 4, 11 and 23

All LADs that are marked with a “*”, are references to the corresponding LAD.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-12

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

... Cross Reference List A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

When activating the menu item with [Y] the cross reference list is printed. This list consists of two
parts:
1) Address list with specification of the following data:
2) Label list with specification of the following data:

1) Cross reference list:

*** CROSS REFERENCE LIST***

YXXX SYMB-SHORT SYMB-LONG....

Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference 3 ...
:
YXXX
:
YXXX Address with address preselection and address part
SYMB-SHORT short symbols for LADs
SYMB-LONG long symbols for STL
Reference At this location it is listed, at which position a program address exists and
how it is accessed (Load or Storage instuction, Contact type, ...).
• LN STL instruction
The address is used together with the specified STL instruction in the
STL line LN .
• e.g.: NAME/LAD-LN Contact type
The address is used in the ladder diagram LNAME in the line LN. The
address is used with the specified contact type.
• e.g.: NAME/LAD-LN >>>>
The address is used in the ladder diagram NAME in the line LN within a
FBK (internal memory).

Example:

*** CROSS REFERENCE LIST ***

R0000 DISPL. 0 DISPLAY 0

LAD1/04 ¦ ¦ LAD2/04 ¦/¦ LAD3/04 ¦ ¦
R0100
LAD1/02 ¦ ¦ LAD2/02 [ADR
R0300
LAD4/03 >>>>
R0864 FBK ADDR. & FBK DATA ADDR
38 =R 93 LR
F 100 FLANK+ POSITIVE FLANK
LDA1/02 ¦+¦

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-13

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

2) Label Cross Reference List:

*** LABEL CROSS REFERENCE LIST ***

LABL LN/*TAB*
Reference 1 Reference 2 Reference 3 ...
LABL
:

LABL Label used in the program

LN STL line, that is assigned to the label
*TAB* Label is a table name
Reference The program location is specified where a label is used and how it is
accessed.

• e.g.: STL LN STL instruction

The label is called with the specified STL instruction in the STL line.
• e.g.: NAME/LAD-LN FBK
A FBK that corresponds with the label name, is called up in the ladder
diagram NAME, line LN.
• e.g.: SEQC/LN LAD
The LAD, that corresponds with the label name, is called in the
Sequence chart SEQC, line LN.
• e.g.: NAME/LN >LTN
The label exists within a FBK - in the LAD LNAME , line LN (Label-,
Table- or Name input in the FBK).
Example:
*** LABEL CROSS REFERENCE LIST ***

ADR1 *TAB*

CMPH 38
LAD1/01 FBK LAD2/01 FBK LAD3/01 FBK
CMPR 23
10 BEQ 16 JMP 20 JMP
LDA1 117
$PRG/00 LAD
MIN 212
LAD1/25 >LTN
NEW 158
LAD2/00 >> LAD2/35 >>

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

... Print LAD Code ● ● ● ● ●

While activating the menu item with [Y] all STL transfers of all LADs are printed. While printing
the LAD Code, the function “program” must also be selected with [Y].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-14

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

3.3. ADDITIONAL MENU OPTIONS A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Page beginning
The option activation with [Y] effects a page feed after the print of the selected menu item.

Line / Page
At this location the maximum number of lines per page is entered. According to the setting of this
value, the PROgramming SYStem formats the printer output.

Default setting: 72 lines/ page

Characters / Line
At this location the maximum number of characters per line is entered. According to the setting of
this value, the PROgramming SYStem formats the printer output.

Defualt setting: 132 characters / line

Parallel
[Y] The print comes from the paralle interface LPT1.
[N] The print comes frome the serial interface COM1 corresponding with the set baud
rate.

Baud Rate
If the cursor is in the input field for the baud rate, the desired baud rate for the serial interface can
be set with the key combination [Ctrl] + [↑] or [↓]. The following baud rates are possible:

300 baud 4800 baud

600 baud 9600 baud
1200 baud 19200 baud
2400 baud

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-15

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

PC Output Record
[Y] The PC output record is applied.
[N] The ASCII output record is used.

Example: ASCII output record

Example: PC output record

19 Multiplication
1 * 1 Byte
F 100
20 | | ENABLE MULA
1
R0000 F 102 F 103
21 | | OP1 |x| (*)
DISPL. 0 1
R0001 F 101
22 | | OP2 ACTIVE ( )
1 1
#00000 R1000
23 | | SIGNED RESULT ( )
1 2

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-16

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

4. PRINTING PROGRAMS OR PROGRAM PARTS

For the printing process the printer menu doesn't necessarily need to be called up. After the input of
[F10] + [F1 PRINT] the sofkeyline is changed:

If [↵] is pressed immediately after the input of [F10] + [F1 PRINT], the printer menu is called up.

[F1 PROG]
A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Printing a STL program or STL program parts. The STL transfer from LADs is not printed out.
After the input of [F1 PROG] the user is asked to set the program range, that should be printed. The
softkey line is changed:

Input Print range

↵]
[↵ The entire STL program is printed.
FROM <LN/LB> TO <LN/LB> [↵↵] The specified range is printed.
↵]
[F1 FROM] <LN/LB> [F2 To] <LN/LB> [↵
TO <LN/LB> [↵↵] The STL range beginning with the
↵]
[F2 TO] <LN/LB> [↵ current input line up to the specified
program line <LN/LB> is printed.
FROM <LN/LB> NUM <NR> [↵↵] Beginning with the specified line <LN/
↵]
[F1 FROM] <LN/LB> [F3 NUM] <NR> [↵ LB> <NR> lines are printed.
NUM <NR> [↵↵] Beginning with the current input line
↵]
[F3 NUM] <NR> [↵ <NR> lines are printed.

A line number or a label is to be entered for <LN/LB>.

After pressing [↵] the specified range is printed out. When the print procedure is finished, the
message “List / Print ended” is displayed on screen. The cursor is positioned in the
command line again after pressing any key.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-17

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

[F2 SYMB] A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Printing the SYMBs or a SYMB range.
After the input of [F2 SYMB] the user is asked to set a SYMB range, that should be printed. The
softkeyline is changed as with [F1 PROG].
The print range definition is the same as with [F1 PROG]. Instead of <LN/LB> an address <ADR>
is entered.

[F3 TAB] A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ●
Table print-out.
After the input of [F3 TAB] the user has to enter the TAB, that should be printed. The softkeyline
is changed:

If no TAB name is entered, all existing tables are printed.

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

[F4 LAB] ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Print-out of a list of all labels used in the program.

This list corresponds with the symbol table in the printer menu.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-18

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

5. DISPLAY ON SCREEN A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

The output speed on screen can be changed with the keyboard during the output:
[L] Slow output speed
[Any key] normal output speed
[W] Stopping the output on screen
[Any key] Continuing the output on screen

5.2. OUTPUT OF PROGRAMS AND PROGRAM PARTS

All outputs, that are possible on a printer, can also be displayed on screen. The instruction [F10] +
[F2 LIST] is equivalent to the already explained PRINT command.
After the input of [F10] + [F2 LIST] [↵ ↵] the printer menu is displayed. With the selection of the
desired items in this menu the program or program parts are printed.
The following menu item settings do not influence the display on screen:
• page start
• parallel (interface)
• PC output record (only the PC output record is used, not the ASCII output
record)
• baud rate
• character / page
Also the screen display of program parts and the definition of the print range with the commands
LIST PROG, LIST SYMB, LIST TAB and LIST LAB are handled the same as the PRINT
command.

5.3. CROSS REFERENCE LIST

Command: ↵]
XREF [↵
Function: Cross refernce output on screen.
This function corresponds to the menu item cross reference in the printer menu. The
output of cross reference list on screen with the command LIST [↵] is identical to
the command XREF [↵].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-19

 Chapter 9 PRINTING

6. “PRINTING” IN A FILE A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

It is possible to transfer all print commands, that refer to a printer in a file. This can not be done
directly from the PROgramming SYStem. It must be defined before the program start by a MS-
DOS environment vaiable.

Before the start of a B&R-PROgramming SYStem the following must be entered in the MS-DOS
input line:

C:\>SET B&R$PRINTFILE=<file name> [↵]

<file name> is the name of the file, in which all print outputs occur. An entire
path, including the disk drive specification, can be entered.

Example: C:\> SET B&R$PRINTFILE=C:\OUTPUT\[Link] [↵]

C:\> PG [↵]

All printer outputs go in the file [Link] on drive C in the directory

\OUTPUT.

To delete this environment variable, the following command is entered to the MS-DOS input line:

C:\>SET B&R$PRINTFILE= [↵]

The environment variable B&R$PRINTFILE is deleted.

7. DEFINE INTERFACE
A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
● ● ● ● ● ● ●

The selection of the interface and baud rate for a serial interface is described in 3.3. ADDITIONAL
MENU OPTIONS. The setting can also be performed with the commands in in the command line:
• PAR [↵] ↵]
Selection of a parallel interface LPT1 as printer interface.
• SER [↵ ↵]
Selection of a serial interface COM1 as printer interface.
• BAUD <Baud-Rate> [↵ ↵]
Creating the baud-rate for the serial interface.
The following values can be entered for <baudrate> :
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 9-20

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

CHAPTER 10
ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

Contents: 1. General Information 10-3

2. FBK Programming Basics 10-5
2.1. Preparations 10-5
2.2. FBK Function 10-5
2.3. Internal Memory Locations 10-6
2.4. Private Memory Locations 10-7
3. FBK Editor Call 10-8
4. Menu Structure 10-8
5. FBK Definition 10-10
5.1. Comment Field 10-10
5.2. Short Comment 10-11
5.3. FBK Name 10-11
5.4. Definition Field 10-11
[Link] of a certain Number of bytes 10-12
5.4.2. Address Input Characteristics 10-13
5.4.3. Label Input Characteristics 10-14
5.5. Input/Output Names 10-15
5.6. Number of Inputs/Outputs 10-15
5.6. Exiting the FBK Editor 10-15
7. The STL Program of a FBK 10-16
8. Change an existing FBK 10-18

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-1

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-2

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

1. GENERAL INFORMATION ● ● ● ● ●

An extensive collection of standard functions blocks is available at B&R. These standard FBKs
support the user in program creation and shorten software development time.

In expansion level C there is additionally the possibility of defining and programming new function
blocks with the FBK editor. The user can create individual, problem specific function blocks.

In the first step the block form is specified - the number of inputs and outputs. In the second step
the FBK function is defined with a STL program.

The B&R standard software collection includes efficient function blocks, that are divided in clearly
arranged groups according to their function.

Group Contents

1. Hardware FBKs for a software operation of modules.

2. Utilities Useful programming devices (shift register, drum sequencer ...)

3. System FBKs for the application of operating system mathematic.

4. Operating panels FBKs for Input/Output programs for operator panels as well as the
operation of the graphic panels.

5. Printer Printer activation FBKs.

6. MININET FBKs to operate a Master-Slave Network.

7. MULTINET FBKs to operate a Token Ring Network.

8. PID-controller PID-controller FBKs

9. Positioning Positioning FBKs

10. Communication FBKs for the coupling with other systems (Siemens, Modbus, A-B, ...)

11. Device driver Support of peripheral devices (BRMEC).

12. PROVIT FBKs for visualization programs with PROVIT terminals

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-3

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

There are several software packages available:

Group
Package
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 11 12

1 ● ● ●

2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3 ● ● ● ●

4 ● ● ● ●

5 ● ● ● ● ●

6 ● ● ● ●

7 ● ● ● ●

8 ● ● ● ●

9 ● ● ● ●

Model numbers:

Package Model number

German English

1 SWSPSSTD01-x SWPLCSTD01-x
2 SWSPSSTD02-x SWPLCSTD02-x
3 SWSPSPID01-x SWPLCPID01-x
4 SWSPSPOS01-x SWPLCPOS01-x
5 SWSPSCOM01-x SWPLCCOM01-x
6 SWSPSDRV01-x SWPLCDRV01-x
7 SWSPSDRV02-x SWPLCDRV02-x
8 SWSPSDRV03-x SWPLCDRV03-x
9 SWSPSDRV04-x SWPLCDRV04-x

x = 0 Software on 3.5" Diskettes

x = 1 Software on 5.25" Diskettes

The SOFTWARE MANUAL (2 volumes) is delivered with every package.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-4

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

2. FBK PROGRAMMING BASICS

2.1. PREPARATIONS
Before a new FBK is defined and programmed, it is necessary to design it first on paper with all
inputs and outputs exactly, to avoid subsequent changes and redefinition of a created FBK.

2.2. FBK FUNCTION

A FBK has been referred to as a so called “Black-Box”. The user knows the tasks of a FBK
(Software-description) and which functions its inputs and outputs have and which data needs to be
connected. The function of this “Black-Box” is defined in the STL subprogram. This STL program
processes the inputs and changes the outputs according to the input data.

A FBK is included in LAD 1), in which the inputs and outputs are connected. This part of the ladder
diagram is translated to the STL:

• Input submittal
• FBK program call
• Output submittal

Schematic structure of the STL translation:

LAD
LAD-STL Submit
FBK STL-translation Input
of LAD’s parameters
Outputs
Inputs

Call up
FBK-STL

Submit
Output
parameters

FBK-STL

1)
Chapter 4, section 6. Function plan programming

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-5

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

2.3. INTERNAL MEMORY LOCATIONS

A FBK uses, according to the input and output definition in the FBK editor, internal and/or private
memory locations. In this memory location the input parameters are submitted to the FBK program
which also returns the output parameters to the same memory location.

The internal memory location is in the system memory of the PLC, that can not be accessed by the
B&R address preselections.

Input parameter submittal: Before the call of a FBK- STL, ...

... the address of the internal memory range is determined.
... the input parameters are stored in this memory range (➀).
... the start address is put onto the stack.
... the start address of this memory range is filed in index register X.

FBK-STL call:
The FBK program can now read and work using the indicated addressing of the
input parameter (➁) and store with the indicated addressing of the output parameter
(➂).

Output parameter addressing: After the call of a FBK-STL, ...

... the start address is taken from the stack.
... the output parameters are loaded from the internal memory range (➃) and
assigned to the outputs.

Schematic structure:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-6

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

2.4. PRIVATE MEMORY LOCATIONS

The private memory locations are in the PLC user memory range. These are memory locations, that
the user can access with the B&R address preselections (e.g.: R, F, S, T, ...). These private
memory locations should not be overwritten by other program parts.

The parameters that is defined by the user is submitted to this memory location, (FBK-definition
editor). No internal memory locations are required.

The submittal of input/output parameters is the same as the submittal of internal memory locations.

Note: Private and internal memory locations can be mixed with the definition
of the inputs and outputs. I.e. the parameter submittal ensues according
to the FBK definition either in private or internal memory locations.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-7

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

3. FBK EDITOR CALL

Command: ↵]
[F4 FBK] <NAME> [↵
<NAME> may have a maximum length of 4 characters and has to start with a letter.
If no name is entered, the FBK definition menu of the last processed FBK is displayed. If no FBK
is defined, the following message is displayed:
E174 DEFAULT NAME NOT DEFINED OR WRONG
After terminating with [↵] the FBK definition menu is displayed.

4. MENU STRUCTURE
Window number
Editor-Name
FBK-Name
Program data
Time Mode
FBK-size/ Cursor position
Programming
Mode
Status line

Editor field

Message line

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-8

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

Status line: In this line different information is displayed.

Mode: NEW This information is displayed if a FBK is newly

defined.
CHANGE This information is displayed if an existing FBK is
changed.

The FBK consists of 3 lines.

The cursor is located in line 1.
FBK size / cursor position: e.g.: 03/01

line 1

line 2

line 3

addi-
tional
lines

Editor field: In this field the FBK, to be established, is defined:

• comment and short comment (short statement about the FBK function)
• input page (number and size of the inputs)
• output page (number and size of the outputs)

Message line In the message line messages concerning user errors or messages requiring the input
of parameters are displayed.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-9

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

5. FBK DEFINITION
If a new FBK is defined, a standard FBK with two inputs and one output is displayed after calling
it up with FBK <NAME> [↵ ↵].

Comment field

Cursor

Field for short comment

Definition FBK name

field

Input side Output side

5.1. COMMENT FIELD

The cursor is in the comment field after the call of the FBK editor. Any text can be entered in this
comment field (a maximum of 50 characters), that briefly describes the FBK functions.

This comment line is displayed in the FBK overview (when loading FBKs) next to the FBK names
and is printed out with the FBK list.

After pressing the [↵] or [↓] key the cursor is positioned in the field for the short comment.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-10

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

5.2. SHORT COMMENT

Any short piece of text (2 lines with 15 characters each) can be entered in this field, similar to the
comment field, which briefly describes the FBK functions.

This text is displayed in the LAD together with the FBK (only in PC-mode!).

After pressing the [↵] or [↓] key the cursor is positioned at the first input.

5.3. FBK NAME

The FBK name is displayed in inverse video in this field. This name corresponds to the label of the
subprogram pertinent to the FBK.

5.4. DEFINITION FIELD

Every Input/Output is assigned to a definition field, that contains information on the values, that
are to be committed:

1-8 number of submittal bytes

L, T, N mark for label submittal
A mark for address submittal
address or label, or table name

address part
address preselection

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-11

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

5.4.1. Submittal of a certain ● ● ● ● ●
number of bytes
At the first position of the definition field is a value b, that indicates, how many bytes are submit-
ted in a input/output.

Address preselection or address don't need to necessarily be specified. Possible definitions for
inputs/outputs are:

b . .... A b-byte value is submitted to the internal memory range.

b v .... A b-byte value is submitted to the memory range. This value is stored in a
memory location with the address preselection v and its complete address is
entered in the LAD during the FBK call.

b v aaaa A b-byte value is submitted to memory location v aaaa. No internal memory

is used.

address selection v address aaaa PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

. .... I/O I/O I/O I/O
I
O
R 0000 - 7167 I/O I/O I/O I/O
F 000 - 799 I/O I/O I/O I/O
S 000 - 3E7 I/O I/O I/O I/O
T 000 - 3E7 I/O I/O I/O I/O
P
G 0000 - 4095 I/O
B 0000 - 4095 I
# 00000 - 65535 I I
%0 - %111 1111
$0000 - $FFFF

I Address preselection in only possible for the input page

O Address preselection is only possible for the output page

If an immediate-value (#) is distributed in the FBK definition, nothing can be connected at this
input. The defined value is exclusively submitted to the FBK program.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-12

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

5.4.2. Characteristic for the ● ● ●
address submittal
If the letter “A” is in the first position of the definition field, an address can be submitted for the
FBK program with this input. For this address submittal 2 bytes of the internal memory range are
always used.

The address preselection must be defined, to exit the definition field. Possible input definitions are:

A v .... The memory location address with the address preselection v is submitted to
the FBK program. The complete address of this memory location must be
entered in the LAD during the FBK call.

A v aaaa The memory location address v aaaa is submitted to the FBK program.

address selection v address aaaa PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

.
I 000 - 3FF I I
O 000 - 3FF I I
R 0000 - 7167 I I I I
F 000 - 799 I I I I
S 000 - 3FF I I I I
T 000 - 3FF I I I I
P 000 - 3FF I I I
B I
G I
#

I Address preselection is only possible for the input page

No contact or path can be connected with this input. The predefined address v aaaa
is submitted to the FBK program. The addressing ensues either entirely in the FBK
definition or partially during the call of a FBK in a LAD.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-13

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

5.4.3. Characters used for ● ● ●
submitting Labels
If the letter “L”, “N” or “T” is in the first position of the definition field, the label address can be
submitted to the FBK program with this input. 2 bytes are always used for the submittal.

The following possibilities are available, to submit an input to the label. Either “L”, “N” or “T”
can be entered instead of “x”:

x The label address is submitted to the FBK program in the internal memory
range. The label name must be entered in the LAD when calling the FBK.

x > The label address is submitted to the FBK program in the internal memory
range. A label contact must be connected to this input in the LAD. Other
contacts are not permitted by the PROgramming SYStem.

x NAME The label address NAME is submitted to the FBK program in the internal
memory range. NAME is specified by the FBK definition and can not be
changed any more, when calling the FBK in the LAD. NAME may have a
maximum length of 4 characters. The first character must be a letter.

“L”, “T” and “N” have the same function. They can be applied by the user for the structuring of the
program. E.g.:

L Labels of subprograms, that are called by the FBK program.

T Labels of tables, that are used by the FBK program.
N Other labels.

At inputs “x” and “x NAME” no label contact can be connected. The predefined
label NAME is submitted to the FBK program. .The label definition ensues either
completely in the FBK definition or when calling a FBK in a LAD.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-14

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

5.5. INPUT/OUTPUT NAMES

Every input is provided with a name field, where any text can be entered. If the cursor is moved in
the FBK with the [❖]-keys, one of the name fields can be entered. The name can be up to 4 or 6
characters long, depending on the programming mode:

PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80 Name

● ●
4 characters
● ●
6 characters

5.6. NUMBER OF INPUTS/OUTPUTS

If a new FBK is defined, a standard FBK with two inputs and one output is displayed after the call
of the FBK editor. The number of inputs /outputs can be changed with the following commands:

[Ctrl] + [Ins] Inserts a line (1 input and 1 output)

A FBK can have a maximum of 48 inputs and 47 outputs.

[Ctrl] + [Del] Deletes a line (1 input and 1 output).

The cursor must be at the position, where a line should be inserted or deleted.

6. EXITING THE FBK EDITOR

[Esc] Exits the editor in the command line

[Ctrl] + [Esc] Exits the editor in the command line without consideration of any changes made
since the beginning.

After exiting with [Esc] the PROgramming SYStem creates or changes the FBK header in the STL.
This FBK header contains all information, that is required by the user for the creation of a FBK
program.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-15

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

7. THE STL PROGRAM OF A FBK

The STL program of a FBK includes a header and the pertinent STL program. All information
about the inputs and outputs, as defined in the FBK editor, is located in the header.

The STL subprogram of the FBK is to be inserted with the label FBKN. The input/output parameter
must be submitted according to the information given in the FBK header. Index register X contains
the start address of the range in system memory, to which the parameters are submitted.

Example:

FBK-Name Comment; FBK short description

Short comment
FBK-name

00006 *@FBKN: Comment........................................

00006 *@
00006 *@ short comment..
00006 *@ ...............
00006 *@
00006 *@ 1 ..... I000 - INP 1 FBKN -
00006 *@ 4 ..... I001 - INP 2 OUT 1 - 1 ..... I013
00006 *@ 2 R2000 - INP 3 OUT 2 - 2 R2002
00006 *@ O R.... I005 - INP 4 - . .....
00006 *@ O R3000 I007 - INP 5 - . .....
00006 *@ L I009 - LABEL - . .....
00006 *@ T > I011 - TNAME - . .....
00006 *@
00006 FBKN NOP @O START
: : STL-Program
: : for this FBK
xxxxx RTS END:

Input page Output page

Label-Name of the STL subprogram A

ADDRESSING for the input/output parameters in the FBK program:

Input/output Addressing Number of bytes

INP 1 I 000 1
INP 2 I 001 4
INP 3 R2000 2
INP 4 I 005 2
INP 5 I 007 2
LABEL I 009 2
TNAME I 011 2
OUT 1 I 013 1
OUT 2 R2002 2

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-16

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

The most significant byte is located on a lower address in multi byte values.

Example: Input INP2: A 4-byte value is submitted to the FBK program.

This value includes the following:

4-byte value (INP 2)

internal byte 3 byte 2 byte 1 byte 0
memory range
INP 1 I 000
I 001
I 002
INP 2
I 003
I 004
I 005
INP 4
I 006
:

Important
The internal memory range may not be used for data storage, since this range is used by the
system. So it is not guaranteed, that the memory contents won't change during the next program
execution.

This is to be considered especially concerning outputs. All output states, submitted to the internal
memory range by the FBK program, absolutely must be processed. The contacts, connected to FBK
outputs, could otherwise accept undefined states.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-17

 Chapter 10 ESTABLISHMENT OF FUNCTION BLOCKS

8. CHANGE AN EXISTING FBK

The defined inputs/outputs of existing FBKs can be changed. With the command FBK <NAME>
↵] the FBK editor is called, where the inputs and outputs can be redefined.
[↵

After terminating all changes and exiting the FBK editor the first LAD is automatically called, in
which this FBK is installed. The respective FBK is displayed in inverse video (on a colored screen
the FBK is displayed with red background) and the softkey line allocation is altered.

[F1 DEL_FBK] The unchanged FBK is deleted from the LAD.

[F4 CHANGE] The original FBK is replaced by the altered FBK.

[F5 PRINT] The current LAD is printed.

[F6 FBK] The FBK overview is displayed.

The FBK displayed in inverse video has to either be deleted from the LAD or be replaced by the
newly defined FBK. This procedure is repeated by all “old” existing FBKs in the LAD. Only if no
old FBK is available in a LAD, can the lad be edited and changed.

By exiting the first LAD with [Esc], the next LAD is called, where an old FBK still exists.

This is repeated until all original FBKs, that are available in the program, are deleted or replaced
by a new FBK.

If all inputs/outputs of a FBK are redefined, in most cases the pertinent STL
program must be changed as well.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 10-18

 Chapter11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

CHAPTER 11
ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

Contents: 1. Introduction 11-3

2. Modem Settings 11-4
2.1. Assignment of function keys 11-4
2.2. Modem setting Parameters 11-6
2.2.1. Commands 11-6
2.2.2 Parameters for COM1-interface 11-7
2.2.3 Messages 11-8
2.3 Principal settings in the modem 11-9
3. Dialing directory 11-10
4. Node list 11-14
5. Programming the S-EEPROM 11-21
5.1 Password option 11-22
5.2 Callback parameters 11-25
5.3 Alarm option 11-27
5.4 Modem parameters 11-30
5.5 Internal timeout 11-32
5.6 Busmaster Timeout 11-33
6. Standby operation 11-35
6.1 Response to establishment of link 11-37
6.2 Standby after initiating a callback 11-38
7. Exchanging data with the PLC 11-39
7.1 Alarm parameters 11-39
7.2 Log book / Dual-port RAM 11-41
7.2.1 Log book 11-41
7.2.2 Dual-port RAM 11-46

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-1

 Chapter 11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-2

 Chapter11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

1. INTRODUCTION
The application program memory module with networking capabilities and built-in modem
interface (briefly referred to as "the modem interface" in this manual) allows you to make a remote
diagnosis of PLC processors with the B&R PROgramming SYStem. Up to 16 PLC processors
(CPUs and parallel processors) can be monitored or programmed on-line with the programming
device. However, you must distinguish between two operating modes1):

1) Operation with a modem

2) Operation without a modem

You require a B&R PROgramming SYStem version higher than 5.4 for on-line programming via
the modem interface. This version contains some new instructions for the on-line programming via
modem:

- MODEM Preselection of modem-specific parameters (configuration menu)

- DIAL Manages up to 200 names and telephone numbers. Establishes a
telephone link.
- ONL COM1 Activates the PC's serial COM1 port and displays details about the
dialed station.
- STANDBY The B&R PROgramming SYStem waits for alarms from the dialed
station and saves these into a file.

The B&R PROgramming SYStem from version 5.4 upwards presently only supports the RS232
links to the busmaster (modem interface with node number 0). An on-line link via a modem
interface with the node numbers 1 to 15 is only supported through the busmaster's RS485 interface.

FEATURES
The modem on-line link provides you with the same features to intervene in the PLC as those in a
direct link between PC and PLC. All operational commands that require an existing on-line link can
be used:

RUN, RUN P, DEBUG, LDMO, XFER, P-VERS, LOAD PLC, EEPROM

In addition, there is also the possibility that the modem interface monitors the PLC and forwards
alarm messages to a superior station, which will then protocol these messages and, if necessary,
take remedial action in the PLC.

1)
See section 12 "Online Interfaces"

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-3

 Chapter 11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

2. MODEM SETTINGS
Command: ↵]
MODEM [↵

Function: This command calls up the "modem settings" menu. In this menu you enter the
specific parameters of the modem that is connected to the PC.

2.1. ASSIGNMENT OF FUNCTION KEYS

[F1 CCITT]

Preliminary setting of the modem configuration with standard parameters for CCITT-compatible
modems.

This function is not supported by the B&R PROgramming SYStem version 5.4.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-4

 Chapter11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

[F2 HAYES]
Preliminary setting of the modem configuration with the standard parameters for HAYES-
compatible modems (AT instruction set).

[F3 ~]
This function key allows you to place the "~" character (wait) at your current cursor position. This
character makes the modem wait 0.5 seconds before executing the next command.

[F5 TERMINAL]
Enter the terminal emulation for operating the modem directly through the keyboard. After calling
up this function, the screen is cleared and the cursor is placed on the left hand-side at the top of the
screen.

[F8 EXIT] or [ESC]

Exit from the "modem settings". After activating this function, the following request is made in the
menu line:

W300 write data ? (Y/N)

If you press... [Y] the entered data are accepted and saved to the user configuration file;

If you press... [N], [F8 EXIT] or [ESC] the menu "modem settings" is exited without
writing the data into the user configuration file.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-5

 Chapter 11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

2.2 MODEM SETTING PARAMETERS

Select the field to be altered with the cursor keys [up], [down], [PgUp] or [PgDn]. The field
selected is displayed in inverse video.

2.2.1COMMANDS
Initialization String of max. 40 characters with which the modem is initialized in each
Command: dialing process or when the standby menu is entered.

Dialing: Dialing command consisting of max. 30 characters for initiating the dialing
Command: process.

Dialing end: String of max. 30 characters that is sent to the modem at the end of each
Command: dialing process.

Hang-up: String of max. 30 characters that makes the modem disconnect from an
Command: existing link.

Entry of special characters:

"~" Wait for 0.5 secs.

"^" Characterizes a control character

Example: ^M is interpreted hexadecimally as $0D (=Carriage Return)
and sent to the modem1)

"^^" The character "^" is sent to the modem.

1)
The function of each control character is outlined in the modem´s operating manual.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-6

 Chapter11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

2.2.2. PARAMETERS FOR COM1-INTERFACE

Baud rate: If [↵] is pressed while the cursor is placed on this field, a window is opened in
which the following baud rates can be selected by means of the cursor keys [up],
[down].

If you press....

... [↵] the respective baud rate is selected and

confirmed.

... [F8 EXIT] or [ESC] the window for selecting

the baud rate is exited without
accepting the selected value.

Parity: If the [↵] key is pressed while the cursor is placed on this field, a window is opened
in which the following features can be selected with the cursor keys [up],
[down]:

If you press....

... [↵] the parity is selected and confirmed.

... [F8 EXIT] or [ESC] the window for selecting

the parity is exited without accepting
the selected value.

Data bits: The number of data bits is selected with the following keys:

[5] 5 Data bits

[6] 6 Data bits
[7] 7 Data bits
[8] 8 Data bits

Stop bits: The number of stop bits is selected with the following keys:

[1] 1 Stop bit

[2] 2 Stop bits

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-7

 Chapter 11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

2.2.3. MESSAGES
Response OK: This response is not used by the B&R PROgramming SYStem.

Response Error: This response is not used by the B&R PROgramming SYStem.

Connect Message: If a link is established with another modem, the modem connected to the PC
sends a "connect message". This message contains the baud rate with
which the link is established with the remote modem.

Any message to be displayed by the modem in the event of an established

link should be entered here. For further information please refer to your
modem's operating manual.

CAUTION: If incorrect messages are entered in the modem configuration (connect

message), B&R PROgramming SYStem is not able to recognize an
established link.

Auto Baud Rate Detect:

[Y] The PC's COM1 interface is parameterized with the baud rate
contained in the "connect message".

[N] The baud rate of the COM1 interface is not changed. This is only
possible in modems that are able to communicate with the remote
modem in another baud rate than with the PC.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-8

 Chapter11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

2.3 PRINCIPAL SETTINGS IN THE MODEM

Some settings have to be made in the modem connected to the PC, so that the B&R PROgramming
SYStem is able to communicate with it.

1) Set the AT instruction set, because it is presently the only one supported by the B&R
PROgramming SYStem. Usually you can select between the AT and the CCITT
instruction set in a modem.

2) Determine how the modem is connected in your telephone system:

a) Main line
b) Extension

3) Set the data format:

a) 8 Data bits
b) No parity
c) 1 Stop bit

4) Select the type of dialing:

a) Pulse dialing
b) Tone dialing

5) Hardware handshake is active.

6) Check the connection PC - Modem by means of the terminal emulation that is built into
the B&R PROgramming SYStem ([F5 TERMINAL] in the menu "modem
configuration"). Enter the modem commands directly (e.g. dialing commands,
hang-up, ...) in order to check the link. If necessary, make alterations
to the modem parameters.

Example: After entering AT (the AT command for attention) in the terminal emulation,
the modem should respond with OK:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-9

 Chapter 11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

3. DIALING DIRECTORY
Command: DIAL [ ↵]

Function: This command calls up the "Dialing directory" menu. This menu allows you
to enter up to 200 station names with the respective telephone numbers,
establish (DIAL) and terminate (HANG-UP) links.

After entering DIAL[↵] in the command line, the following menu appears:

Select the desired number with the cursor keys [up], [down] or [PgUp], [PgDn]. The inverse entry
can be edited, altered, newly entered or "invoked" through the modem connected to the PC.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-10

 Chapter11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

[F1 REVISE]
Input or change of an entry. If this function is selected, a window is opened in which the "name"
and "telephone number" fields can be altered:

[ESC] Exit from the window and accept entered data.

Entering special characters in the "telephone number" field:

"~" Wait for 0.5 secs.

"^" Characterizes a control character
Example: ^M is interpreted hexadecimally as $0D (=Carriage Return)
and sent to the modem1)
"^^" The character "^" is sent to the modem.

Recognized control characters within the telephone number:

Number to dial
Wait for dialing tone (free-line signal)
Pause (R8)/Long pause
Ground key
Pulse dialing
Tone dialing

0123456789W,>PT Hayes-AT
0123456789:=>PT CCITT

Example: Tone dial the number 09989 7602 521 through an AT-modem from an extension (get
main line first with "0" and wait for free-line signal dialing tone) and pause
between area code, number and extension:

T0W09989,7602,521

1)
The function of each control character is outlined in the modem´s operating manual.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-11

 Chapter 11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

[F2 SEARCH]
Search for an entry. After pressing [F2 SEARCH], a window is opened:

The user can now enter a search mask according to which a search is made. The mask is compared
with the name and telephone number. The first entry found is shown in inverse video. The dialing
directory is searched from NO. 001 to 200. If necessary, the search begins again at the first entry.
No difference is made between upper case and lower case characters.

If no entry was found with the mask, the following error message is displayed:

E212 FAILED SEARCH !

Example: Search mask: ... STAT

The following entries are found

Name Telephone number

STATION 1 092388836
8. Station P2
Co. Salmond STAT0911

[F3 ERASE]
The selected entry is deleted from the directory. If this function was selected, the user is asked for
a confirmation:

W299 DELETE ENTRY ? (Y / N)

[Y] The entry is deleted

[N] The delete function is terminated

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-12

 Chapter11 ONLINE PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

[F4 GOTO]
Select the entry with the desired number. When calling up this function, a dialogue window appears
in which the desired number can be entered (1 to 200):

[F5 DIAL]
The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem tries to establish a link with the selected number (telephone
number). A window is opened in which the modem's last message is displayed. The dial process
can be interrupted at any time by pressing [F8 EXIT] or [ESC]. After the link has been established
successfully, the program automatically switches to the menu "node list".

[F6 HANG UP]

The existing link is disconnected. A window is opened which shows the modem's last message to
the PC. Close the window again by pressing [F8 EXIT] or [ESC]. The following message appears:

W283 PLEASE WAIT 10 SECONDS !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem 11-13

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

4. NODE LIST
Command: ↵]
ONL COM1 [↵

Function: After entering ONL in the command line, the assignment of the softkey line is
changed:

After entering [F3 COM1] and [↵] the program tries to establish a link to the PLC
(modem interface) through the PC's COM1 interface. In modem operation it is
necessary to establish the respective telephone link (command: DIAL) first before
calling up the node list, as otherwise the following error message is displayed:

E052 MISSING ONLINE INTERFACE CARD

After the link is established successfully, the station overview is displayed:

Node number
Status of the link
Node overview

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-14

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

Node number:

Up to 16 CPUs or parallel processors can be linked within a network by means of the modem
interface. The node number is set on the modem interface through a turn switch (see section 12
Online Interfaces).

Status of the link:

"" Not logged in

"*" Logged in (no on-line link between modem interface and PLC!)
"!" On-line link established, but not active (For example: after switching to a local
interface with ONL B&R0, without previous logout)
"1" Station is activated for window 1 (On-line link exists between modem interface and
PLC)
"2" Station is activated for window 2 (On-line link exists between modem interface and
PLC)

Node information:

Five different messages are possible:

1) !!!! SAFETY CALLBACK ACTIVE !!!!

After logging in and selecting one of the two callback numbers, the modem interface
interrupts the link and tries to establish the link with the selected callback number.

2) !!!! PASSWORD ACTIVE !!!!

The station is protected by a password.

3) PLC ERROR
PLC is out of order.

4) PLC DISCONNECTED
The on-line connection between the modem interface and the PLC is either not inserted
properly or out of order.

5) Information on the program that is currently being executed in the PLC is equivalent to
the information line that is sent in the command P-VERS 1).

Select the displayed stations with the cursor keys [up] or [down]. The station is displayed inversely
on the screen.

1)
See section 5 "STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING", 8.5 P-VERS - Information on the PLC program.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-15

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

[F1 LOGIN]
The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem logs into the selected station. It should be proceeded as follows:

1) If the safety callback is active, the user is asked in a dialogue window to select one of
the two callback numbers when a link is established via the modem.

The assignment of the softkey line was also altered:

[F1 CALLBACK]

Call back with the selected number (see also [F5 CALLBACK]).

The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem switches into the STANDBY-mode and waits for the
callback from the modem interface. The last message from the modem is
shown in a window on the screen. You can leave the STANDBY-mode at
any time by pressing [ESC] or [F8 EXIT].

After a successful callback and the establishment of the link, the program switches back
to the station overview mask and displays all stations.

[F8 EXIT] or [ESC]

Interrupt the function and return to the node list.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-16

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

2) If the password check system is active, the user is asked in a window to enter his
password. If a wrong password was entered, the following message is
displayed:

E204 INVALID PASSWORD !

If the password was correct, the character "*" for "logged in" is displayed in the station
overview.

3) If none of the safety systems is active, the node is marked by the "*" character as
"logged in".

[F2 LOGOUT]
Log out from the selected station.

After logging out from the master (node number 0), all slaves are automatically logged off (node
numbers 1 to F). Then the link is interrupted.

[F3 UPDATE]
All the information on the stations (status of links, node information) is updated. This function is
used, for example, when the station overview is called up with ONL COM1 [↵]. For runtime
reasons, the node information can only be updated if the PLC status has changed.

[F4 S-EEPROM]
Call up the menu for entering the parameters in the S-EEPROM (serial EEPROM in the modem
interface). The following menu appears.

For further details on this menu, please see "5. Programming the S-EEPROM".

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-17

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

[F5 CALLBACK]
Initiate a callback from the modem interface. After activating this function, the user is requested in
a window to enter the callback string:

If the function key [F5 CALLBACK] is pressed, the link is interrupted, the B&R-PROgramming-
SYStem switches over to standby and waits for the callback. The last message from the modem is
displayed in a window on the screen. The standby mode can be left at any time by pressing [F8
EXIT] or [ESC]. After the callback and the successful establishment of a link, the program
switches back to the node list, which displays all stations. A CALLBACK is only possible if...

...the user is only logged into the master.

...the link was established through a modem.

[F6 SELECT]
The marked node is selected for the current window. The window number is displayed on the right
hand-side next to the node number. A node that has already been selected for the same window is
marked by "*"; the on-line link of this node is terminated.

All functions of the B&R-PROgrammingSYStem in the respective window now refer to this node
(e.g. RUN, DEBUG, hardware reset,....).

[F8 EXIT] or [ESC]

Exit from the node list and return to the command line in B&R-PROgrammingSYStem.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-18

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

[F9] or [F10]
The assignment of the softkey lines can be changed with these two function keys.

[F9] + [F1 STATUS]

Display station status. Various conditions of the marked node as well as the PROM version are
displayed in the window. The parameters marked by the bar are active:

S-EEPROM Defective
This message will be displayed as long as the S-EEPROM Password Protection Active
is Station is protected by a password.
not programmed by the user or if the S-EEPROM is
defective. S-EEPROM Programming Error
There was an error in programming the S-EEPROM.
Alarm Active
An alarm is imminent. Programming S-EEPROM
S-EEPROM is programmed.
Safety Callback
Link was established by safety callback with one of the two Callback Protection Active
callback numbers stored in the modem interface. A safety callback will be made when a login is made at this
station.
Callback
Link was established through a normal callback with the PROM Version
number entered in the B&R-PROgrammingSYStem. The modem's operating system version

[F8 EXIT] or [ESC]

Close the window and return to the menu "Node List".

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-19

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

[F9] + [F2 ONL-ABRL]

The "Disconnect Command List" determines the PLC's behaviour after a link was interrupted. After
calling this function, the user has three options:

1) Hardware RESET and STOP

After the link is disconnected, a hardware reset is carried out in the PLC. The PLC
remains in a halted condition (it behaves as if an on-line cable were attached).

2) Hardware RESET and RUN

After the link is terminated, a hardware reset is carried out in the PLC. However, the
PLC is started again (it behaves as if no on-line cable were attached).

3) Default

The PLC remains in the condition in which it was at the time when the link was
disconnected.

[F1 PROGRAM]

Transfer the settings to the modem interface and store them in the S-EEPROM.

[F8 EXIT] or [ESC]

Exit from the menu without transmitting the command list.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-20

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

5. PROGRAMMING THE S-EEPROM

After pressing [F4 S-EEPROM] in the menu "node list", the menu for the S-EEPROM parameter is
displayed.

Select one of the menu items with the cursor keys [up], [down], [left] and [right]. The function is
called up with the [↵] key.

[F1 PROGRAM]
The S-EEPROM is programmed with the new or altered parameters. Programming the S-EEPROM
takes approx. 10 secs. After pressing [F1 PROGRAM] the following message appears:

W277 S-EEPROM PROGRAMMING ACTIVE (10 SEC) !

After the programming is completed, the following message is displayed:

W278 S-EEPROM PROGRAMMING OK !

[F8 EXIT] or [Esc]

The menu for the S-EEPROM parameters is exited. The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem returns to the
node list.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-21

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

5.1 PASSWORD OPTION

Passwords protect the PLC against unauthorized use. One password can be defined for each of the
user levels in the modem interface's S-EEPROM. Before a user can log into the system and thus
can manipulate the PLC, he has to enter one of the two passwords.

This menu item allows you to alter an existing password or to add a new one. After selecting the
menu item "password option" with the cursor keys [up], [down], [left] and [right] and confirming it
with [↵], a window for entering and altering the passwords is opened:

For each of the two user levels one password with a maximum length of ten characters can be
entered.

Enter/alter password:

The entry is made "blind", i.e. the screen does not show the password entered by the user.

1) Enter new/altered password

2) Confirm entered password (re-enter password)

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-22

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

[F1 PROGRAM]
The S-EEPROM is programmed with the new or altered passwords. The cursor has to be located on
one of the confirmation fields when this function key is activated. If this is not the case, the
following error message is displayed:

E205 PROGRAM PASSWORD ONLY FROM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT !

If another password was entered than in the field "password class x", the B&R-
PROgrammingSYStem issues the following error message:

E203 PASSWORD / ACKNOWLEDGEMENT MISMATCH !

The programming of the S-EEPROM takes approx. 10 secs. Depending on which password was
changed, one of the following messages is issued:

W274 PASSWORD CHANGE FOR LEVEL 1 ACTIVE (10 SEC)!

W275 PASSWORD CHANGE FOR LEVEL 2 ACTIVE (10 SEC)!

After the programming is completed, the following confirming message is displayed:

W276 PASSWORD CHANGED !

[F8 EXIT] or [ESC]

The window for changing/entering passwords is closed. The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem returns to
the S-EEPROM menu.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-23

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

User Levels and their Rights:

Function Level Remarks

RUN 2 -

Hardware Reset 2 -

Disconnect Command List 2 -

Program EEPROM 2 First time switch from PROM to RAM only
allowed after...
... verify Y/N = Y
... or after previous switch from RAM to
PROM
... RUN with EEPROM programming

XFER 2 -
LOAD PLC 2 -

Program S-EEPROM 2 -
1 Call only possible for information purposes
Change Passwords 2 Passwords of both user levels can be changed
1 Only passwords of user level 1 can be
changed
Functions in the Debug Mode
Display memory locations 1/2 -
Change memory locations 2 -
Edit register [F1 REGEDIT] 2 -
Stop program [F4 STOP] 2 -
Continue program [F5 CONT] 1/2 -
Edit breaks [F2 BRKEDIT] 2 -
STL debug mode [F3 STL] 1/2 -
Single steps [F7 S-STEP] 2 -
Trace [SHIFT] + [F7 S-STEP] 2 -
Reset [F6 RESET] 2 -

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-24

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

5.2 CALLBACK PARAMETERS

The PLC can be protected against unauthorized users by means of the safety callback. Two
telephone numbers can be stored in the modem interface's S-EEPROM, which are called back in the
event that a login is attempted. Only users who know one of the two telephone numbers are able to
log into the system.

The parameter for the safety callback can be entered or altered in this menu item. After selecting
the menu item "callback parameter" with the cursor keys [up], [down], [left] and [right] and the
respective confirmation with [↵], a window is opened for entering or altering the parameters.

[ESC]
Closes the window and returns to the menu "S-EEPROM Parameters".

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-25

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

Select and alter any one of the parameters with the cursor keys [up] or [down].

1/2) Safety callback number 1/2

Enter any international telephone number (max. 30 characters) (control characters
are allowed; see section 3 "Dialing directory"). The modem interface tries to
establish a link with one of the two stored numbers in the event of a safety callback.

3) Number of redial attempts:

Enter the number of attempts the modem will make for calling one of the two
numbers. If after the preselected number of attempts no link is established, the
modem returns to its standy mode.

4) Number of LOGIN attempts:

After the set number of login attempts the response entered under item 5) is
initiated.

5) Action LOGIN failure:

Two possible responses can be set:

* Safety callback
* Termination of the link

6) Time for online-on after reset:

The on-line link to the PLC is maintained for the set period after a reset, so that the
PLC is allowed to start up properly. During this period it is not possible to ...
... scan alarms
... establish an on-line link.

7) Pause after failed callback:

If a callback fails, the set time has to pass before a new call back is made.

8) Pause after disconnect:

After a link is terminated, the set time has to pass before a callback is carried out
("settling period" for the respective device).

9) Pause for DSR drop after disconnect:

Within the set period the modem interface waits for the interruption of the link to
become effective (acknowledgement from the modem: link is terminated).

10) Wait for connect:

The modem interface waits for the establishment of a link after a dial request. If
within the set period a link is not established, the callback is deemed as having
failed.

11) Wait for disconnect:

This waiting time is superior to the one defined under item 8). Before a callback can
take place, the current link must be interrupted. If this does not take place within the
set period, the callback is not carried out.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-26

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

5.3 ALARM OPTION

The modem interface is able to scan a dual-port RAM area with various alarm parameters via the
on-line link to the attached PLC. The PLC can deposit alarm messages in this area, which are then
sent by the modem interface via modem to the remote station that is called through one of the two
alarm callback numbers.

Practical example: A system with several PLC stations sends messages and alarms via the
modem interface to a master station, which logs these messages and, if
necessary, initiates certain reactions to them.

This menu item allows you to enter and alter the parameters for handling an alarm . After selecting
the menu item "alarm handling" with the cursor keys [up], [down], [left] and [right] keys and
confirming it with [↵], a window is opened for entering and altering the parameters:

[ESC]
Closes the window and returns to the menu "S-EEPROM parameters".

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-27

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

Select and alter any one of the parameters with the cursor keys [up] or [down].

1) Type of CPU:
Enter the type of CPU (CP40/CP80) to which the modem interface is connected.

2/3) Alarm callback number 1/2:

Enter any international telephone number (with a maximum of 30 characters)
(control characters are allowed; see chapter "3. Dialing directory").

4) Time base alarm scanning / slaves:

Scanning interval within which the bus master (node number 0) scans the slaves
(node numbers 1 to F) for imminent alarms.
Caution: If this time is changed, it also has to be changed in all slaves with alarm
scanning.

5) Time base alarm scanning / online:

Scanning interval within which the PLC, which is connected via an on-line link with
the modem interface, is scanned. If time "0" is entered, the alarm scan is
deactivated.

6) Alarm address in PLC:

This alarm address is scanned in defined intervals. This address is the base address
of the alarm parameter block in the PLC. If no alarm address is entered, the
alarm scan is deactivated.

7) Log book address in PLC:

Coupling address: The set memory area of the PLC contains the coupling
parameters for the data transfer between the two PLCs (transmission takes place
via the modem interface's RS485 or RS232).
Log-book address: This address determines the beginning of the memory area in
the PLC that contains a brief protocol (log-book) on the modem interface's last
action. For example, the following results are entered into the log-book:

Establishment of link recognized. Login attempt invalid.

Rejection of unauthorized command. Login has occurred.
Safety callback was activated. Alarm callback was initiated.

If no coupling/log-book address is entered, the log-book function is deactivated.

Caution: The address areas of 6) and 7) must not overlap!

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-28

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

8) Alarm text for PLC error:

Message with max. 10 characters that is sent in the event of an on-line PLC error.

9) Alarm parameters:
Send parameters for alarm string of item 8). The parameters 10) to 16) are only used
if there is a malfunction in the PLC or a defective on-line link to the PLC.
Otherwise, the alarm parameters defined in the PLC are used (see 6.1 Alarm
parameters).

10) Wait for transmission after CONNECT:

Delay period before sending the alarm signal after establishing the link. If
during this period valid data are received, the send process is blocked. If the
link is terminated within this time, a renewed dial attempt is made. If
a link already exists, the alarm string is sent within at least one
second without a previous dial attempt.

11) Transmit alarm text as frame:

The alarm string is sent "protected" (MININET protocol).

12) External acknowledgement required:

The modem interface expects the remote station's acknowledgement of the
alarm string. This item can only be selected with [Y] if item 11 is activated.

13) Slave node transmits via own RS232:

In the event of an alarm, the slave is able to transmit independently through
its own RS232 interface:

14) Time for disconnect / acknowledge:

Depending on the selection made in item 11), this time has the following
meanings:
* Item 11 not active: Waiting time after sending the alarm string
before the link is terminated.
* Item 11 active: Waiting time until alarm string was
acknowledged. If the alarm string is not
acknowledged within the set period, an error
message is sent to the CPU.

15) Number of redial attempts during establishment of the link.

16) Pause between calls:

Waiting time before a renewed dial attempt is made after the failure to
establish a link.

17) Alarm after Power On:

An alarm is issued after a power on in the PLC.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-29

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

5.4 MODEM PARAMETER

In this menu you can enter or alter the parameters for the modem that is connected to the modem
interface. After selecting the menu item "modem parameter" with the cursor keys [up], [down],
[left] and [right] and confirming it with [↵], a window is opened for entering and altering the
parameters:

[ESC]
Closes the window and returns to the menu "S-EEPROM parameters".

Select and alter one of the 11 parameters with [up] or [down]:

1) Type of modem:
Set the type of modem: C CCITT
H Hayes-AT

2) Connect if DTR=ON / disconnect if DTR=OFF:

Link is established by DTR=ON and terminated by DTR=OFF.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-30

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

3) Auto baud rate detect:

The baud rate is gained from the CONNECT message (see item 2.2.3 - Messages).

4) Baud rate:
If the [↵] key is pressed when the cursor is placed on this field, the following baud
rates can be selected with the cursors keys [up] or [down]:

5) Number of rings:
If the modem is called, the <number> of rings is waited until the modem goes off
hook to establish the link.

6) Timeout reset - RING indicator:

If within the stated period the desired rings are not recognized, the ring counter is
reset to zero and the modem returns to the standby mode.

7) Wait after power on:

Waiting time before the modem is initialized after the PLC is switched on.

8) Wait after disconnect ACK from modem:

After a request for a disconnect, the modem interface waits the period set until the
link is terminated (message from the modem: disconnect).

9) Wait for command ACK from modem:

After a general command to the modem, the modem interface waits for the
acknowledgement of the command from the modem within the period set.

10) Escape timeout for modem:

This concerns a time within which nothing must be sent to the modem before or
after sending the escape sequence (+++).

11) LOFOUT timeout:

Carrier loss time without causing a logoff. If the data carrier between the two
modem exceeds the set time, the link is disconnected. It is assumed that the link was
terminated externally (i.e. from the remote station).

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-31

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

5.5 INTERNAL TIMEOUT

Select and alter the internal timeout parameters for the modem interface. After selecting the menu
item "internal timeout" with the cursor keys [up], [down], [left] and [right] and confirming it with
[↵], a window is opened for entering and altering the parameters:

[ESC] Closes the window and returns to the menu "S-EEPROM parameters".

Select and alter one of the 3 parameters with the cursor keys [up] or [down]:

1) Inactivity timeout for LOGOUT (RS232):

If no valid data are received during the set period, the link is disconnected. This
time is to be adjusted to the modem's inactivity timeout, if activated. If time "0" is
entered, the timeout is deactivated.

2) Inactivity timeout for LOGOUT (RS485):

If no valid data are received during the set period, the link to the master is
disconnected. If time "0" is entered, the timeout is deactivated.

3) Timeout task synchronization at LOGOUT :

After the time has passed, a limited logoff is carried out:
* Termination of the on-line and modem link
* Software reset of the modem interface

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-32

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

5.6 BUSMASTER TIMEOUT

This item allows you to enter or alter the timeout parameters of the busmaster (node number 0).
These parameters influence the data transmission through the RS485 (MININET). After selecting
the menu item "busmaster timeout" with the cursor keys [up], [down], [left] and [right] and
confirming it with [↵], a window is opened for entering and altering the parameters:

[ESC] Closes the windows and returns to the menu "S-EEPROM parameters".

Select and alter one of the 7 parameters with the cursor keys [up] or [down]:

1) Number of retries for frame transmit:

Number of attempts by the busmaster for sending a frame to a slave. If the
transmission is not successful within the set number, the busmaster invokes a bus
error.

2) Delay time for second request of RS485 master response:

The master's scan period for the query whether the slave has processed (completed)
the current command frame. This time can be defined for each of the four
logical input/ output channels.

3) Buffer-0:
4) Buffer-1:
5) Buffer-2:
6) System:

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-33

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

7) Baud rate:
If the [↵] key is pressed when the cursor is placed on this field, the following baud
rates can be selected with the cursors keys [up] or [down]:

When pressing...

... [↵] the respective baud rate is selected and confirmed.

... [F8 EXIT] or [ESC] the window for selecting the baud rate is exited
without accepting the selected value.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-34

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

6. STANDBY OPERATION
Command: STANDBY [↵]

Function: Call up the standby menu:

The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem opens a window in which the current file name is shown. Any
incoming alarms are stored in this file. The file name can be changed. If no file name is entered (or
the current file name is deleted), the incoming alarms are not stored in a file.

Default file name: ALARME.X1

The file name can be entered with path name and drive. If the path name is not entered, the file is
automatically stored in the directory in which the B&R-PROgrammingSYStem was installed
(usually: C:\PG).

The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem automatically initializes the modem in accordance with the

settings made in the menu "modem settings".

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-35

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

The following functions are offered in the softkey line:

[F1 STANDBY]
Activate the actual standby mode. The window for entering a file name is closed and the window
"last message" is opened. This window shows the last message from the modem to the B&R-
PROgrammingSYStem. The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem then waits for the following events:

* Message from the modem: connect message, i.e. the link was established successfully.
* Termination of the standby mode by pressing [F8 EXIT] or [ESC].

If a link was established (B&R-PROgrammingSYStem receives a connect message from the

modem), the type of call is determined. The following options are possible:

* Alarm callback
* Safety callback
* Normal callback
* Call cannot be identified

[F8 EXIT] or [ESC]

The standby mode is terminated. The first standby menu appears, in which the file name can be
altered.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-36

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

6.1 RESPONSE TO ESTABLISHMENT OF LINK

The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem determines the type of the call and responds pertinently:

Alarm callback
1) The alarm string is displayed on the screen and, if desired, written to an alarm file.

2) If the acknowledgement of the alarm is required, it is carried out. The necessity of an

acknowledgement is defined by the user in the alarm parameters (see "5.3 Alarm
handling" and "6.1 Alarm parameters).

Safety callback
1) If at the same time an alarm is imminent, it is treated like an alarm callback.

2) B&R-PROgrammingSYStem switches to the node list.

Normal callback
1) If at the same time an alarm is imminent, it is treated like an alarm callback.

2) B&R-PROgrammingSYStem switches to the node list.

Call cannot be identified

1) The link is disconnected.

2) An error message is issued.

3) The B&R-PROgrammingSYStem remains in the standby mode.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-37

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

6.2 STANDBY AFTER INITIATING A CALLBACK

After initiating a normal or safety callback from the node list, the B&R-PROgrammingSYStem
automatically switches to the standby mode. However, note has to be taken of the following:

1) The alarm file's name cannot be changed.

2) The modem is not initialized, as this was already done in the previous dialing process.

After the callback was received, the standby mode is exited and the program switches to the menu
station overview.

Remark:

For the operation in the standby mode the modem connected to the PC must be set to the
auto answering mode, i.e. the modem must go off-hook automatically. For example, this
can be deterined within the modem initialization settings (modem configuration). The
command for setting this mode is described in your modem's manual.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-38

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

7. EXCHANGING DATA WITH THE PLC

Two addresses of registers can be defined in the S-EEPROM, which constitute the base address of a
memory area reserved by the PLC:

1) Alarm parameter block

2) Dual-port RAM

Remark: The memory areas for the dual-port RAM and the alarm parameter must
not overlap!

7.1 ALARM PARAMETERS

The base address Rxxxx for the memory area in which the alarm parameters are stored is defined in
the menu alarm handling (6th alarm address in PLC) and saved to the modem interface's S-
EEPROM. The modem interface scans this address within certain intervals and invokes an alarm in
the event of an alarm callback.

The PLC sends alarm to the modem interface

The PLC informs the modem interface of an alarm message
through bit 0:

xxxxxxx0 no alarm
xxxxxxx1 alarm
Rxxxx + 0 x x x x x x x d0

If the PLC intends to send an alarm to the modem interface, it first has to set bit 0 from Rxxxx + 1
to logical 0, as the modem interface will otherwise not recognize the alarm message.

The modem interface acknowledges the alarm message

The modem interface returns an acknowledgement to the PLC:

0xxxxxx1 Acknowledgement without error message

1xxxxxx1 Acknowledgement with error message
Rxxxx + 1 d7 x x x x x x d0

Possible errors: - Alarm call was unsuccessfully terminated / Establishment of link not possible
- Alarm was not confirmed by remote station
- Link was terminated during the transmission of the alarm string

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-39

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

Alarm parameters
Slave node transmits via own RS232:
0xxxxxxx Yes
1xxxxxxx No (sends via RS485 to busmaster)

Transmit alarm text as frame:

x0xxxxxx No
x1xxxxxx Yes (MININET protocol)

External acknowledge required (only possible if the

alarm string was sent as frame):
xx0xxxxx No
xx1xxxxx Yes (the modem interface expects the
acknowledgement from the remote station
and issues an error to the PLC if it is not
made)

Wait for transmission after CONNECT (x x 10 secs.): Delay

before sending the alarm string after establishing the link. If
during this period valid data are received, the sending process
is blocked. If the link is terminated within this time, a
renewed dialing attempt is made.
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0
Rxxxx + 2

Time for disconnect / acknowledge:

(x x 1 sec.): Waiting time after sending the alarm string before
the link is disconnected (bit 5 of Rxxxx + 2 = 0). Waiting time
for acknowledgement of the alarm string. The modem
interface reports errors to the PLC if the
acknowledgement is not made within the
predefined timed7frame
d6 (bit
d5 5 d4
of Rxxxx
d3 d2+ 2d1= 1).
d0

Rxxxx + 3

Number of redials when establishing the link.

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 Time before redial after a failed alarm callback (x x 10 secs)

Rxxxx + 4

These three registers contain the alarm parameters. These parameters must be defined by the user
within the PLC program (see "5.3 Alarm handling").

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-40

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

Alarm message string

Rxxxx + 5 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 Address of the alarm message string MSB

Rxxxx + 6 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 Address of the alarm message string LSB

Rxxxx + 7 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 Length of the alarm message string (max. 80 characters)

In these three registers the PLC hands over the address and the length of the alarm message string.
Hence, the PLC is able to supply a certain text to the modem interface according to the respective
alarm. The modem interface, on the other hand, can send this message to a remote station via an
established link (alarm callback).

7.2 LOG BOOK / DUAL-PORT RAM

The base address Rxxxx for the memory area of the dual-port RAM is defined in the menu alarm
handling (7th log book address in PLC) and saved to the S-EEPROM of the modem interface.

The first register contains the command:

Command:
xxxxx00 No command/Acknowledgement from PLC
xxxxx01 Load through dual-port RAM
xxxxx10 Send through dual-port RAM
xxxxx11 Log book function
x x x x x x d1 d0
Rxxxx + 0

7.2.1 Log book

The modem interface makes a log book entry into a ring buffer with 16 entries when special events
occur. This ring buffer is transmitted to the PLC's coupling area (coupling/log book address)
depending on on-line traffic (link between modem interface and the PLC). As the log book is
realized as a ring buffer, the oldest entries are lost in the event of an overflow. Hence, only the 16
latest entries are retained.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-41

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

Log book command

xxxxxx11 The modem interface writes this log book
command into the PLC as soon as it has
saved a complete entry to the dual-port
RAM area, i.e. the entries from memory
locations Rxxxx + 3 are now valid.
xxxxxx00 The PLC overwrites the log book command
with this value after the log book
entry was evaluated. The
acknowledgement informs the modem
interface that the dual-port RAM area
can be written into again. The PLC should
react to this log book entry within 500 ms,
otherwise an error is generated by the modem
interface. x x x x x x 1 1

Rxxxx + 0

Source-/Destination address
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0

Rxxxx+1 not used

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0

Rxxxx+2 not used

Logbook entry
d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0

Rxxxx + 3 length of log book entry incl. type

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0

Rxxxx + 4 type of entry

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0

Rxxxx + 5 d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 logbook entry

d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-42

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

The log book entry consists of the three parts length, type and entry.

Type Description Interface Data Length

1 Establishment of link recognized - - 1

2 Login attempt invalid RS232 RS232 6
Login attempt invalid RS485 RS485 6
3 Command rejected as unauthorized RS232 RS232 6
Command rejected as unauthorized RS485 RS485 6
4 LOGIN has occurred, user level 1 RS232 RS232 1 8
LOGIN has occurred, user level 2 RS232 RS232 2 8
LOGIN has occurred, user level 1 RS485 RS485 1 8
LOGIN has occurred, user level 2 RS485 RS485 2 8
5 Safety callback invoked with <tel. no.> - <tel. no.> 16
6 Normal callback invoked with <tel. no.> - <tel. no.> 16
7 Alarm callback invoked with <tel. no.> - <tel. no.> 16
8 Disconnect through internal event - - 1
9 Disconnect through missing data carrier - - 1
10 Disconnect because of inactivity timeout - - 1

Data format of the telephone numbers <tel. no.>

The telephone numbers and the control characters contained in the dial string are compressed. The
length of the dial string is limited to max. 15 characters (30 nibbels).

Character Coding Number of Nibbels

Characters from "0" to "9" $0 to $9 1

ASCII characters from $20 to $7F $80 + $xx 2
Control characters from $00 to $1F $B00 + $Bxx 3
String end character as $FF $FF 2

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-43

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

Example: Normal callback from an extension (get main line with 0 and wait for dial tone);
tone dial the number 09989 7602 521 with an AT modem and pause between area
code, number and extension.

Control character: Function:

(Hayes, AT instr. set)

T Control character for tone dial

W Control character for waiting for the dial tone
' Control character for pause

Tone dial
Get main line
Wait for dial tone
Area code
Pause
Number
Pause
Extension

Dial string: T0W09989,7602,521

Nibbel
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
The dial string is coded as follows: Contents
D 4 0 D 7 0 9 9 8 9 A C 7 6 0 2 A C 5 2 1 F F F F F F F F F

T ➱ ASCII-value $54 + $80 = $D4 ➱ D4 ➱

0 ➱ number 0 = $0 ➱ 0 ➱
W ➱ ASCII-value $57 + $80 = $D7 ➱ D7 ➱
0 ➱ number 0 = $0 ➱ 0 ➱
9 ➱ number 9 = $9 ➱ 9 ➱
9 ➱ number 9 = $9 ➱ 9 ➱
8 ➱ number 8 = $8 ➱ 8 ➱
9 ➱ number 9 = $9 ➱ 9 ➱
, ➱ ASCII-value $2C + $80 = $AC ➱ AC ➱
7 ➱ number 7 = $7 ➱ 7 ➱
6 ➱ number 6 = $6 ➱ 6 ➱
0 ➱ number 0 = $0 ➱ 0 ➱
2 ➱ number 2 = $2 ➱ 2 ➱
, ➱ ASCII-value $2C + $80 = $AC ➱ AC ➱
5 ➱ number 5 = $5 ➱ 5 ➱
2 ➱ number 2 = $2 ➱ 2 ➱
1 ➱ number 1 = $1 ➱ 1 ➱
end of string = $FF 1) ➱ FF ➱
The remainder of the 30 nibbels ➱
is filled with $Fs.

1) If the length of the coded telephone number is precisely 15 bytes (= 30 nibbles) no end-of-string character
($FF) is added.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-44

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

The log book entry in the PLC would look like this:

Rxxxx + 0 $03 Log book command

Rxxxx + 1 $xx Not used
Rxxxx + 2 $xx Not used
Rxxxx + 3 $10 Length of the entry incl. type = 16
Rxxxx + 4 $06 Type: Normal callback invoked with the following number.
Rxxxx + 5 $D4
Rxxxx + 6 $0D
Rxxxx + 7 $70
Rxxxx + 8 $99
Rxxxx + 9 $89
Rxxxx + 10 $AC
Rxxxx + 11 $76 Coded telephone number
Rxxxx + 12 $02
Rxxxx + 13 $AC
Rxxxx + 14 $52
Rxxxx + 15 $1F
Rxxxx + 16 $FF
Rxxxx + 17 $FF
Rxxxx + 18 $FF
Rxxxx + 19 $FF

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-45

 Section 11 ONLINE-PROGRAMMING VIA MODEM

7.2.2 DUAL-PORT RAM

It is possible to exchange blocks of data of up to 248 bytes between the PLC and the modem
interface in the same memory area in which the log book entries are stored. In this case the modem
interface is superior to the PLC. The modem interface can carry out the following two functions:

Load via dual-port RAM: The modem interface can require the PLC to save a certain memory
area (source address) of the PLC to the dual-port RAM. The
modem interface independently collects these data after the
acknowledgement by the PLC and can ....

.... send these via the RS232 (via modem or directly) to a PC.
.... send these via the RS485 to the busmaster.

Send via dual-port RAM: The modem interface can save data received via the RS485 or RS232
to the PLC's dual-port RAM and inform the PLC about the
destination address of these data.

These two functions allow an "error-protected" exchange of data with the PLC. A superior system
(PC, MAESTRO,...) can request data from an PLC and send these to an other one. This exchange of
data can be protected by safety callback.

Remark:

As the modem accesses the PLC's dual-port RAM through the normal debug mode
functions (this takes place every 10 msecs in one of the PLC's timer interrupt routines),
there is an effective baud rate of 200 baud.

Standard software for controlling this function is currently in preparation.

B&R-PROgrammingSYStem Users Manual 11-46

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

CHAPTER 12
ONLINE INTERFACES - HARDWARE

Contents: 1. General Information 12-3

2. Centronics ONLINE Interface 12-5
2.1. Model numbers - Descriptions 12-5
2.2. Technical data 12-5
2.3. Connection to PC and PLC 12-6
3. B&R ONLINE Interface 12-7
3.1. Model numbers - Descriptions 12-7
4. MODEM Online Interface 12-9
4.1. Model numbers - Descriptions 12-9
4.2. General Information 12-9
4.4. Interfaces 12-10
4.3. Grounding 12-10
4.5. Modes of operation 12-12
4.6. Node-Number Switch 12-14
4.7. Status LED 12-14
4.8. Wiring example 12-15
5. Accessories 12-17
5.1. Cable 12-17
5.2. ONLINE Adapter 12-20
5.3. FOL Adapter 12-21
5.3.1. Model number - Description 12-21
5.3.2. Technical data 12-21
5.3.3. General Information 12-21
5.3.4. Connection 12-22
5.4. Power supply 12-24

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-1

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-2

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

1. GENERAL INFORMATION
In order to be able to communicate with the programming device, all CPUs are equipped with an
ONLINE interface. There are various possibilities for the establishment of an ONLINE connection
between the programming device and the PLC:

• Via a CENTRONICS ONLINE interface to the parallel interface of the PC.

• Via a B&R ONLINE interface built into the PC.

• Via a Modem connected to the serial interface COM1 on the PC,

or directly via the COM1 to a Modem Online Interface.

Note:
In this chapter the abbreviation "PD" will be used in place of the term PROGRAM-
MING DEVICE.

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-3

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-4

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

2. CENTRONICS ONLINE INTERFACE

2.1. MODEL NUMBERS - DESCRIPTIONS

Centronics ONLINE Interface for ONLINE operation with a PLC

via the parallel interface of the PC (incl. cable to the PLC BRKAOL-0) BRKAOL5-1

2.2. TECHNICAL DATA

Description CENTRONICS ONLINE interface

Model number BRKAOL5-1

Voltage supply via the parallel interface of the PC

or external supply with 8 - 30 VDC / max. 250 mA

Interfaces CENTRONICS parallel interface to the PC

PD interface to the PLC

LED indication of external supply

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-5

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

2.3. CONNECTION TO PC AND PLC

The CENTRONICS ONLINE interface is connected to the parallel interface of the PC.

Note: The CENTRONICS ONLINE Interface may only be connected/disconnected

when the PC is off.

If the CENTRONICS ONLINE interface is used together with battery supplied Laptops
(e.g.: Toshiba T1200, T1600, T3100SX), the interface has to be supplied externally (e.g.: B&R
power supply BRPS220904-0).
LED indicates, whether an external
voltage supply is connected.
connector for the external voltage supply.

to the parallel interface of

the PC.

The CENTRONICS ONLINE interface is connected with the PD interface of the PLC (labelled PG)
by means of the ONLINE cable BRKAOL5-1:

Note: When the PC is switched on/off, the CENTRONICS ONLINE interface must
be disconnected from the PLC.

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-6

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

3. B&R ONLINE INTERFACE

3.1. MODEL NUMBERS - DESCRIPTIONS

B&R ONLINE Interface with two ONLINE interfaces...

...for PCs with AT-compatible slots (e.g.:Toshiba T3200) BRIFPC-0
...for Toshiba T 3100e, T 5100 BRIFTO-0
...for battery supplied Laptop Computers
Toshiba T 1200 BRIFTO-1
Toshiba T 1600, T 3100SX BRIFTO-2
...for COMPAQ Portable III BRIFCO-0

ONLINE cable for BRIFPC-0 and BRIFTO-x, PD - PLC, 2,5 m BRKAOL-0

ONLINE cable for BRIFCO-0, PD - PLC, 2,5 m BRKAOL-2

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-7

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-8

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

4. MODEM ONLINE INTERFACE

4.1. MODEL NUMBERS - DESCRIPTIONS

User program memory module with Modem interface, for the connection of CCITT- or
HAYES-Modems serial RS232 interface, serial RS485 interface, online interface, node-
number switch and status-LED
RAM/EEPROM module for CPU/PP modules equipped with a 6303-Processor (CP30, ECEE32MP-0
CP31, CP40, CP41, NTCP3# and PP40), 16 KB RAM, 16 KB EEPROM

Flash PROM module for CPU/PP modules equipped with a 6809-Processor (CP60, CP80, ECFP128MP-0
NTCP6#, PP60), Flash PROM memory for 42 KB of application program and 52 KB of
application data memory

4.2. GENERAL INFORMATION

The network-suited user program memory module equipped with a Modem interface (hereinafter
referred to as "Modem interface") is used for the remote diagnostic analysis of PLC. processors
(CPUs or parallel processors) by means of the B&R PROgramming SYStem. It permits the online
programming of up to 16 PLC. processors (CPUs or parallel processors), which are connected by
means of a RS485 two-wire network.

Instead of an user program memory module (EE32, EP128, FP128, ...), the module is plugged into
the processor module. The processor also supplies the modem interface with the required voltage.

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-9

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

4.3. GROUNDING
On the bottom of the module the Modem interface is provided with a flat mounting clip. During
operation, this mounting clip has to be connected with the grounding terminal strip by using a very
short wire (at least 0.75 mm2 cross section). In the case of MULTICONTROL, MIDICONTROL
and M264 systems the grounding connection is attached to the bottom mounting screw of the
processor module. In the case of MINICONTROL systems the grounding connection is attached to
the ground terminal of the power supply module.

Ground connection
is made to the
bottom mounting
MEMORY screw

4.4. INTERFACES
The Modem interface is equipped with three serial interfaces. The pin configuration of the RS485
and RS232 interfaces is imprinted on the left side of the housing of the Modem interface:

Connection to the
Online interface

RS485 interface serving

as a connection to
further processor modules

RS232 interface
to the Modem or
programming device

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-10

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

CONNECTION TO THE ONLINE INTERFACE

The 9-pin DSHELL connector is connected with the Online interface of the
processor module (CPU or PP). For this purpose, one of the following
Online cables can be used:

BRKAOL-0 3 m length
BRKAOL-3 0.3 m length

RS485 INTERFACE AS A CONNECTION TO FURTHER PROCESSOR MODULES

By means of the electrically isolated RS485 interface, up to 16 processor modules (CPUs or PPs)
can be connected in a two-wire network. The desired processor module can be selected via a
selection function in the B&R PROgramming SYStem.

RS485
Connection Function
1 DATA
2 DATA
3 GND
4 DATA
5 DATA

The upper or lower DATA/DATA connections can be used alternatively. The ground (GND) need
not be connected. For the network, a two-wire line may be sufficient. If a shielded cable is used,
the cable shield is to be connected to the ground (GND) at both ends.

RS232 INTERFACE TO THE MODEM OR TO THE PROGRAMMING DEVICE

The programming device (PC, COM1) or a Modem can alternatively be connected to the RS232
interface.

Pin Function

1 GND
5 2 DTR
9
3 TXD
4 RXD
5
6
1 6
7 DSR
8
9 CTS

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-11

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

4.5. MODES OF OPERATION

Two modes of operation need to be distinguished:
a) Operation without Modem
b) Operation with Modem

a) OPERATION WITHOUT MODEM

In the case of an operation without Modem, the Modem interface of a PLC. Processor is connected
to the serial interface (COM1) of the programming device by means of a RS232 connection. Via a
RS485 network, up to 15 other PLC. processors can be connected to the first Modem interface.
Diagram:

PLC with
Modem-Interface
RS485-NETWORK
max. 1200 m

PLC with Programming

Modem-Interface PLC with RS232 device
Modem-Interface (PC)

max. 10 m
max. 16 PLC Processors
in an RS485-Network

PLC with
Modem-Interface

The operation without Modem may be advantageous, if several PLCs, which are locally separated
way and/or difficult to access, should be programmed from a central programming device.

CONNECTING CABLE MODEM INTERFACE ↔ PROGRAMMING DEVICE (PC, COM1)

1 5
GND GND

3 2
TXD RXD

4 3
RXD TXD

2
DTR

7
DSR

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-12

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

b) OPERATION WITH MODEM

This mode of operation is used for the remote diagnostic analysis via telephone and Modem. The
programming device at place A is connected to the first Modem, and the second Modem at place B
to the Modem interface in the processor module.

Diagram:
PLC with
Modem-Interface

RS485-NETWORK
max. 1200 m
PLC with
Modem-Interface PLC with Programming
RS232 RS232 device
Modem-Interface Modem Modem
(PC)

max. 10 m max. 10 m
max. 16 PLC Processors
in an RS485-Network

PLC with
Modem-Interface

Site B Site A

CONNECTING CABLE MODEM INTERFACE ↔ MODEM

CCITT-Description
1 7
GND 102 Signal ground

2 20
DTR 108 Data terminal ready

3 2
TXD 103 Transmitted data

4 3
RXD 104 Recieved data

7 8
DSR 109 Recieved line signal detector

9 6
CTS 107 Data set ready

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-13

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

4.6. NODE NUMBER SWITCH

On the top of the Modem interface there is a 16 position switch. The node number of the PLC.
processor can be selected by means of this switch. All PLC. processors must have different node
numbers. Node number 0 must be assigned to the Modem interface, which is connected to the PC
or to the Modem.

3 4 56
Node number switch
012

789A
EF

BCD

4.7. STATUS LED

On the top of the Modem interface there is a status LED: Various blinking sequences indicate
certain operating states of the PLC. processor (further details can be found in: Hardware manual,
section 4, subsection "Status-LED").

In the case of CPUs or PPs equipped with a 6303 processor (CP30, CP31, CP40, CP41, NTCP3#,
PP40), the status LED is green. In the case of CPUs or PPs with a 6809 processor (CP60, CP80,
NTCP6#, PP60), the status LED is red.

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-14

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

4.8. WIRING EXAMPLE

C 000

Two-wire line to other

PLC processors

Online connection

Connection to the programming

device or Modem
MEMORY

Grounding connection

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-15

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-16

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

5. ACCESSORIES

5.1. CABLE

ONLINE cable for BRIFPC-0 and BRIFTO-x, PD - PLC, 2.5 m BRKAOL-0

ONLINE cable for Modem interface - PLC, 0.3 m BRKAOL-3

Dual Port ONLINE cable for BRIFCO-0, PD - PLC, 2.5 m BRKAOL-2

FOL ONLINE cable, 4 m BRKAOL3-0

FOL ONLINE cable, 50 m BRKAOL3-1

5.1.1. ONLINE cable Programming device - control

Model number: BRKAOL-0 or BRKAOL-3

Programming device: Control:

• B&R ONLINE interface • PD interface
(BRIFPC-0, BRIFTO-x)
• CENTRONICS ONLINE interface
• Modem ONLINE interface

RXD 1 ← 1 TXD

TXD RET 3 ← 3 RXD RET
Reset RET (GND) 4  4 Reset RET (GND)
RXD RET 6 → 6 TXD RET
TXD 7 → 7 RXD
Reset 8  8 Reset

ONLINE interface PD interface of the PLC

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-17

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

5.1.2. ONLINE cable COMPAQ Portable III - control

Model number: BRKAOL2-0

Programming device: Control:

• B&R ONLINE interface (BRIFCO-0) • PD interface

RXD 14 ← 1 TXD

TXD RET 15 ← 3 RXD RET
Reset RET (GND) 16  4 Reset RET (GND) PD interface
ONLINE 1 RXD RET 17 → 6 TXD RET of the PLC
TXD 18 → 7 RXD
Reset 19  8 Reset

RXD 14 ← 1 TXD

TXD RET 15 ← 3 RXD RET
ONLINE 2 Reset RET (GND) 16  4 Reset RET (GND) PD interface
RXD RET 17 → 6 TXD RET of the PLC.
TXD 18 → 7 RXD
Reset 19  8 Reset

COMPAQ interface

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-18

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

5.1.3. FOL Cable FOL Adapter - FOL Adapter

CP80 - FOL Adapter
Model number: BRKAOL3-0, BRKAOL3-1

Programming device: Control:

• FOL Adapter • FOL Adapter
• FOL interface of theCP80

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-19

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

5.2. ONLINE ADAPTER

ONLINE Adapter for PP## or NTCP6# ECPAD1-0

PD interface
connected directly
to PP or NTCP6#

PD/IF interface PD/IF interface

of a parallel processor connected directly
or a NTCP6# to PP or NTCP6#

1
PD
3
4
6
7
8

PD/IF * 1 1 PD/IF
* 2 2
* 3 3
The configura- * 4 4
tion (*) of the user * 5 5
interface IF can be * 6 6
taken from the * 7 7
* 8 8
description of the * 9 9
PP## and the * 10 10
NTCP6#. * 11 11
* 12 12
* 13 13
Reset RET (GND) 14 14
RXD RET 15 15
TXD RET 16 16
Reset 17 17
RXD 18 18
TXD 19 19
* 20 20
* 21 21
* 22 22
* 23 23
* 24 24
* 25 25

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-20

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

5.3. FOL ADAPTER

5.3.1. Model number - Description

PD ONLINE FOL Adapter, BRADFOL-0

with connection cable for external power supply

5.3.2. Technical data

Description PLC. Online FOL Adapter

Model number BRADFOL-0

Voltage supply via the PD interface of the PLC or PC,

or external supply with 8 - 30 VDC / max. 250 mA

Interfaces PD interface to the PLC or to the PC

FOL connection

5.3.3. General information

The adapter can be used for the ONLINE connection via FOL. Due to the electrical isolation,
electrical or magnetic interferences are eliminated

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-21

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

5.3.4. Connection

Schematic structure:

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-22

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

The 9-pin DSHELL connector is connected to the PD interface of the PC or the PLC:

Depending on the fact whether the adapter is connected to the ONLINE interface of a PC or to the
PLC, the switch located on the adapter must be in the right position:

protection cap of
the FOL interface

Adapter adjusted for Adapter adjusted for

operation on the PLC operation on a PC.

In order to be able to connect the FOL cable to the FOL interface (FOL = Fibre Optic Link), the
protection cap has to be removed first.

External supply
By using the connection cable, which is included in the scope of delivery, the FOL adapter can be
supplied with an external voltage (in most cases an industrial voltage of 24 VDC). In addition,
B&R offers the power supply BRPS220904-0.

Online Interface external supply necessary

BRIFPC-0 NO
BRIFTO-0 NO
BRIFTO-1 YES
BRIFTO-2 YES
BRIFCO-0 YES
BRKAOL5-1 YES

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-23

 Chapter 12 ONLINE INTERFACES

5.4. POWER SUPPLY

Description 9V Power supply

Model number BRPS220904-0

Primary 220VAC / 50Hz

Secondary 9VDC / 400mA

Wattage 3,6W

B&R PROgramming SYStem User's Manual 12-24

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

APPENDIX A
SUMMARY - OPERATING COMMANDS

Contents: General Information A-3

PROgramming SYStem Operating Commands A-4

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-1

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-2

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

GENERAL INFORMATION
The following explanations give an overview of the operating commands of the PROgramming
SYStem:

<NAME>
<TBL_NAME> 4 character long name, the first character must be a letter.
<LAD_NAME>

<FNAME> file name with a maximum length of 8 characters without extension

<[Link]> file name with a maximum length of 8 characters with extension

<range> a range must be defined for block operations (e.g.: COPY, MOVE, ...):

FROM<LINE/LAB/ADDR> TO<LINE/LAB/ADDR> The range starts at FROM

<...> and ends at
TO<...>.
FROM<LINE/LAB/ADDR> DISP<NR> The range starts at FROM
<...> and includes
DISP <...> lines.
TO<LINE/LAB/ADDR> The range starts at the current
cursor position and ends at
TO<...>.
DISP<NR> The range starts at the current
cursor position and includes
DISP<...> lines.

<destination> defines range where to copy or move to.

↵]
[↵ the destination is indicated by the cursor.
↵]
TO <LINE/LAB/ADDR> [↵ The destination is indicated by the defined files
(TO<...>).

Extension <File type> Level

<File type> Defines the extension of the file name (<FNAME>)
A B C
*.PRG PROG ● ● ●
*.SYM SYM ● ● ●
*.TAB TAB ● ● ●
*.LAD LAD ● ● ●
*.MSY MACRO SYM ● ● ●
*.MTA MACRO TAB ● ●
*.MSL MACRO STL ●
*.ASY ASCII KTZ ●
*.ATA ASCII TAB ●

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-3

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

PROGRAMMING SYSTEM OPERATING COMMANDS

Command additional parameter Function Page

#LEARN# ↵]
<[Link]> [↵ The LEARN mode is turned on. All subsequent key C-3
strokes are registered and written to <[Link]> .

#LOFF# ↵]
[↵ The LEARN mode is switched off. C-3

B&R ↵]
[↵ Switch to B&R mnemonics 3-11

BAUD ↵]
<Baud rate> [↵ Sets the baud rate for the serial interface. Valid baud 3-11
rates are:
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200

CHAN ... Replace / change 5-19

↵]
EXCHANGE <range> [↵ All program lines within the range are searched and 5-19
compared with two defined search masks. If one of
the two search masks corresponds with the program
line, it is replaced by the other mask.
↵]
EXCHAN? <range> [↵ This function is the same as the CHAN described above, 5-19
with the difference that with every change procedure, an
inquiry is displayed in the message line.
↵]
REPLACE <range> [↵ All program lines within the defined range are 5-20
searched and compared with the first specified search
mask. If it corresponds with a program line, it is
replaced by the second mask.
↵]
REPLACE? <range> [↵ This function is the same as REPLACE described above, 5-20
with the difference that with every replace procedure, an
inquiry is displayed in the message line.
Without range definition If no <range> is entered, all program lines are 5-20
searched, except the LAD translation.

CLEAR ... Deletes tables, ladder diagrams and sequence charts

from the PC program memory.
↵]
DATA_TBL <TBL_NAME> [↵ The table with the name <TBL_NAME> is deleted. 7-12
↵]
LAD<LAD_NAME> [↵ The ladder diagram with the name <LAD_NAME> is 4-42
deleted.
↵]
SEQCHART <NAME> [↵ The sequence chart with the name <NAME> is deleted. 4-12

COPY <range> <destination> Copy STL, SYMB or TAB ranges and insert them in 5-27, 6-8,
a certain position (destination). 7-8
DISK <File type> <FNAME1> TO <FNAME2> [↵ ↵] 8-20
The file <FNAME1> is copied and provided with the
name <FNAME2>.

CP40 ↵]
[↵ Switch from CP80 to PG1000 mode or from PC80 to 3-11
PG-PC mode.

CP80 ↵]
[↵ Switch from PG1000 to CP80 mode or from PG-PC 3-11
to PC80 mode.

DATA_TBL ↵]
[↵ Call of the DATA_TBL editor and the last processed 7-3
table.
↵]
<TBL_NAME> [↵ Call of an already existing table or a new defined
DATA_TBL with the specified name <TBL_NAME>.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-4

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

DATE ↵]
<program date> [↵ The current program date is replaced by the 3-25
<program date> .

DDIR ↵]
<PATH> [↵ The default directory of the current drive is set to 8-4
<PATH> .

DEBUG ↵]
[↵ S_LIST status test call. 5-31

DELETE ↵]
<File type> <FNAME> [↵ Delete the file <FNAME>. 8-21
↵]
BLOCK <range> [↵ Delete STL, SYM or TAB ranges. 4-60,5-29,
6-9,7-8

DIR ↵]
<File type> <PATH> [↵ Display of the directory contents <PATH>. 8-18
Files with definite extensions can be displayed with
the parameter <file type>. If this parameter is not
specified, all existing files are displayed.
Without entering <PATH> the contents of the default
directory are displayed.

DOS ↵]
[↵ Call of the MS-DOS command interpreter. 3-27
With the command EXIT it can be returned to the
PROgramming SYStem.
↵]
"Command" [↵ Executes a MS-DOS command "command" and
automatically returns to the PROgramming SYStem.

DRIVE ↵]
<Drive name> [↵ The current drive is changed to <drive name>. 8-3

DUMPS ↵]
<FNAME> [↵ A PLC program is stored as MOTOROLA S-record C-10
file under the name FNAME.S .

EEPROM ↵]
[↵ EEPROM menu call. 5-49

END ↵]
[↵ quits the PROgramming SYStem. 3-20

EXE ↵]
<[Link]> [↵ The LEARN-File <[Link]> is executed. C-4

FBK ↵]
<NAME> [↵ Accesses the FBK definition editor for the definition 10-8
of the FBK with the name <NAME>.

FIND ↵]
<range> [↵ Searches STL program lines, that correspond with the 5-24
specified search mask.
If no <range> is specified, the entire STL program is
searched.

FINDL ↵]
<range> [↵ All program lines that correspond with the specified 5-26
search mask, are listed on screen.

FINDP ↵]
<range> [↵ All program lines that correspond with the specified 5-26
search mask, are printed.

FORMAT ↵]
<Drive name:> [↵ Formats the disk in the specified drive. 8-21

FREE ↵]
<ADDR/SYMBOLS> [↵ Searches for addresses that are not allocated with 6-9
symbols, beginning with address <ADD/SYM>. If no
start address is entered, the search starts at R 000.

GLOBCHAN ... Global exchange/replace with all addresses in the entire 5-23
S_LIST program including the LAD translation.
↵]
EXCHANGE[↵ All program lines are changed and compared with two
defined search masks. If a search mask corresponds
with a program line, it is replaced by the other mask.
↵]
REPLACE[↵ All program lines are searched and compared with the
first defined search mask. If it corresponds with the
program line, it is replaced by the second mask.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-5

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

LAD ↵]
[↵ Call of the last processed LAD. 4-13
↵]
<LAD_NAME> [↵ Call of the LAD with the name <LAD_NAME>.

LANG ↵]
<Language> [↵ selection of the dialogue language: 3-11
GR German
USA English
F French
ITA Italian
SP Spanish

LARGE ↵]
[↵ Program memory definition on 4766 program lines. 3-26

LDMO ↵]
[↵ Call of the last LDMO. 4-44
↵]
<LAD_NAME> [↵ LDMO call (LAD with the name <LAD_NAME>).

LIST ↵]
[↵ Call of the printer menu, where the screen display is 9-3, 9-19
defined.
↵]
SYM <range> [↵ Output of the SYMBOL range. If no <range> is 9-19
define, all SYMBOLs are output.
↵]
LAB [↵ Output of a list of all labels that are used in the 9-19
program .
↵]
PROG <range> [↵ Output of the specified S_LIST range. If no <range> 9-19
is entered, the entire S_LIST is distributed.
↵]
DATA_TBL <TBL_NAME> [↵ Output of the table <TBL_NAME>. If no DATA_TBL 9-19
name is specified, all tables are distributed.

LOAD ... Load programs or program parts 8-9

↵]
ASCII SYMBOL <FNAME> [↵ Load a SYMBOL, that is saved in ASCII format. 8-15
↵]
ASCII DATA_TBL <FNAME> [↵ Load a DATA_TBL that is stored in ASCII format . 8-15
↵]
LAD <FNAME> TO <LAD_NAME> [↵ 8-14
The ladder diagram <FNAME> is loaded and
included in the existing program with the LAD name
<LAD_NAME> .
↵]
SYMBOL <FNAME> [↵ The SYMBOL file <FNAME> is loaded. 8-12
All SYMBOLs, that existed before the loading, are
deleted.
↵]
MACRO S_LIST <FNAME> <destination> [↵ 8-12
The S_LIST macro <FNAME> is loaded and
included in the existing S_LIST of the specified
location <LINE/LAB> .
MACRO SYMBOL <FNAME> <destination> [↵↵] 8-12
The SYMBOL macro <FNAME> is loaded and
included in the existing SYMB at the specified
position <ADDR> .
↵]
MACRO DATA_TBL <FNAME> <destination> [↵ 8-12
The DATA_TBL macro <FNAME> is loaded and in
the existing DATA_TBL at the specified position
<LINE> .

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-6

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

↵]
PG1000 [↵ The PROgramming SYStem switches to the PG1000 3-22
mode and waits until the programming device
PG1000 submits a program through the serial
interface to the PC.
↵]
PLC [↵ The program that is in the PLC RAM, is loaded in the 5-52
work memory of the PC.
↵]
PROG <FNAME> [↵ The program <FNAME> is loaded. The program in 8-9
the memory is deleted.
↵ ] The table <FNAME> is loaded and the loaded table
TAB <TBL_NAME> <FNAME> [↵ 8-11
receives the name <TBL_NAME>.

MAESTRO ↵]
[↵ Emulation of a PROVIT 500/600 with ext. ASCII- C-9
keyboard.

MOVE ↵]
<range> <destination> [↵ Move a S_LIST, SYMBOL or DATA_TBL range. 5-30, 6-8,
7-8

NAME ↵]
<Program name> [↵ The current program name is replaced by <program 3-24
name> .

NEW ↵]
[↵ Deleting the program in the current window, that is in 3-25
the PC working memory.

ONL ↵]
<interface> [↵ Selection of the online interface that should be used, 3-26
to program a PLC:

B&R0 ... Selection of the installed B&R online interface.

LPT1 ... Selection of the Centronics online-interface.

COM1 ... Modem selection for the serial interface COM1.

P-VERS ↵]
[↵ Information display about the program in the PLC. 5-23

PAR ↵]
[↵ Selection of the parallel interface as printer interface. 9-20

PMEN ↵]
[↵ Call of the printer menu, where it is defined, what 9-3
should be printed.

PRINT ↵]
[↵ Call of the printer menu, where it should be defined, 9-3,9-17
what needs to be printed.
↵]
SYMBOL <range> [↵ Print of the defined SYM range. If no <range> is 9-18
entered, all SYMBs are printed.
↵]
LAB [↵ Print of a list of all labels used in a program. 9-18
↵]
PROG <range> [↵ Print of the specified S_LIST range. If no <range> is 9-17
entered, the entire S_LIST is printed.
↵]
DATA_TBL <TBL_NAME> [↵ Table print out <TBL_NAME>. If no TAB name is 9-18
entered, all tables are printed.

RENAME ↵]
<File type> <FNAME1> TO <FNAME2> [↵ 8-21
Rename the file FNAME1 to FNAME2.

RNT ↵]
[↵ The program in the current window is checked for 5-48
missing labels and exceeding of the maximum
branch width.

RUN ↵]
[↵ The program is transmitted to PLC RAM and started. 4-11,5-30
The S_LIST status test is called.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-7

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

RUN P ↵]
[↵ This command is the same as the RUN command, 5-48
with the difference, that the program is protected
when submitted to the PLC. I.e.: The program can not
be loaded to the PLC with LOAD PLC.

S_LIST ↵]
[↵ S_LIST editor call. C-3
↵]
<LINE/LAB> [↵ The input line is set to the specified S_LIST line 4-5
<LINE/LAB>.

SAVE ↵]
[↵ The entire program is saved with the name, that was 8-5
previously defined with a SAVE or LOAD command.
↵]
<FNAME> ASCII SYMBOL <range> [↵ 8-8
Store a SYMBOL range in ASCII format.
<FNAME> ASCII DATA_TBL <TBL_NAME> [↵ ↵] 8-8
Store a DATA_TBL range in ASCII format.
↵]The ladder diagram <LAD_NAME> is saved.
<FNAME> LAD <LAD_NAME> [↵ 8-6
↵]
<FNAME> SYMBOL [↵ All defined symbols are saved. 8-6
↵]
<FNAME> MACRO S_LIST <range> [↵ 8-7
The defined S_LIST range is saved as a macro.
↵]
<FNAME> MACRO SYMBOL <range> [↵ 8-7
The defined SYMBOL range is saved as a macro.
↵]
<FNAME> MACRO DATA_TBL <range> [↵ 8-7
The defined SYMBOL range is saved as a macro.
↵]
PG1000 <Mnemonics> [↵ Submits a program to the PG1000. There are two 3-23
possibilities for <Mnemonics> :
• INTER (MOTOROLA-Mnemonics)
• GERMAN (B&R Mnemonics)
↵]
<FNAME> PROG [↵ The entire program is saved. 8-6
↵]
<FNAME> DATA_TBL <TBL_NAME> [↵ 8-6
The table <TBL_NAME> is stored.

SDIR ↵]
<PATH> [↵ The standard directory of the current drive is set to 8-4
<PATH>.

SER ↵]
[↵ The serial interface COM1 is defined as printer 9-20
interface.

SEQCHART ↵]
[↵ SEQCHART editor call and call of the last edited 4-5
SEQCHARTs.
↵]
<NAME> [↵ Call of an existing or new SEQCHART with the 4-5
specified name <NAME>.

SMALL ↵]
[↵ Program memory definition on 2719 program lines. 3-26

SYMBOL ↵]
[↵ SYMBOLS editor call. 6-4
↵]
<ADDR> [↵ The input line is set to a particular address.

TERM ↵]
[↵ PC can be used as input terminal for the operation of C-6
a PROVIT 900/1000.

UDIR ↵]
<PATH> [↵ The user directory of the current drive is set to 8-4
<PATH>.

WINDOW ↵]
[↵ Window definition menu call. 3-18

XFER ↵]
[↵ Program submittal to the PLC, without interruption of 5-55
the program running in the PLC.

XREF ↵]
[↵ Output of a list of all cross references on screen. 9-19

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-8

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-9

 Appendix A OPERATING COMMANDS

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem A-10

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

APPENDIX B
STL-INSTRUCTIONS

Contents: Syntax Explanations B-3

STL Instructions Overview B-6
B&R Mnemonics B-14
Motorola Mnemonics B-15
STL Instruction Groups B-16

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-1

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-2

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

SYNTAX EXPLANATIONS
The STL instruction overview includes various information:

- Mnemonic (Motorola, B&R, B&R short version)

- short function description
- operating mode, in which commands are available
- addresssing modes with execution times and opcode length
- address preselections (Motorola and B&R)
- status register (status after command execution)

The table is divided into two pages, i. e. the left and the right page belong together. To increase the
readability of the STL overview, the left and the right page were provided with “consecutive
numbers”.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-3

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

Left Page

Mnemonics Mode
Cont.

PG1000
Operation

PG-PC
CP80
PC80
Nr. Motorola B&R short

1 ABA A+B A+B➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

2 ABX B+R B+X➱X ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
3 ADCA ADD A, ++ A+M+C➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
4 ADCB ++B B+M+C➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
5

A Accumulator A (8 bit) M Memory, 8 bit ❍ STL

B Accumulator B (8 bit) r8 8-bit Register (A, B, CCR, DP) instruction is
D Accumulator D r16 16-bit Register (D, R, Y, SP!, SPU) available in
(16 Bit; A = MSB, B = LSB) IIB Interrupt Inhibit Bit this expansion
SR Condition Code Register (8 bit) ∧ Log. AND level
N Negative Flag (data bit 3) ∨ Log. OR
C Carry Flag (data bit 2) ⊕ Log. EXOR
Z Zero Flag (data bit 0) EA Effective Address
X Index register X (16 bit) IMM Test Mask
Y Index register Y (16 bit) d0 Data bit 0 of Accumulator A
SP! System Stack pointer (16 bit)
SPU User Stack pointer (16 bit)

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-4

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

Right page

Addressing Modes 6303/6809 Address Preselections Condition Code

Cont.
IMPL. DIR. EXT. IMMED. IND. REL. I O F S T # P R X Y D U ! B G 6303 6809
Nr.
~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # E A M F Z # P C I Y D U ! B G N Z C N Z C
1 1/25 1/3 ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 1/3 1/1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

3 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4 2/2 + +

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4 2/2 + +

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

IMPL. Implied I E 1 Bit Input N Negative Flag

DIR. Direct O A 1 Bit Output Z Zero Flag
EXT. Extended F M 1 Bit Flag C Carry Flag
IMMED. Immediate S F Start Timer
IND. Indexed (Ind. indexed) T Z 1 Bit Timer ❍ not changed
REL. Relative # # Immediate
P P Peripheral address
~ Processor Cycles R C 8 Bit Register ● changes
# Bytes X I Index register X according to
Y Y Index register Y operation
-/4 4/5 2/2+ D D Direct page addressing
U U User Stack Pointer
! ! System Stack Pointer ▲ set
B B Block Memory in PP60
not available 6303 6809 2 or more G G Global RAM in PP60 ▼ reset
at 6303 cycles/bytes

❍ available ✕ not valid

● available at 6809 with

PROSYS V 5.00 or later

■ available at 6303

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-5

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

Mnemonics Mode
Cont.

PG1000
Operation

PG-PC
CP80
PC80
Nr. Motorola B&R short

1 ABA A+B A+B➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

2 ABX B+R B+X➱X ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
3 ADCA ADD A, ++ A+M+C➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
4 ADCB ++B B+M+C➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
5 ADDA + A+M➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
6 ADDB +B B+M➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
7 ADDD +D A:B + M:M+1 ➱ A:B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
8 AIM AIM M ∧ IMM ➱ M ❍
9 ANDA UND U A∧M➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
10 ANDB UB B∧M➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
11 ASL SL Shift M left ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
12 ASLA SLA Shift A left ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
13 ASLB SLB Shift B left ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
14 ASLD SLD Shift D left ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
15 BCC JC0 Branch, if C = 0 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
16 BCCL JC0L Branch, if C = 0 ❍
17 BEQ SP0 J0 Branch, if Z = 1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
18 BEQL SP0L Branch, if Z = 1 ❍
19 BHI SP> J> Branch, if C + Z = 0 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
20 BHIL SP>L Branch, if C + Z = 0 ❍
21 BITA B A∧M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
22 BITB BB B∧M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
23 BCS SP< J< Branch, if C = 1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
24 BCSL SP<L Branch, if C = 1 ❍
25 BLS J<= Branch, if C + Z = 1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
26 BLSL J<=L Branch, if C + Z = 1 ❍
27 BMI J- Branch, if N = 1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
28 BMIL J-L Branch, if N = 1 ❍
29 BNE SN0 J1 Branch, if Z = 0 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
30 BNEL SN0L Branch, if Z = 0 ❍
31 BPL J+ Branch, if N = 0 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
32 BPLL J+L Branch, if N = 0 ❍
33 CBA AVB A-B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
34 CLC CLC 0➱C ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
35 CLI CLI 0 ➱ IIB ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-6
 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions
Addressing Modes 6303/6809 Address Preselections Condition Code
Cont.
IMPL. DIR.* EXT. IMMED. IND. REL. I O F S T # P R X Y D U ! B G 6303 6809
Nr.
~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # E A M F Z # P C I Y D U ! B G N Z C N Z C
1 1/25 1/3 ● ● ● ● ● ●

2 1/3 1/1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

3 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4 2/2 + +

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

6 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4 2/2 + +

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

7 -/6 -/2 5/7 3/3 3/4 3/3 5/6+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8 7/- 3- ■ ● ● ❍

9 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

10 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4 2/2 + +

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

11 -/6 -/2 6/7 3/3 6/6+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

12 1/2 1/1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

13 1/2 1/1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

14 1/4 1/2 ● ● ● ● ✕ ●

15 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

16 -/5+ -/4 ❍ ❍ ❍

17 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

18 -/5+ -/4 ❍ ❍ ❍

19 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

20 -/5+ -/4 ❍ ❍ ❍

21 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

22 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

23 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

24 -/5+ -/4 ❍ ❍ ❍

25 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

26 -/5 +
-/4 ❍ ❍ ❍

27 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

28 -/5 +
-/4 ❍ ❍ ❍

29 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

30 -/5 +
-/4 ❍ ❍ ❍

31 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

32 -/5 +
-/4 ❍ ❍ ❍

33 1/25 1/3 ● ● ● ● ● ●

34 1/3 1/2 ❍ ❍ ▼ ❍ ❍ ▼

35 1/3 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-7

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

Mnemonics Mode
Cont.

PG1000
Operation

PG-PC
CP80
PC80
Nr. Motorola B&R Short

36 CLR CLR C 00 ➱ M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
37 CLRA CLA 00 ➱ A ❍ ❍
38 CLRB CLB 00 ➱ B ❍ ❍
39 CMPA CMP V A-M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
40 CMPB VB B-M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
41 COM K M ⊕ #$FF ➱ M (Negation) ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
42 COMA COA KA A ⊕ #$FF ➱ A (Negation) ❍ ❍
43 COMB COB KB B ⊕ #$FF ➱ B (Negation) ❍ ❍
44 CPX VR X - M:M+1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
45 CPX# VRK X - M:M+1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
46 CPY VY Y - M:M+1 ❍
47 CPY# VYK Y - M:M+1 ❍
48 DAA DK Decimal adjust of A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
49 DEC DEC D M-1➱M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
50 DECA DA A-1➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
51 DECB DB B-1➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
52 DES DS SP! - 1 ➱ SP! ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
53 DEX DR X-1➱X ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
54 EIM EIM M ⊕ IMM ➱ M ❍
55 END END End of Program, ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
start program line 0000
56 EORA EXO E A⊕M➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
57 EORB EB B⊕M➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
58 EXG EXG r8 r8 or r16 r16 ❍
59 INC INC M+1➱M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
60 INCA IA A+1➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
61 INCB IB B+1➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
62 INS IS SP! + 1 ➱ SP! ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
63 INX IR X+1➱X ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
64 JMP SPI J Unconditional jump ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
65 JSR SPU JU, JS Jump to subroutine ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
66 LDAA LAD L M➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
67 LDAB LB M➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
68 LDD LD M:M+1 ➱ D ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
69 LDK LDK M:M+1 ➱ D ❍ ❍

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-8

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions
Addressing Modes 6303/6809 Address Preselections Condition Code
Cont.
IMPL. DIR. EXT. IMMED. IND. REL. I O F S T # P R X Y D U ! B G 6303 6809
Nr.
~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # E A M F Z # P C I Y D U ! B G N Z C N Z C
36 -/6 -/2 5/7 3/3 5/6 2/2
+ +
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ▼ ▲ ▼ ▼ ▲ ▼

37 1/2 1/1 ▼ ▲ ▼ ▼ ▲ ▼

38 1/2 1/1 ▼ ▲ ▼ ▼ ▲ ▼

39 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

40 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

41 -/6 -/2 6/7 3/3 6/6 2/2

+ +
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ▲ ● ● ▲

42 1/2 1/1 ● ● ▲ ● ● ▲

43 1/2 1/1 ● ● ▲ ● ● ▲

44 -/6 -/2 5/7 3/3 5/6+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

45 3/4 3/3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

46 -/6 -/2 -/7 -/3 -/6+ -/2+ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

47 -/4 -/3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

48 2/2 1/1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

49 -/6 -/2 6/7 3/3 6/6+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

50 1/2 1/1 ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

51 1/2 1/1 ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

52 1/6 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

53 1/6 1/2 ❍ ● ❍ ❍ ● ❍

54 7/- 3/- ■ ● ● ❍

55 ● ● ● ● ● ●

56 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

57 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

58 -/7 -/2 ❍ ❍ ❍

59 -/6 -/2 6/7 3/3 6/6+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

60 1/2 1/1 ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

61 1/2 1/1 ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

62 1/6 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

63 1/6 1/2 ❍ ● ❍ ❍ ● ❍

64 3/4 3/3 3/6+ 2/2+ ❍ ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

65 6/8 3/3 5/7+ 2/2+ ❍ ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

66 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

67 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4 2/2 + +

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

68 -/5 -/2 5/6 3/3 3/3 3/3 5/5+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

69 3/3 3/3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-9

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions
Mnemonics Mode
Cont.

PG1000
Operation

PG-PC
CP80
PC80
Nr. Motorola B&R Short

70 LDL LDL M:M+1 ➱ D ❍ ❍

71 LDS LS M:M+1 ➱ SP! ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
72 LDX LR M:M+1 ➱ X ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
73 LDX# LRK M:M+1 ➱ X ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
74 LDXL LRL M:M+1 ➱ X ❍ ❍
75 LDY LY M:M+1 ➱ Y ❍
76 LDY# LYK M:M+1 ➱ Y ❍
77 LDYL LYL M:M+1 ➱ Y ❍
78 LEA! LE! EA ➱ SP! ❍
79 LEAU LEU EA ➱ SPU ❍
80 LEAX LER EA ➱ X ❍ ❍
81 LEAY LEY EA ➱ Y ❍
82 LSR SR Shift M right ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
83 LSRA SRA Shift A right ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
84 LSRB SRB Shift B right ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
85 LSRD SRD Shift D right ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
86 MUL A*B A✕B➱D ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
87 NOP NOP N No Operation ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
88 OIM OIM M ∨ IMM ➱ M ❍
89 ORAA OD O A∨M➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
90 ORAB OB B∨M➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
91 PRS PRS P If d0 = 1, 1 ➱ M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
92 PSH PSH Put register (r8 or r 16) ❍
on the stack (SP! or SPU)
r8 ➱ (SP!); SP! - 1 ➱ SP! ...
r16 ➱ (SP!:SP!+1); SP! - 2 ➱ SP! ...
93 PSHA ANS A ➱ (SP!); SP! - 1 ➱ SP! ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
94 PSHB BNS B ➱ (SP!); SP! - 1 ➱ SP! ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
95 PSHX RNS X ➱ (SP!:SP!+1); SP! - 2 ➱ SP! ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
96 PUL PUL Take register (r8 or r 16) ❍
from stack (SP! oder SPU)
SP! + 1 ➱ SP!; (SP!) ➱ r8 ...
SP! + 2 ➱ SP!; (SP!:SP!+1) ➱ r16 ...
97 PULA AVS SP! + 1 ➱ SP!; (SP!) ➱ A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
98 PULB BVS SP! + 1 ➱ SP!; (SP!) ➱ B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
99 PULX RVS SP! + 2 ➱ SP!; (SP!:SP!+1) ➱ X ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-10

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions
Addressing Modes 6303/6809 Address Preselections Condition Code
Cont.
IMPL. DIR. EXT. IMMED. IND. REL. I O F S T # P R X Y D U ! B G 6303 6809
Nr.
~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # E A M F Z # P C I Y D U ! B G N Z C N Z C
70 3/3 3/3 ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

71 -/6 -/3 5/7 3/4 5/6+ 2/3+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

72 -/5 -/2 5/6 3/3 5/5+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

73 3/3 3/3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

74 3/3 3/3 ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

75 -/5 -/2 -/6 -/3 -/5 +

-/2 +
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍

76 3/3 3/3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍

77 -/3 -/3 ● ● ❍

78 -/4+ -/2+ ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍

79 -/4+ -/2+ ● ● ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍

80 -/4+ -/2+ ❍ ● ● ● ❍ ● ❍

81 -/4+ -/2+ ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ❍

82 -/6 -/2 6/7 3/3 6/6+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ▼ ● ● ▼ ● ●

83 1/2 1/1 ▼ ● ● ▼ ● ●

84 1/2 1/1 ▼ ● ● ▼ ● ●

85 1/4 1/2 ▼ ● ● ▼ ✕ ●

86 7/11 1/1 ❍ ❍ ● ❍ ● ●

87 1/2 1/1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

88 7/- 3/- ■ ● ● ❍

89 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

90 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4 2/2 + +

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

91 4/5 3/3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

92 -/5+ -/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

93 4/6 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

94 4/6 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

95 5/7 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

96 -/5+ -/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

97 3/6 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

98 3/6 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

99 4/7 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-11

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

Mnemonics Mode
Cont.

PG1000
Operation

PG-PC
CP80
PC80
Nr. Motorola B&R Short

100 ROL SLI RL Rotate M left ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

101 ROLA RLA Rotate A left ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
102 ROLB RLB Rotate B left ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
103 ROR SRE RR Rotate M right ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
104 RORA RRA Rotate A right ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
105 RORB RRB Rotate B right ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
106 RST RST R If d0 = 1, 0 ➱ M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
107 RTS RET Return from subroutine ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
108 SBA A-B A-B➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
109 SBCA SUB -- A-M-C➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
110 SBCB --B B-M-C➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
111 SEC SEC 1➱C ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
112 SEI SEI 1 ➱ IIB ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
113 SET SET S 1➱M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
114 SK0 SK0 Skip next instruction, if Z = 1 ❍ ❍
115 SK1 SK1 Skip next instruction, if Z = 0 ❍ ❍
116 STAA = I A➱M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
117 STAB =B B➱M ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
118 STD =D D ➱ M:M+1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
119 STS =S SP! ➱ M:M+1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
120 STX =R X ➱ M:M+1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
121 STY =Y Y ➱ M:M+1 ❍
122 SUBA - A-M➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
123 SUBB -B B-M➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
124 SUBD -D D - M:M+1 ➱ D ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
125 TAB MAB A➱B ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
126 TAP MAC A ➱ CCR ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
127 TBA MBA B➱A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
128 TFR TFR r8 ➱ r8 or r16 ➱ r16 ❍
129 TIM TIM M ∧ IMM ❍
130 TPA MCA CCR ➱ A ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
131 TSX MSR SP! + 1 ➱ X ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
132 TXS MRS X - 1 ➱ SP! ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
133 XGDX DXR D X ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
134
User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-12
 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions
Addressing Modes 6303/6809 Address Preselections Condition Code
Cont.
IMPL. DIR. EXT. IMMED. IND. REL. I O F S T # P R X Y D U ! B G 6303 6809
Nr.
~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # ~ # E A M F Z # P C I Y D U ! B G N Z C N Z C
100 -/6 -/2 6/7 3/3 6/6 2/2
+ +
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

101 1/2 1/1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

102 1/2 1/1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

103 -/6 -/2 6/7 3/3 6/6+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

104 1/2 1/1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

105 1/2 1/1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

106 4/5 3/3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

107 5/5 1/1 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

108 1/25 1/3 ● ● ● ● ● ●

109 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

110 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

111 1/3 1/2 ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ▲

112 1/3 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

113 4/5 3/3 ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

114 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

115 3/3 2/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

116 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 4/4 2/2

+ +
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

117 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

118 -/5 -/2 5/6 3/3 5/5 2/2

+ +
❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

119 -/6 -/3 5/7 3/4 5/6+ 2/3+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

120 -/5 -/2 5/6 3/3 5/5+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍ ● ● ❍

121 -/6 -/3 -/7 -/4 -/6+ -/3+ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ❍

122 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4 2/2 + +

❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

123 -/4 -/2 4/5 3/3 2/2 2/2 4/4+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

124 -/6 -/2 5/7 3/3 3/4 3/3 5/6+ 2/2+ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

125 1/6 1/2 ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

126 1/6 1/2 ● ● ● ● ● ●

127 1/6 1/2 ● ● ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

128 -/6 -/2 ❍ ❍ ❍

129 5/- 3/- ■ ● ● ❍

130 1/6 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

131 1/6 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

132 1/6 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

133 2/7 1/2 ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍

134
User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-13
 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

B&R Mnemonics

B&R Motorola Short B&R Motorola Short B&R Motorola Short

+ ADDA EXG EXG PUL PUL

++B ADCB EXO EORA E RET RTS
+B ADDB IA INCA RLA ROLA
+D ADDD IB INCB RLB ROLB
- SUBA INC INC RNS PSHX
—B SBCB IR INX RRA RORA
-B SUBB IS INS RRB RORB
-D SUBD J+ BPL RST RST R
= STAA I J+L BPLL RVS PULX
=B STAB J- BMI SEC SEC
=D STD J-L BMIL SEI SEI
=R STX J<= BLS SET SET S
=S STS J<=L BLSL SK0 SK0
=Y STY JC0 BCC SK1 SK1
A*B MUL JC0L BCCL SL ASL
A+B ABA K COM SLA ASLA
A-B SBA LAD LDAA L SLB ASLB
ADD ADCA A, ++ LB LDAB SLD ASLD
AIM AIM LD LDD SLI ROL RL
ANS PSHA LDK LDK SN0 BNE J1
AVB CBA LDL LDL SN0L BNEL
AVS PULA LE! LEA! SP0 BEQ J0
B BITA LER LEAX SP0L BEQL
B+R ABX LEU LEAU SP< BCS J<
BB BITB LEY LEAY SP<L BCSL
BNS PSHB LR LDX SP> BHI J>
BVS PULB LRK LDX# SP>L BHIL
CLA CLRA LRL LDXL SPI JMP J
CLB CLRB LS LDS SPU JSR JU, JS
CLC CLC LY LDY SR LSR
CLI CLI LYK LDY# SRA LSRA
CLR CLR C LYL LDYL SRB LSRB
CMP CMPA V MAB TAB SRD LSRD
COA COMA KA MAC TAP SRE ROR RR
COB COMB KB MBA TBA SUB SBCA —
DA DECA MCA TPA TFR TFR
DB DECB MRS TXS TIM TIM
DEC DEC D MSR TSX UB ANDB
DK DAA NOP NOP N UND ANDA U
DR DEX OB ORAB VB CMPB
DS DES OD ORAA O VR CPX
DXR XGDX OIM OIM VRK CPX#
EB EORB PRS PRS P VY CPY
EIM EIM PSH PSH VYK CPY#
END END

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-14

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

Motorola Mnemonics
Motorola B&R Short Motorola B&R Short Motorola B&R Short

ABA A+B CPY VY ORAB OB

ABX B+R CPY# VYK PRS PRS P
ADCA ADD A, ++ DAA DK PSH PSH
ADCB ++B DEC DEC D PSHA ANS
ADDA + DECA DA PSHB BNS
ADDB +B DECB DB PSHX RNS
ADDD +D DES DS PUL PUL
AIM AIM DEX DR PULA AVS
ANDA UND U EIM EIM PULB BVS
ANDB UB END END PULX RVS
ASL SL EORA EXO E ROL SLI RL
ASLA SLA EORB EB ROLA RLA
ASLB SLB EXG EXG ROLB RLB
ASLD SLD INC INC ROR SRE RR
BCC JC0 INCA IA RORA RRA
BCCL JC0L INCB IB RORB RRB
BEQ SP0 J0 INS IS RST RST R
BEQL SP0L INX IR RTS RET
BHI SP> J> JMP SPI J SBA A-B
BHIL SP>L JSR SPU JU, JS SBCA SUB —
BITA B LDAA LAD L SBCB —B
BITB BB LDAB LB SEC SEC
BCS SP< J< LDD LD SEI SEI
BCSL SP<L LDK LDK SET SET S
BLS J<= LDL LDL SK0 SK0
BLSL J<=L LDS LS SK1 SK1
BMI J- LDX LR STAA = I
BMIL J-L LDX# LRK STAB =B
BNE SN0 J1 LDXL LRL STD =D
BNEL SN0L LDY LY STS =S
BPL J+ LDY# LYK STX =R
BPLL J+L LDYL LYL STY =Y
CBA AVB LEA! LE! SUBA -
CLC CLC LEAU LEU SUBB -B
CLI CLI LEAX LER SUBD -D
CLR CLR C LEAY LEY TAB MAB
CLRA CLA LSR SR TAP MAC
CLRB CLB LSRA SRA TBA MBA
CMPA CMP V LSRB SRB TFR TFR
CMPB VB LSRD SRD TIM TIM
COM K MUL A*B TPA MCA
COMA COA KA NOP NOP N TSX MSR
COMB COB KB OIM OIM TXS MRS
CPX VR ORAA OD O XGDX DXR
CPX# VRK

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-15

 APPENDIX B Overview of STL Instructions

STL instruction Groups

Load and Storage instruc- Comparison instructions Decrement- and

tions Increment instructions
B&R Motorola Short

B&R Motorola Short AVB CBA B&R Motorola Short

CMP CMPA V
INC INC
LAD LDAA L VB CMPB
IA INCA
LB LDAB VR CPX
IB INCB
LD LDD VRK CPX#
IR INX
LDK LDK VY CPY
LDL LDL IS INS
VYK CPY#
DEC DEC D
LR LDX B BITA
DA DECA
LRK LDX# BB BITB
DB DECB
LRL LDXL TIM TIM
DR DEX
LS LDS
LY LDY DS DES
LYK LDY# Comparison instructions
LYL LDYL
LE! LEA! B&R Motorola Short Branch instructions
LEU LEAU
LER LEAX AVB CBA
CMP CMPA V B&R Motorola Short
LEY LEAY VB CMPB JC0 BCC
= STAA I VR CPX
VRK CPX# JC0L BCCL
=B STAB
VY CPY SP< BCS J<
=D STD
VYK CPY# SP<L BCSL
=R STX
B BITA J+ BPL
=S STS BB BITB J+L BPLL
=Y STY TIM TIM
J- BMI
MAB TAB
J-L BMIL
MBA TBA
SN0 BNE J1
MAC TAP Arithmetic Operations SN0L BNEL
MCA TPA
SP0 BEQ J0
MSR TSX B&R Motorola Short SP0L BEQL
MRS TXS
+ ADDA SP> BHI J>
TFR TFR
ADD ADCA A, ++ SP>L BHIL
DXR XGDX
+B ADDB J<= BLS
EXG EXG
++B ADCB J<=L BLSL
PSH PSH
+D ADDD SK0 SK0
ANS PSHA
A+B ABA SK1 SK1
BNS PSHB
B+R ABX SPI JMP J
RNS PSHX
- SUBA SPU JSR JU, JS
PUL PUL
SUB SBCA -- RET RTS
AVS PULA
-B SUBB NOP NOP N
BVS PULB
--B SBCB END END
RVS PULX
-D SUBD
A-B SBA
A*B MUL Other
Logic Connections
B&R Motorola Short
B&R Motorola Short Shift and Rotation instruction
PRS PRS P
UND ANDA U RST RST R
UB ANDB B&R Motorola Short
CLA CLRA
AIM AIM SL ASL CLB CLRB
OD ORAA O SLA ASLA CLR CLR C
OB ORAB SLB ASLB SET SET S
OIM OIM SLD ASLD CLC CLC
EXO EORA E SR LSR SEC SEC
EB EORB SRA LSRA CLI CLI
EIM EIM SRB LSRB SEI SEI
SRD LSRD K COM
SLI ROL RL COA COMA KA
RLA ROLA COB COMB KB
RLB ROLB DK DAA
SRE ROR RR
RRA RORA
RRB RORB

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem B-16

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

Contents: 1. LEARN - Function C-3

1.1. Start Recording a LEARN File C-3
1.2. End the Recording C-3
1.3. Return of a LEARN File C-4
1.4. Format a Learn File C-4
2. PROVIT Emulations C-6
2.1. PROVIT 1000 - Keyboard Emulation C-6
2.2. PROVIT 500/600 (MAESTRO) Emulation C-9
3. Editing the Program Image for
EPROM-Programmer C-13
4. MS-DOS Environment Variables C-15
4.1. Turn off Test to Parallel Online Interface C-15
4.2. Using a Different Parallel Port C-15
4.3. Loading a different Keyboard Driver C-16
4.4. Printing a File C-16
4.5. MAESTRO Terminal Emulation Variants C-17
4.6. User Specific Files C-17
4.7. Temporary Files C-17
4.8. EMS Symbol Management C-18

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-1

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-2

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

1. LEARN - FUNCTION
With the LEARN-function any sequence of key combinations can be recorded and repeated later.
There is the possibility to record a sequence of commands that are needed more often, and to return
those with the input of a command.

1.1. START RECORDING A LEARN FILE

Command: ↵]
#LEARN# <FNAME> [↵

Function: The LEARN mode is turned on. All subsequent keys operations are written in the
defined FNAME file.

<FNAME> is a file name with a maximum length of 8 characters with an extension,

that can be selected optionally. The extensions that are used by PROgramming
SYStem shouldn't be applied:

*.PRG *.SYMBOLS *.DATA_TBL *.LAD

*.MSY *.MTA *.MSL *.BSC
*.PRV *.ATA *.ASY *.EMS

A path can be entered with the file name ( drive and directory). If no path is defined,
the LEARN file is stored in the directory configured when the PROgramming
SYStem was installed. (default setting for the software installation: C:\PG)

1.2. END THE RECORDING

Command: ↵]
#LOFF# [↵

Function: The LEARN mode is turned off.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-3

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

1.3. RETURN OF A LEARN FILE

Command: ↵]
EXE <FNAME> [↵

Function: All key operations, that are stored in the specified file FNAME are returned accord-
ing to the record.

A LEARN file can also be defined as start parameter for the PROgramming SYStem
(chapter 3 INTRODUCTION).

The subdivision of LEARN files is impossible, i.e.: If a LEARN-file is called by

another one, a route is formed, but there is no jump back to the first one.

The processing of a LEARN file can be interrupted with the [Esc]-key.

1.4. FORMAT OF A LEARN FILE

A LEARN file contains only ASCII characters. ASCII characters, that are not representable on
screen (e.g.: cursor-movements, CR, LF etc.), are entered with a 3 digit decimal number and a
preceding “\”. The format “\xxx” must be adhered to exactly, to allow the learn file to be created
and edited with any processing program.

If the character “*” is in the LEARN file, all subsequent characters in the same line are interpreted
as comment.

If both characters “\“ and “*” are directly submitted to the PROgramming SYStem, these have to
be entered in decimal format:

\ ... \092
* ... \042

All remaining control characters CR, LF, ESC etc. are to be entered in decimal form.

On the following page all keys with the corresponding decimal values are listed in a table.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-4

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

Key Character Key Character sequence Key Character sequence

sequence
EXIT (ESC) \027 F1 \000\059 REL_F1 \000\200
TAB \009 F2 \000\060 REL_F2 \000\201
SH_TAB \015 F3 \000\061 REL_F3 \000\202
ALT_TAB \000\133 F4 \000\062 REL_F4 \000\203
CTRL_TAB \000\134 F5 \000\063 REL_F5 \000\204
F6 \000\064 REL_F6 \000\205
F7 \000\065 REL_F7 \000\206
F8 \000\066 REL_F8 \000\207
F9 \000\067 REL_F9 \000\208
F10 \000\068 REL_F10 \000\209

SH_F1 \000\084 CTRL_F1 \000\094 ALT_F1 \000\104

SH_F2 \000\085 CTRL_F2 \000\095 ALT_F2 \000\105
SH_F3 \000\086 CTRL_F3 \000\096 ALT_F3 \000\106
SH_F4 \000\087 CTRL_F4 \000\097 ALT_F4 \000\107
SH_F5 \000\088 CTRL_F5 \000\098 ALT_F5 \000\108
SH_F6 \000\089 CTRL_F6 \000\099 ALT_F6 \000\109
SH_F7 \000\090 CTRL_F7 \000\100 ALT_F7 \000\110
SH_F8 \000\091 CTRL_F8 \000\101 ALT_F8 \000\111
SH_F9 \000\092 CTRL_F9 \000\102 ALT_F9 \000\112
SH_F10 \000\093 CTRL_F10 \000\103 ALT_F10 \000\113

HOME \000\071 CTRL_CUL \000\115 ALT_INS \000\140

CUP \000\072 CTRL_CUR \000\116 ALT_DEL \000\141
PGUP \000\073 CTRL_END \000\117 ALT_END \000\142
CUL \000\075 CTRL_PGDN \000\118 ALT_CUD \000\143
CUR \000\077 CTRL_HOME \000\119 ALT_PGDN \000\144
END \000\079 CTRL_PGUP \000\132 ALT_CUL \000\145
CUD \000\080 CTRL_CUP \000\135 ALT_EXIT \000\146
PGDN \000\081 CTRL_CUD \000\136 ALT_CUR \000\147
INS \000\082 CTRL_INS \000\137 ALT_HOME \000\148
DEL \000\083 CTRL_DEL \000\138 ALT_CUP \000\149
SPACE \032 CTRL_EXIT \000\139 ALT_PGUP \000\150

CTRLALT_INS \000\151 CTRL_A \001 CTRL_N \014

CTRLALT_DEL \000\152 CTRL_B \002 CTRL_O \015
CTRLALT_END \000\153 CTRL_C \003 CTRL_P \016
CTRLALT_CUD \000\154 CTRL_D \004 CTRL_Q \017
CTRLALT_PGDN \000\155 CTRL_E \005 CTRL_R \018
CTRLALT_CUL \000\156 CTRL_F \006 CTRL_S \019
CTRLALT_EXIT \000\157 CTRL_G \007 CTRL_T \020
CTRLALT_CUR \000\158 CTRL_H \008 CTRL_U \021
CTRLALT_HOME \000\159 CTRL_I \009 CTRL_V \022
CTRLALT_CUP \000\160 CTRL_J \010 CTRL_W \023
CTRLALT_PGUP \000\161 CTRL_K \011 CTRL_X \024
CTRL_L \012 CTRL_Y \025
CTRL_M \013 CTRL_Z \026

SH_ SHIFT-key is pressed

ALT_ ALT-key is pressed
CTRL_ CTRL-key is pressed
CTRLALT_ CTRL- and ALT-key are pressed together
REL_ Key is released (only function keys)

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-5

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

2. PROVIT EMULATIONS

2.1. PROVIT 1000 - KEYBOARD EMULATION

The B&R PROgramming SYStem software package makes use of the PC as an input terminal for
operating the PROVIT 900/1000. The PC keyboard is allocated as an external ASCII-keyboard.
Pictures can only be created, edited and loaded/stored from/to diskette or hard disk with the
keyboard on the installed PROVIT terminal.

The terminal is connected to the PC COM1 interface with one of the following cables:

• BRKAPC-1
• BRKAPC-3

Command: ↵]
TERM [↵

Function: After the input of this command in the command line the screen is cleared and the
cursor is set to the top left corner.

The function key allocation alters as follows:

The displayed functions can only be called in connection with the [⇑] key:

⇑] + [F1 EXIT]
[⇑ Exit the terminal mode back to the command line of the
PROgramming SYStem.

⇑] + [F2] to [F8]
[⇑ Adjusting the baud rate of the interface COM1.

Note:
PC and PROVIT 900/1000 baud rates must correspond.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-6

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

The function key allocation without simultaneous operation with [⇑] is the same as the softkey
allocation of the PROVIT 900/1000 (displayed on the terminal).

The sofkey functions and the operations of the PROVIT 900/1000 are to be found in:

• Operating Terminals - USER'S MANUAL (MATERMINAL-0)

• PROVIT 1000 Short Description (MAP1000KB-0)

If the PROVIT function [F5 SAVE] or [F4 LOAD] is called, three alternatives are offered in the
softkey line of the PROVIT terminal:

• [F1 MASK] store/load individual PROVIT masks

• [F2 TEXT] store/load the PROVIT global texts
• [F3 B-UP] store/load all 28 PROVIT masks
(Backup/Restore; from PROVIT V. 2.50)

All files of the default-directories with the extension *.PRV (for selecting [F1 MASK] or [F2
TEXT]) or *.PBK (for selecting [F3 B-UP]) are displayed on screen:

Load

The desired file can be selected with the [❖] keys. After pressing [↵] the selected file is loaded
from diskette or hard disk into PROVIT. During the load procedure the following message is
displayed:

--- LOAD active --- Length: xxxx Bytes xxxx ... file length

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-7

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

Store

A file name with a length of up to 8 characters may be defined. After pressing the [↵] key, the
screen, the global texts and the 28 pictures are stored with the specified file name on disk or hard
disk. During the storage procedure the following message is displayed:

--- SAVE active --- Length: xxxx Bytes xxxx ... File length

Function key allocation during the store/load procedure:

Key FUNCTION

[F1 NEXTDIR] If the cursor is set to a directory (marked by <DIR>), this directory is
opened. The contents of this directory are displayed. This function is
the same as the DOS command “cd <directory name>”.

[F2 PREVDIR] The previous directory is changed and its contents are displayed. [F2
PREVDIR] is the same as the DOS command “cd ..”.

[F3 DEFDIR] The current directory is defined as the “default directory”.

↵]
[↵ The file selected with the [❖] keys (the corresponding line is dis-
played in inverse video in the overview) or the files with the defined
file name (without extension) is loaded/stored.

[F7 PRINT] The displayed directory is printed.

[F8 EXIT] Quits the load/store menu.

[Esc]

If the load or storage function should apply to a different drive, the PROVIT emulation must be
exited. A different drive can be set in the command line of the PROgramming SYStem with the
command DRIVE <drive name> [↵ ↵].

If an existing file name is selected for storage, the following message is displayed on screen:

W008 FILE NAME EXISTS - CONTINUE ? ( Y / N )

[N] The storage procedure is interrupted.

[Y] The existing file is overwritten.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-8

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

2.2. PROVIT 500/600 (MAESTRO) EMULATION

Command: ↵]
MAESTRO [↵

Function: Emulates a PROVIT 500/600 with external ASCII keyboard. The PC keyboard
layout is the same as the ASCII keyboard.

After inputting this command in the command line the screen is deleted and the
cursor is set in the top left corner.

The softkey line allocation changes as follows:

The displayed functions can only be called by simultaneously pressing the [⇑] key:

⇑] + [F1 EXIT]
[⇑ Exits the terminal mode into the command line of the PROgramming
SYStem.

⇑] + [F2] to [F8]
[⇑ Adjusts the COM1 interface baud rate.

Note:
The baud rates of PC and PROVIT must correspond.

The following PROVIT control characters are supported during terminal emulation (beginning from
PROgramming SYStem Version 5.00):

Ctrl A Ctrl B Ctrl C Ctrl D Ctrl E Ctrl F Ctrl H Ctrl I

Ctrl J Ctrl K Ctrl L Ctrl M Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl P Ctrl Q
Ctrl R Ctrl S Ctrl U Ctrl V Ctrl W Ctrl X Ctrl Y Ctrl Z
Esc A Esc D Esc F Esc H Esc I Esc L Esc M Esc N
Esc P Esc R Esc U Esc W Esc X
Esc 0 Esc 1 Esc 2 Esc 3 Esc 4 Esc 5 Esc 6 Esc 7
$ 1E $ 1D $ 7F

The functions for these control sequences are described in :

• OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINALS USER'S MANUAL (MATERMINAL-
0)
Section 6 PROVIT control characters and escape sequences

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-9

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

2.2.1. Restrictions
Display resolution: The 24 x 40 or 12 x 40 display resolution characters are simulated by
character repetition and additional blanks.

Screen background: Only one display background color can be defined.

8 colors are given for selecting the background.
When using a color screen the following environment variable must be
set:
↵]
set B&R$SCREEN=COL [↵
If the variable is not set, the emulation defaults to monochrome mode -
colors are ignored.

Bars, Rectangles: The creation of bars, rectangles and special chatacters is not directly
possible, but can be done by redefining, positioning and outputting
certain characters. .

2.2.2. software change of the output record - Esc P c x0 ... xn

For the redefinition of characters certain preconditions must be met:

- An EGA or VGA graphic card must be available in the PC.

- The following environment variable must be set before the start of the
PROgramming SYStem:
↵]
set B&R$CDEF=ON [↵

If one of these two conditions is not correct, no characters can be redefined!

The values x 0 to xn contain the bit pattern of the new character. The terminal emulation expects,
according to which graphic card is used, either 14 bytes (EGA) or 16 bytes (VGA).

Loading back the original output record - ESC P $20

The original PC output record is loaded back with this escape sequence. All character redefinitions
are canceled.

If the environment variable B&R$FDEF is set in the file defined, the output record is loaded back.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-10

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

2.2.3. Read output records of a file

In order to have several output records available for emualtion, they must be defined in a file.
When using the MAESTRO terminal emulation, this file is read. To turn on this function the
following environment variable must be set before the start of the PROgramming SYStem:
↵]
set B&R$FDEF=ON [↵
If this function is activated, the emulation (when calling with the operating command MAESTRO)
expects the file with the output record to be in the directory, where the PROgramming SYStem was
installed (default setting for the software installation: C:\PG\). This file has a different name
depending on which graphic card is installed:

Graphic card File name

EGA PRV_AEGA.DEF
VGA PRV_AVGA.DEF

Formatting the definition file

The definition file of the output record is an ASCII file, that has to correspond with a certain
format. The base format is:

<n>
<cc>
<x0> <x1> ... <x n>
<cc>
<x0> <x1> ... <x n>
:
:
:

<n> The EGA card requires a resolution of 14x8 pixels for one character and the VGA
card needs 16x8 pixels. Corresponding to the installed card, the decimal value 14 or
16 must be enterd.
<cc> The output code, that needs to be redefined, in decimal.
<x0 > to <xn> Character definition bytes. 14 or 16 hexadecimal values, that are divided by the so
called “white spaces” (blanks, tabs or line feed) depending on which card is in-
stalled.
* Comments are marked with this chatacter. All subsequent chatacters to the line end
are comments. This character must not be at the beginning of a line (see example).
Blank lines Blank lines are definitely ignored.
In a character definition file, a maximum of 256 (0 to 255) characters can be
defined.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-11

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

Example:

******************************************************************************
* PROSYS PROVIT 600 EMULATION - OUTPUT RECORD A
******************************************************************************
14 * number of character definition bytes
*** Character definition *************************************************
148 * corner top left
00 00 00 00 00 00 1F 1F 18 18 18 18 18 18
* 12345678
* 01: ........ = 00
* 02: ........ = 00
* 03: ........ = 00
* 04: ........ = 00
* 05: ........ = 00
* 06: ........ = 00
* 07: ...xxxxx = 1F
* 08: ...xxxxx = 1F
* 09: ...xx... = 18
* 10: ...xx... = 18
* 11: ...xx... = 18
* 12: ...xx... = 18
* 13: ...xx... = 18
* 14: ...xx... = 18
******************************************************************************
149 * corner top right
00 00 00 00 00 00 F8 F8 18 18 18 18 18 18
* 12345678
* 01: ........ = 00
* 02: ........ = 00
* 03: ........ = 00
* 04: ........ = 00
* 05: ........ = 00
* 06: ........ = 00
* 07: xxxxx... = F8
* 08: xxxxx... = F8
* 09: ...xx... = 18
* 10: ...xx... = 18
* 11: ...xx... = 18
* 12: ...xx... = 18
* 13: ...xx... = 18
* 14: ...xx... = 18
******************************************************************************
150 * corner bottom left
18 18 18 18 18 18 1F 1F 00 00 00 00 00 00
* 12345678
* 01: ...xx... = 18
: :
: :

Note:
The file is easier to survey and read if comments are added.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-12

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

3. EDITING THE PROGRAM IMAGE FOR

EPROM-PROGRAMMER
Command: ↵]
DUMPS <FNAME> [↵

Function: A PLC program can be stored in the PROgramming SYStem with the command
DUMPS as MOTOROLA S-Record file. This record file can now be copied with an
EPROM programmer, that has knowledge of MOTOROLA S-Records.

After entering DUMPS the PROgramming SYStem demands the definition of a file
name:

A 8 character long file name <FNAME> with drive name and path can be entered,
which should be stored in the record file. If no drive name and path is defined, the
file is stored in the default directory of the current drive.

MOTOROLA S - RECORD FILE FORMAT

Three different record types S0, S1 and S9 are used in a MOTOROLA S-Record file.

Record type S0
S0 is the Start record, and has the following format:

S0 bb yyyyyyyy xx

bb ... byte counter

yy..yy ... random hex. data
xx ... check sum

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-13

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

Record type S1
S1 is a Data record, that starts at a 16-bit load address with the following format:

S1 bb aaaa ddddddddddddddddddddddddddd xx

bb ... data bytes+address bytes+1 check sum

aaaa ... 16-bit load address
dd..dd ... data bytes (or words) up to 24 bytes per record
xx ... check sum

Record type S9
S9 is the End record and has the following format:

S9 bb yyyyyyyy xx

bb ... byte counter

yy..yy ... random hex. data
xx ... check sum

B&R offers a small, compact EPROM Programmer, that consists of three components: program-
ming device, adapter for memory modules and software. These are available with the following
model numbers:

Programming device: PGEP01-0 (including software SWPEP01-0)

Software: SWPEP01-0
Adapter for memory modules: PGEPAD01-0

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-14

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

4. MS-DOS ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

Before starting PROgramming SYStem, parameters can be submitted with environment variables at
the MS-DOS level .

The environment variables are set or deleted respectively with the DOS command set:

set ENVIRONMENT=<Parameter> set environment variable

set ENVIRONMENT= delete environment variable

4.1. TURN OFF TEST OF PARALLEL ONLINE INTERFACE

Environment variable:B&R$LPT1=NO

Function: The PROgramming SYStem quits testing the parallel online interface.

This variable is used in Novell Networks with parallel Ethernet adapters.

4.2. USING A DIFFERENT PARALLEL PORT

Environment variable:B&R$LPT_OVER=<Base address>
B&R$LPT_IRQ=<IRQ>

Parameter: <Base address> is the 4 digit hexadecimal base address of the

parallel port. 1)

<IRQ> IRQ can have one of the following values: 3,4,5,7 1)

Function: To operate the parallel interface BRKAOL5-1 from a different parallel port,
the base address of the interface and the interrupt used must be submitted to
the PROgramming SYStem with the variables that are listed above.

Example: Parallel interface operation to LPT2:

set B&R$LPT_OVER=0378
set B&R$LPT_IRQ=5

1)
More information about the base address and IRQ of the parallel port is given in the User' Manual of the PC
or is available from the dealer.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-15

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

4.3. LOADING ANOTHER KEYBOARD DRIVER

Environment variable:B&R$KBD=<File name>

Parameter: <File name> ... File name of the Keyboard Driver.

The following keyboard drivers are delivered with the PROgramming

SYStem version 5.0:

KEYB.101 German (MF 101)

[Link] Swiss
KEYB.F French
[Link] German
[Link] Italian
[Link] Spanish
[Link] Swedish
[Link] English
[Link] U.S.A.

[Link] installed keyboard driver

Function: The PROgramming SYStem loads the defined keyboard driver <file name>.

This variable is used in networks, which connect with different types of

computers.

Example: The American keyboard driver is loaded by the PROgramming SYStem.

↵]
set B&R$KBD=[Link] [↵

4.4. PRINTING A FILE

Environment variable:B&R$PRINTFILE=<File name>

Parameter: <File name> ... max. 8 character file name with path.

Function: All prints of the PROgramming SYStem are by-passed to the file <file
name>
(Chapter 9 PRINT, 6. "printing" in a file).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-16

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

4.5. MAESTRO TERMINAL EMULATION VARIABLES

Environment variable:B&R$SCREEN=COL
Function: If this environment variable si set, the representation of the terminal emula-
tion is in color, if a color screen is connected.
If the variable has not been set, or has been deleted, the display defaults to
monochrome.

Environment variable:B&R$CDEF=ON
Function: If this environment variable is set, a software redefinition of the chatacters in
the terminal emulation is possible.

Environment variable:B&R$FDEF=ON
Function: If this environment variable is set, the output record is loaded from two
definition files.

4.6. USER SPECIFIC FILES

Environment variable:B&R$NET=<Directory>
Function: All user specific files are searched or installed in the defined directory. This
environment variable is mainly used, if the PROgramming SYStem in a
network is accessable for several users.

Example: ↵]
set B&R$NET=c:\user1\private\ [↵

4.7. TEMPORARY FILES

Environment variable:B&R$VIRT=<Directory>
Function: The temporary files of the PROgramming SYStem are installed in the
defined directory.

Example: The temporary files will be installed on the virtual disk e:\ (RAM disk):
set B&R$NET=e:\ [↵ ↵]

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-17

 Appendix C ADDITIONAL INSTALLATIONS

4.8. EMS-SYMBOL MANAGEMENT

Environment variable:B&R$EMS=ON

Function: The SYMBOLs of the PROgramming SYStem are installed and controlled in
the EMS memory. At least 128 KBytes must be free in the EMS memory and
a respective driver must be installed.

Requirements
- EMS memory expansion must be available in the PC. At least 128 KBytes must be
available for the PROgramming SYStem to be able to control 8100 SYMBOLs. The
following configurations are basically necessary, to use EMS:

- 8088/8086 CPU with Expanded Memory Card and corresponding driver.

(e.g.: [Link]; this driver is usually delivered with standard DOS).

- 80286 CPU with Expanded Memory Card and corresponding driver.

80286 CPU with Extended Memory, which can also be used as Expanded
Memory. The following is possible...
...hardwarewise using NEAT chips
...softwarewise with an EMS driver

- 80386/80486 CPU with Expanded Memory CARD and respective driver.

80386/80486 CPU with Extended Memory and respective driver, which
supports the paging possibilities of the CPU, so simulating EMS.
(e.g.: 386MAX or QEMM386).

The EMS which can be used in your computer is explained in the PC description.

- Before starting PROgramming SYStem the environment variable B&R$EMS=ON

must be set.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem C-18

 Appendix D ERROR MESSAGES

APPENDIX D
ERROR MESSAGES

Contents: FATAL ERROR messages D-3

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem D-1

 Appendix D ERROR MESSAGES

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem D-2

 Appendix D ERROR MESSAGES

FATAL ERROR MESSAGES

When working with PROgramming SYStem the following FATAL ERROR messages can occur. If
a FATAL error does occur, the PROgramming SYStem ceases the program procedure and returns
to the DOS input line.

Error number Error description

Error elimination
1 V_MEM.TMx can't be opened.

If necessary increase files and buffers in the [Link] .

2 Memory access error.

3 LAD_CALL no stack.
4 SYMBOL overflow V_MEM.

5 [Link] missed (function key allocation).

Copying the file [Link] from the installation disk (insert in

drive A) to \pg directory:

↵]
C:\> cd \pg [↵
↵]
C:\PG\> copy a:\[Link] [↵

6 [Link] missed (error description, color adjustment).

The file [Link] can be newly created with the INSTALL

program. After the selection of the menu item “screen
reconfiguration” and the selection of the adequate screen the file
[Link] is created (Chapter 2 INSTALLATION,
6.1. Changing the configuration).
7 [Link] or [Link] is missing.

Copying the file [Link] or [Link] from the installation

diskette (insert in drive A) to the \pg directory:

↵]
C:\> cd \pg [↵
↵]
C:\PG\> copy a:\[Link] [↵
↵]
C:\PG\> copy a:\[Link] [↵
8 Program name is missing.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem D-3

 Appendix D ERROR MESSAGES

9 not enough RAM free

Memory resident programs like FDO, CHAD, Device Driver

(e.g.: mouse driver) and loaded output records (DOS 3.X) are, if
necessary, to be deleted.
10 [Link] is missing (keyboard allocation).

The file [Link] can be newly created with the INSTALL-

program. After the selection of the menu item “reconfigure
keyboard” and selection of the corresponding keyboard driver, the
file [Link] is created (chapter 2 INSTALLATION,
6.1. Changing the configuration).
11 [Link] is missing (control strings).

Copying the file [Link] from the installation diskette

(insert in drive A) to the \pg directory:

↵]
C:\> cd \pg [↵
↵]
C:\PG\> copy a:\[Link] [↵

12 LAD_COM no stack

13 free
14 V_MEM.TMN can't be opened (undo-buffer)

If necessary increase files and buffers in the [Link].

15 free

16 [Link] can't be loaded (PROgramming SYStem KEY-

WORDS)

Copying the file [Link] from the installation diskette (insert

in drive A) to the \pg directory:

↵]
C:\> cd \pg [↵
↵]
C:\PG\> copy a:\[Link] [↵
17 Not sufficient space for virtual files (at least 300.000 bytes)

Delete files not required from the hard disk.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem D-4

 Appendix E INDEX REGISTER

Symbols C
#LEARN# C-3 Cable 12-12, 12-17
#LOFF# C-3 COMPAQ Portable III - Control 12-18
CP80 - FOL Adapter 12-19
FOL Adapter - FOL Adapter 12-19
A Modem-Interface « Modem
Modem-Interface « Programming Device
12-13
12-12
Abbreviations 1-10 Programming Device - Control 12-17
Absolute Format 5-41 CALLBACK 11-16, 11-18
Active Values 4-47 Callback Parameter 11-25
Adapter CCITT 11-4
FOL Adapter 12-21 Centronics ONLINE Interface 12-5
ONLINE Adapter 12-20 CHAN 5-20
Address 5-13 Changing the Configuration 2-13
Address Contact 4-30 Changing the Configuration 2-13
Address Preselection 4-16, 5-12 Characters per Line 9-15
Alarm address in PLC 11-28 CLEAR 4-12, 4-42, 7-12
Alarm Callback Number 11-28 COM1 Interface 11-7
Alarm Option 11-27 Command Field 5-10
Alarm Parameters 11-29, 11-39 Command Line 3-16
AND Relation 4-34 Command Mnemonics 3-6
ASCII-Files 8-17 Comment Field 5-16
ASCII Format 5-39 Comment Line 5-9
AT Keyboard 3-14 Conditional Branch 4-33
Auto Answer Mode 11-38 Conditional Latch 4-23
Auto Baud Rate Detect 11-8 Conditional Unlatch 4-24
Connect Message 11-8
Connections 4-18
B AND 4-34
Exclusive-Or 4-29
B&R 3-11 OR 4-34
B&R ONLINE Interface 12-7 Connections
BAUD 9-20 horizontal 4-21
Baud Rate 9-15,11-7 vertical 4-22
Binary Format 5-39 Contact 4-19
Bitwise Representation 5-40 Contacts 4-18
Breakpoint Definition 5-45 Address Contact 4-30
Conditional Branch 4-33
Breakpoint Line 5-34
Conditional Unlatch 4-24
Busmaster Timeout 11-33 Conditional Latch 4-23
Contact 4-19
Exclusive-Or Connection 4-29

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem E-1

 Appendix E INDEX REGISTER

Label-Contact 7-12 ...a Table 7-12

Label Contact 4-31 ...a LAD 4-42
Latch 4-23 Deleting Files 8-22
Negation 4-20 Dial 11-13
Negative Edge Generation 4-26 DIAL 11-3, 11-10
Negation (Normally Closed Contact) 4-20
Dialing Directory 11-10
Positive Edge Generation 4-25
Positive and negative Edge Generation 4-27 DIR 8-19
Temporary Storage 4-28, 4-32 Disk Formatting 8-22
Unlatch 4-24 Display Directory 8-19
Contact Input Menu 4-18 Display on Screen 9-19
Contact Overview 4-18 Documentation 1-5, 4-40
Control Characters DOS 3-27
Modem 11-6, 11-11 DRIVE 8-3
PROVIT C-9 Dual-Port RAM 11-41, 11-46
COPY 5-28, 6-8, 7-8 Dual-Port/Log Book Address in PLC 11-28
DISK 8-21 DUMPS C-13
Copying 5-28, 6-8, 7-8
Copying Files 8-21
CP40 3-11 E
CP80 3-11
CPU Typ A 1-8 Edge Generation
CPU Typ B 1-8 negative 4-26
Cross Reference List 9-13, 9-19 positive 4-25
positive and negative 4-27
Edit Status Field 5-43
D Edit Functions
Command Line 5-20
DATE 3-25 FBK Definition 10-18
Function Block 4-59
Data Bits 11-7
Ladder Diagram 4-35
Data Format of the ASCII-Files 8-17
Logic Block 4-52
Data Formats for TABLE PROGRAMMING 7-9 Program Register 5-44
ASCII 7-10 SYMBOL Editor 6-8
Binary 7-10 TAB-Editor 7-8
Decimal 7-9 EEPROM 5-50
Hexadecimal 7-9
EMS SYMB Management 8-6, 8-11, 8-15
DDIR 3-11, 8-4
EMS Memory C-18
Debugging 1-5
Emulations
Decimal Format 5-38
Keyboard for PROVIT 1000 C-6
Default-Directory 3-7, 8-4 PROVIT 500/600 C-9
Define Breakpoints 5-45 END 3-20
Define Printer Interface 9-20 Environment variables 9-20, C-15
Definition Editor 10-8 B&R$CDEF=ON C-17
Definition Field 10-11 B&R$EMS=ON C-18
DELETE 8-22 B&R$FDEF=ON C-17
BLOCK 4-60, 5-30, 6-9, 7-8 B&R$KBD=<File name> C-16
Deleting ... B&R$LPT_IRQ=<IRQ> C-15
...the Program 3-25 B&R$LPT_OVER=<Base address> C-15
...a Sequence Chart 4-12 B&R$LPT1=NO C-15
B&R$NET=<Directory> C-17

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem E-2

 Appendix E INDEX REGISTER

B&R$PRINTFILE=<File name>
B&R$SCREEN=COL
9-20, C-16
C-17
H
B&R$VIRT=<Directory> C-17 Hang up 11-13
EPROM Programmer C-13
HAYES 11-5
Error Detection 1-5
Hexadecimal Format 5-39
Error Messages 3-3, D-3
Horizontal Connection 4-21
ESC-key 3-12
European keyboard 3-15
Exchange 5-20 I
Exchange, global 5-24
Exclusive-Or Connection 4-29 Insert Mode 5-6
EXE C-4 Input Allocations 4-16, 4-19
Extended Addressing 5-11 Input Commands 1-10
Input Line of the STL Editor 5-6
Install Program 2-13
F Installation 2-1
Installation on the Hard Disk 2-6
FATAL ERROR Messages D-3 New Installation 2-6
FBK 10-8 Substituting with a new Software Release 2-12
FBK-Definition 10-10 Integer Format 5-40
FBK-Definition Editor 10-8 Internal Memory Locations 10-6
FBK-Definition Field 10-11 Internal Timeout 11-32
FBK-Editor 1-4,10-8 Interrupt Command List 11-20
FBK-Programming, Basics 10-5
FIND 5-25
FINDL 5-27 K
FINDP 5-27
Floating Point Format 5-41 Keyboard 3-12
FOL Adapter 12-21 AT-Keyboard 3-14
ESC-Key 3-12
FORMAT 8-22
Europe-Keyboard 3-15
Format of a LEARN File C-4
Function keys 3-12
FREE 6-9 RESET-Keys 3-13
Function Plan 1-4 US-Keyboard 3-15
Function Plan Programming 4-55 XT-Keyboard 3-14
Function Key 3-12 Key Designation 1-9

G L
Global Exchange/Replace 5-24 Label Contact 7-12, 4-31
GLOBCHAN 5-24 Label Field 5-9
Label Name 3-28

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem E-3

 Appendix E INDEX REGISTER

LAD
Ladder Diagram
1-3, 4-13
1-3
M
Ladder Diagram Programming 4-13 MAESTRO C-9
LAD Cross Reference List 9-11 MIXB 3-11
LAD Status Test 4-43 MIXM 3-11
LANG 3-11 Mnemonics 3-6, 5-10
Languages in PROgramming SYStem 3-6 Model numbers
LARGE 3-26 B&R ONLINE Interface 12-7
Latch 4-23 Cable 12-17
LEARN - Function C-3 Centronics ONLINE Interface 12-5
LEARN-File FOL Adapter 12-21
Call when Starting PROgramming SYStem 3-9 ONLINE Adapter 12-20
File Format C-4 Power Supply 12-24
PROgramming SYStem 2-4
Levels 3-3,1-8, 2-4
Standard Software 10-4
LDMO 4-44
User Program Memory Module
Line Number 5-8 with Modem-Interface 12-9
Lines per Page 9-15 MODEM 11-3, 11-4
Link Establishment 11-8, 11-13 MODEM Online Interface 12-9
Link Interruption 11-13 Modem-Interface 11-3
LIST 9-3, 9-19 Modem Settings 11-9
DATA_TBL 9-19 Modem Configuration 11-4
LAB 9-19
Modem Parameters 11-30
PROG 9-19
Module Information 4-49, 5-35
SYMBOL 9-19
Load 8-9 MOTOROLA 3-11
LOAD 5-53, 8-9 MOTOROLA S - Record File C-13
ASCII 8-16 MOVE 5-30, 6-8, 7-8
DATA_TBL 8-11 MS-DOS Command Interpreter 3-27
EMSSYMB 8-15
LAD 8-14
MACRO 8-12 N
PG1000 3-22
PLC 5-53 NAME 3-24
PROG 8-9 Negation 4-20, 5-11
SYMBOLS 8-11 Negative Edge Generation 4-26
Log Book 11-41 NEW 3-25
Logic Blocks 4-51 Node Information 11-15
Logic Plan 1-4 Node List 11-14
Logic Plan Programming 4-51 Node Number 11-15
Login 11-16 Node Number Switch 12-14
Logout 11-17

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem E-4

 Appendix E INDEX REGISTER

O LARGE
LIST
3-26
9-3, 9-19
OR Connections 4-34 DATA_TBL 9-19
LAB 9-19
ONL 3-26
PROG 9-19
B&R0 3-26
SYMBOLS 9-19
COM1 3-26, 11-3, 11-14
LOAD 8-9
LPT1 3-26
ASCII 8-16
ONLINE Adapter 12-20 DATA_TBL 8-11
ONLINE Interfaces EMSSYMB 8-15
B&R 12-7 LAD 8-14
Centronics 12-5 MACRO 8-12
MODEM Online-Interface 12-9 PG1000 3-22
Operating Command Summary A-1 PLC 5-53
Operating Commands 1-10, A-1 PROG 8-9
#LEARN# C-3 SYMBOLS 8-11
#LOFF# C-3 MAESTRO C-9
B&R 3-11 MIXB 3-11
BAUD 9-20 MIXM 3-11
CHAN 5-20 MODEM 11-3, 11-4
CLEAR 4-12, 4-42, 7-12 MOTOROLA 3-11
COPY 5-28, 6-8, 7-8 MOVE 5-30, 6-8, 7-8
DISK 8-21 NAME 3-24
CP40 3-11 NEW 3-25
CP80 3-11 ONL 3-26
DATA_TBL 7-3 B&R0 3-26
DATE 3-25 COM1 3-26, 11-3, 11-14
DDIR 3-11, 8-4 LPT1 3-26
DEBUG 5-32 P-VERS 5-54
DELETE 8-22 PAR 9-20
BLOCK 4-60, 5-30, 6-9, 7-8 PC 3-11
DIAL 11-3, 11-10 PMEN 9-3
DIR 8-19 PRINT 9-3, 9-17
DOS 3-27 DATA_TBL 9-18
DRIVE 8-3 LAB 9-18
DUMPS C-13 PROG 9-17
EEPROM 5-50 SYMBOLS 9-18
END 3-20 RENAME 8-22
EXE C-4 RNT 5-49
FIND 5-25 RUN 4-11, 5-31
FINDL 5-27 RUN P 5-49
FINDP 5-27 S_LIST 5-4
FORMAT 8-22 SAVE 8-5
FREE 6-9 ASCII 8-8
FBK 10-8 DATA_TBL 8-6
GLOBCHAN 5-24 LAD 8-6
LAD 4-13 MACRO 8-7
LDMO 4-44 PG1000 3-23
LANG 3-11

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem E-5

 Appendix E INDEX REGISTER

PROG 8-6 Principal Setting in the Modem 11-9

SYMBOLS 8-6 PRINT 9-3, 9-17
SDIR 3-11, 8-4 DATA_TBL 9-18
SEQCHART 4-5 LAB 9-18
SER 9-20 PROG 9-17
SMALL 3-26 SYMBOLS 9-18
STANDBY 11-3, 11-35 “Printing ” in a File 9-20
SYMBOLS 6-4
Printing ... 9-7
TERM C-6
... Cross Reference Lists 9-13
UDIR 3-11, 8-4
... FBK-Lists 9-10
XFER 5-55
.. Ladder Diagrams 9-9
XREF 9-19
... LAD Addresses 9-10
WINDOW 3-18
... LAD Codes 9-14
Operating Modes of Modem Interfaces 12-12
... LAD Lists 9-10
... with Modem 12-13
... LAD SEQCHARTs 9-11
... without Modem 12-12 ... Programs 9-7
Operating Modes of the PROgramming SYStem 1- ... Sequence Charts 9-9
8, 3-7 ... Symbols 9-9
Output Allocations 4-16, 4-19 ... Symbol Tables 9-8
... Tables 9-7
... Titles 9-8
P Private Memory Locations 10-7
Program Date 3-25
P-VERS 5-54 Program Documentation 1-5
PAR 9-20 Programming the S-EEPROMs 11-21
Page Beginning 9-15 Program Information 5-54
Parallel Interface 9-15 Program Name 3-24
Parameters of COM1 Interface 11-7 Program Register Editing 5-44
Parity 11-7 Program Step Number 5-8
Password entering/altering 11-22 Programming the S-EEPROM 11-22
Password Programming 11-23 PROVIT 1000 - Keyboard Emulation C-6
Path 4-16 PROVIT 500/600 Emulation C-9
Password Check System 11-17 PROVIT-Control Character C-9
PC 3-11 Processor Status Line 5-34
PC Output Record 9-16
PG-PC Mode 1-6
PG1000 1-6, 3-22 R
Switching from PC to PG1000 3-23
Switching from PG1000 to PC 3-22 RENAME 8-22
PG1000 Mode 1-6 Rename Files 8-22
PMEN 9-3 Replace 5-20
Pointer Format 5-42 Replace, global 5-24
Portable PC Configuration 2-5 Response to Establishment of Link 11-37
Positive Edge Generation 4-25 Alarm Callback 11-37
Power Supply 12-24 Call cannot be identified 11-37
Normal Callback 11-37

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem E-6

 Appendix E INDEX REGISTER

Safety Callback 11-37 Statement List Mnemonics 3-6

RESET 5-47
RESET Keys 3-13 User-Directory 3-8
RNT 5-49 Statement List 1-4
RUN 4-11, 5-31 STAT 5-32
RUN P 5-49 Station Status 11-19
STATUS 11-19
Status of the Link 11-15
S Status Field 4-48, 5-36
Display Format 5-38
S-EEPROM 11-17, 11-21 Absolute Format 5-41
S-Record File C-13 ASCII Format 5-39
Safety Callback 11-16, 11-25 Binary Format 5-39
Safety Callback Number 11-26 Bitwise Representation 5-40
Decimal Format 5-38
Saving 8-5
Floating Point Format 5-41
SAVE 8-5 Hexadecimal Format 5-39
ASCII 8-8 Integer Format 5-40
DATA_TBL 8-6 Pointer Format 5-42
LAD 8-6 Editing 5-43
MACRO 8-7 Status Test
PG1000 3-23
Ladder Diagram 4-43
PROG 8-6
STL 5-31
SYMBOLS 8-6
STL 1-4, 5-4
SDIR 3-11, 8-4
STL 4-5
Search 5-25, 6-9
STL Program of a FBK 10-16
Search and List 5-27
STL Status Test 5-31
Search and Print 5-27
Stop Bits 11-7
SELECT 11-18
Switching from PC to PG1000 3-23
Sequence chart 4-5
Switching from PG1000 to PC 3-22
SER 9-20
SYMBOLS 1-4, 6-4
SMALL 3-26
SYMB Editor 6-4
Single Step Operation 5-48
SYMB Mode 4-17
Standard Directory 3-8, 8-4
SYMBOL Field 5-16
Standard Function Blocks 10-3
Symbol Tables 9-8
Standard Symbols 3-9
System Reset 3-21
Standard Software 10-3
STANDBY 11-3, 11-35
Standby Operation
Standby after Initiating a Callback
11-35
11-38
T
Starting a Program 4-11 TAB 7-3
Start-up Parameters 3-5 TAB-Editor 7-3
Calling up a LEARN File 3-9 Tables 1-5
Default-Directory 3-7 Table Beginning 7-11
Languages in the Programming System 3-6
Table Header 7-11
Mnemonics 3-6
Table Length 7-4, 7-11
Operating Mode 3-7
Start-up Parameter File 3-10 Table Programming 7-9
Standard-Directory 3-8 Tabulators 3-17
Standard Symbols 3-9 Temporary Storage 4-28, 4-32

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem E-7

 Appendix E INDEX REGISTER

TERM
Terminal Emulation
C-6
11-5
W
Text Insert Mode 3-27 Wait Character "~" 11-5
Time base WINDOW 3-18
Alarm scanning/Online 11-28 Window Definition 3-18
Alarm scanning/Slaves 11-28 Window Techniques 3-18

U X
UDIR 3-11, 8-4 XFER 5-55
Unlatch 4-24 XT-Keyboard 3-14
UPDATE 11-17 XREF 9-19
US-Keyboard 3-15
User-Directory 3-8, 8-4
User Level 11-22, 11-24

V
Version Number 3-3
...of CP60/80 System Module 3-3
...of PROgramming SYStem 3-3
Vertical Connection 4-22

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem E-8

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

APPENDIX F
PROGRAMMING SYSTEM CHANGES
VERSION 5.50

Contents: Corrections and Additions

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-3
PROgramming SYStem Changes
from Version 5.40 to 5.50 F-11
New Functions (Flash PROM Programming)
for PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50 F-15

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-1

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-2

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS for the

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem (5th Edition)

CHAPTER 2 - INSTALLATION

4. PORTABLE PC CONFIGURATIONS (Page2-5)

One very important step in having a problem free B&R PROgramming SYStem is the proper
configuration in the PC's setup menu. With the wrong configuration, the B&R PROgramming
SYStem will only run partially or not at all.

The next few pages show configuration menus for programming devices which are offered by
B&R.

- Toshiba T1200
- Toshiba T1600
- Toshiba T3100e
- Toshiba T5200 with PC-Interface
- Toshiba T5200 with Toshiba-Interface

Parameters to be used for trouble free operation of the B&R PROgramming SYStem are printed
within the configuration in bold !

4.1. SETUP MENU FOR THE TOSHIBA T1200

Internal Floppy Disk Drives: 1 Drive 2 Drives
Built-in Modem: Disable Enable
Power On Resume: Disable Enable
Primary Display Type:
Other Type Color[40*25] Monochrome Color[80*25]
Built-in RS-232C Port Assign.: COM1 COM2
Printer Port Bi-directional: Disable Enable
Lower Battery Speaker Alarm: Disable Enable
System Speaker: Disable Enable
Built-in Expanded Memory Port Address:
208H 218H 258H 268H 2B8H 2E8H Disable
Hard Ram Size:
0KB 128KB 192KB 256KB 320KB 384KB
Keyboard Type: 84-keys 101-keys

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-3

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

4.2. SETUP MENU FOR THE TOSHIBA T1600

SYSTEM SETUP
- Performance - - Memory -
Resume Mode = Boot Total = 1024 KB
BIOS = RAM Convential = 640 KB
CPU Sleep Mode = Disable Hard RAM = 0 KB
HDD Auto Off = Disable EMS = 0 KB
Display Auto Off = Disable Extended = 256 KB

- Communications -
- System - Serial A = COM1
System Speaker = On Serial B = COM2
Battery Alarm = On
Extended FDD = ( A:, B: ) Parallel PRT = Bidirectional Port

- Display -
Display Type = ( Enhanced Color, Standard Color, Monochrome )
Internal EGA = Enable
Internal Display = ( 8*14, 8*16 )
Gray Scale Mode = Off
Auto Gray Scale = Off

Instruction

The selections "HDD Auto Off" and "Display Auto Off" must stay set to "Disable".

4.3. SETUPMENU FOR THE TOSHIBA T3100e

4.3.1 T3100e with DOS 3.30

1. Hard disk type = 11 - Cyl= 615, H= 4, S/T= 17, Cap= 20MB

2. Memory size
System memory = 640KB
Extended memory = 0MB
Expanded memory = 0MB + 384KB
3. Internal KB type = 84 Keys
4. Plasma font type = Single
5. Plasma font set = Standard
6. Display card = Internal CGA (80*25)
7. Card type in Expansion slot = Toshiba modem
8. Printer port type = Output port
9. Serial port
IRQ5 SIO base address = 3E8h
Serial A IRQ level = 4 (I/O base address = 3F8h)
Serial B IRQ level = Not used
Optional port IRQ level = 3 (I/O base address = 2F8h)

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-4

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

4.3.2. T3100e with DOS 4.00

System Configuration Setup

Time: 09:55:02
Date: Fri Dec 20, 1991
Cyl H Sec Cap
Hard Disk Setting: Type 11 615 4 17 20
Base Memory: 640KB
Extended memory: 0.0MB
Expanded memory: 0.0MB + 384KB
Internal Kybd Type: 84 Keys
Plasma Font Type: Single
Plasma Font Set: Standard
Display Card: Internal CGA (80*25)
Expansion Card: Toshiba modem
Printer Port Type Output

Up and Down Arrow to select entries

Left and Right Arrow to change entries
PgUp for Toshiba Serial Port Options
F1 to Exit. F5 to Set Default Values. F10 to reboot.

By pressing the [PgUp] key the following menu appears:

Toshiba Serial Port Interrupt Levels

Time: 09:55:06
Date: Fri Dec 20, 1991

Serial Port Interrupt Level Selection

Serial Port A Serial Port BDedicated Modem

IRQ Level LRQ Level IRQ Level

4 Not Used 3

IRQ4 Serial Port Base Address = 3F8H

IRQ3 Serial Port Base Address = 2F8H
IRQ5 Serial Port Base Address = 3E8H

Up and Down Arrow to select entries

Left and Right Arrow to change entries
PgUp for standard Setup options
F1 to Exit. F5 to Set Default Values. F10 to reboot.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-5

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

4.4. SETUP MENU FOR THE TOSHIBA T5200

WITH PC-INTERFACE BRIFPC-0

1. Hard disk type = 11 - Cyl= 805, H= 4, S/T= 26, Cap= 40MB

2. Memory size
System memory = 640KB
Extended memory = 1MB
Expanded memory = 0MB + 288KB (95KB used as a fast ROM)
3. Display
Plasma display adapter = VGA compatible
Display device = Plasma
Plasma display mode = Color
Plasma gray scale = Normal: Semi-bright Intense: Bright
4. Printer port type = Output Port
5. Serial port
IRQ5 SIO base address = 3E8h
Serial A IRQ level = 4 (I/O base address = 3F8h)
Serial B IRQ level = Not used
Toshiba modem IRQ level = Not used
6. Bus speed = Normal

4.5. SETUP MENU FOR THE TOSHIBA T5200

WITH TOSHIBA-INTERFACE BRIFTO-0

1. Hard disk type = 11 - Cyl= 805, H= 4, S/T= 26, Cap= 40MB

2. Memory size
System memory = 640KB
Extended memory = 1MB
Expanded memory = 0MB + 288KB (95KB used as a fast ROM)
3. Display
Plasma display adapter = VGA compatible
Display device = Plasma
Plasma display mode = Color
Plasma gray scale = Normal: Semi-bright Intense: Bright
4. Printer port type = Output Port
5. Serial port
IRQ5 SIO base address = 3E8h
Serial A IRQ level = 4 (I/O base address = 3F8h)
Serial B IRQ level = Not used
Toshiba modem IRQ level = 3 (I/O base address = 2F8h)
6. Bus speed = Normal

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-6

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

CHAPTER 3 - INTRODUCTION

10.8 UTILIZING LABELS (Page 3-28)

Labels are symbolic addresses which are necessary for structured programming. A PROgramming
SYStem user utilizes labels in many different places:

- STL-labels, can be assigned to every program line.

- LAD-names are labels, which show up in an STL translation.
- Labels can be used in LADs => Label Contact (see Chapter 4 “3.6. Contacts and
Connections”)
- TAB-names are labels, which do not show up in an STL.
- SEQC-names are labels, which show up in an STL translation.
- FBK-names are labels, which sow up in an STL translation.

NOTE:
A label must begin with a letter and is up to four characters long.
The number of labels is restricted to max. 1499. When labels are deleted (e.g. by
editing a program line and deleting a label field), they remain in the PROgramming
SYStem memory. This memory area only becomes free after a Run-Test (RNT) or a
RUN is executed.

Operation commands such as LIST, RUN, COPY, MOVE etc. can also be used as label names.
These names can be used freely in the STL editor. To enable these label entries in the command
line, you must insert the name between quotation marks .

Example: To save a program part from the label LIST until line 1000 as a macro the following
line must be entered:

↵]
[F8 SAVE] <FNAME> [F5 MACRO] [F1 FROM] "LIST" [F2 UP_TO] 1000 [↵

To go directly to the STL program line with the label LIST for STL editing, you
must enter "LIST" in the command line.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-7

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

12. INCOMPATIBILITY OF PROGRAM

TRANSLATION TO CP80 MODE

Address range with indexed addressing:

X -128 to X +127

Make sure with STL commands that:

MUL Zero Flag is influenced

TAB Status register is not changed
TBA Status register is not changed
LSRD Zero Flag is not defined
ASLD Zero Flag is not defined

Step sequencer:

If a CP40 program uses a step sequencer and is translated to CP60/CP80 mode, care should be
taken that steps which are not used in the step sequence are not executed with RTS but with JMP
instead. In using the 1 byte command RTS, step sequencing is no longer guaranteed. With the 3
byte command JMP <LABEL> and an RTS with the <LABEL>, the step sequence functions
correctly again. .
Program in CP40: Program in CP80:

0 LDAA R0000 0 LDAA R0000

1 JSR SSW 3 JSR SSW
2 END 6 NOP
3 Byte
3 JMP S1 7 END
4 NOP 9 JMP S1
5 RTS 12 JMP LAB1
6 JMP S2 15 JMP LAB1
7 JMP S3 18 JMP S2
: 21 JMP S3
: 22 LAB1 RTS
:
:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-8

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

CHAPTER 5 - STATEMENT LIST PROGRAMMING

3. STL EDITOR STRUCTURE (Pages 5-4 and 5-5)

a) Status line:

NOTE:
A label must begin with a letter and is up to four characters long.
The number of labels is restricted to max. 1499. When labels are deleted (e.g. by
editing a program line and deleting a label field), they remain in the PROgramming
SYStem memory. This memory area only becomes free after a Run-Test (RNT) or a
RUN is executed.

7.2.2. DEBUG (Page 5-32)

Command: ↵]
DEBUG [↵

Function: The debug menu is called. The program is not sent to the PLC-CPU.

If anything is wrong with the PLC connection (programming device interface defect,
online cable not connected etc.) the following corresponding messages can be
displayed:

E052 MISSING ONLINE INTERFACE CARD

E056 PLC DISCONNECTED
E057 PLC ERROR

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-9

 Appendix F User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem Corrections and Additions (5th Edition)

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-10

 Appendix F User's Manual PROgramming SYStem Changes Version 5.50

PROGRAMMING SYSTEM CHANGES FROM

VERSION 5.40 TO 5.50

1. REQUIREMENTS
To install the PROgramming SYStem you need at least 540 KBytes (552.960 bytes) of free space
within your 640 Kbyte DOS memory to run the software without problems.

2. COMMAND CHANGES

2.1. RANGE DEFINITION

The range definitions (FROM, UP_TO, #) for the following commands have been changed to:

❍ CHAN <Range>
❍ FIND <Range>
❍ FINDL <Range>
❍ FINDP <Range>
❍ COPY <Range> <Destination>
❍ MOVE <Range> <Destination>
❍ CLEAR BLOCK <Range> (was DELETE BLOCK <Range>)
❍ SAVE <FNAME> MACRO <Range>
❍ LOAD MACRO <FNAME> <Destination>

A range to be searched for, copied or moved are now only defined with the FROM and UP_TO
commands. The following are no longer possible.

❍ # (Length of the range in lines)

❍ current cursor position
Example: A search with FIND (FINDL, FINDP) for the range from the current
cursor position to line 3000:
↵]
FIND UP_TO 3000 [↵ is no longer possible
In its place the full range must be defined:
↵]
FIND FROM 1200 UP_TO 3000 [↵

The softkey line allocation has been adjusted slightly to compensate for the changes made.

With the commands MOVE, COPY and LOAD MACRO the destination <Destination> with
TO <LN/LB/ADDR> must be entered. The destination is not determined by the current cursor
position.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-11

 Appendix F User's Manual PROgramming SYStem Changes Version 5.50

2.2. LOADING, SAVING, ...

Saving Macros
If saving a macro from an STL, SYMB or TAB the desired editor no longer must be entered with
the command.

OLD: SAVE <FNAME> MACRO STL/SYMB/TAB <Range>

NEW: SAVE <FNAME> MACRO <Range>

The macro is now saved from the editor (STL, SYMB or TAB) which is currently active.

Saving a part of a TAB or SYMB in ASCII format

If saving a TAB or a SYMB part in ASCII format the desired editor no longer must be entered
with the command.

OLD: SAVE <FNAME> ASCII SYMB/TAB <Range>

NEW: SAVE <FNAME> ASCII <Range>

The corresponding part to be saved comes from the active editor.

Loading Macros
If loading a macro from an STL, SYMB or a TAB the desired editor no longer must be entered
with the command.

OLD: LOAD MACRO <FNAME> STL/SYMB/TAB <Destination>

NEW: LOAD MACRO <FNAME> <Destination>

The macro is now loaded from the editor (STL, SYMB or TAB) which is currently active.

Loading a part of a TAB or SYMB in ASCII format

If loading parts of a TAB or SYMB the desired editor must be entered with the command.

↵]
LOAD ASCII SYMB <FNAME> [↵
↵]
LOAD ASCII TAB <TNAME> <FNAME> [↵

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-12

 Appendix F User's Manual PROgramming SYStem Changes Version 5.50

Display Directory
The output of one file type (display of files with a certain extension) is no longer possible. The
following entries are possible:

↵]
DIR [↵ Default directory display
↵]
DIR <NAME> [↵ Display the directory with the name entered

NOTE:
To display files with a certain extension the LOAD command can be used.
If, for example, all program files in the default directory should be displayed the
following command is entered.
↵]
LOAD PROG [↵

Copying, Renaming and Deleting Files

The COPY DISK, RENAME and DELETE commands have been changed. Instead of the file type
(PROG, SYMB, TAB, ...) the file name together with the extension is now entered.

↵]
OLD: COPY DISK <File type> <FNAME1> TO <FNAME2> [↵
↵]
NEW: COPY DISK <[Link]> <[Link]> [↵

↵]
OLD: RENAME <File type> <FNAME1> TO <FNAME2> [↵
↵]
NEW: RENAME <[Link]> <[Link]> [↵

↵]
OLD: DELETE <File type> <FNAME> [↵
↵]
NEW: DELETE <[Link]> [↵

2.3. PRINTING

Printing and listing programs or program parts

The following commands are no longer available:

PRINT PROG <Range> LIST PROG <Range>

PRINT SYMB <Range> LIST SYMB <Range>
PRINT TAB <Range> LIST TAB <Range>
PRINT LAB LIST LAB
XREF

Only selections possible from the print menu are available (can be called with DMEN, PRINT or
LIST).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-13

 Appendix F User's Manual PROgramming SYStem Changes Version 5.50

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-14

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

NEW FUNCTIONS for the

PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50
The FlashPROM Menu A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
● ● ● ● ●

When the function EEPROM [↵ ↵] is selected in the command line of the PROgramming SYStem,
the following menu is displayed if a FlashPROM is utilized:
PLC status
window

Selection
window for
FlashPROM
functions
Programming
status

Messages to
the user

Softkey line

PLC Status Window

Additional information: A = Arithmetic processor
S = Serial interface

Program date
Program name

Module type
Module series
CPU operating
Program run in system version
RAM/PROM number

Processor status:
CPU operating HALT/RUN
system version date

PROM type
User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-15
 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

Programming Status
This window shows the type of FlashPROM access while functions are being executed. The
following messages may be displayed:

READ: xx xx xx
FORMAT: xx xx xx
PROGRAM: xx xx xx

Address in FlashPROM changes constantly while

functions are being completed.

Function Key Assignments

[F1 STOP] This function stops the program in the controller. This is indicated in the
PLC status window with “HALT”.

The controller status does not change. Outputs are not reset; the current
status remains.

CAUTION: Outputs, which control motors for example, remain set.

[F2 VERIFY] Compares programs in PROM and RAM.

If both programs are identical, the following is displayed:

W247 EEPROM Verify OK !

If the programs are not identical, this error message is displayed:

E167 Verify NOT OK ! (WP,NOT EMPTY, DEFECT)?

[F3 PROM>RAM] Copies program from PROM to RAM.

The controller must be switched to PROM, otherwise this error message is

displayed:

E170 COPY PROM TO RAM ONLY IF PLC IN PROM MODE

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-16

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

[F4 RAM] Switches PLC to RAM (Switching occurs in the END routine).
Program in RAM is run.

[F5 PROM] Switches PLC to PROM (Switching occurs in the END routine).
Program in PROM is run.

[F6 CONT] If the PLC CPU is in HALT mode, the program is continued in the PLC.

[F7 RESET] The PLC is halted and reset to a defined base setting.
All outputs are cleared.

[F8 EXIT] or [Esc] Exits the FlashPROM menu.

Function Selection Window

Select a function with the [❖] keys, then confirm it with [↵], which activates the function.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-17

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

FlashPROM Information
When you select this function, a window which provides information on the FlashPROM appears.

Chip 1
Chip 2
Chip 3
Chip 4

Function keys:

[F8 EXIT] or [Esc] Closes the window and returns you to the FlashPROM menu.

Info window:

System copy exists: Y The system module including the PLC program has
been programmed in the FlashPROM (chip 1).
N Chip 1 has not been programmed. (But there may be
system or user data on the blocks that are not reserved
for the PLC program.)
WP front: WP The WE/WP switch on the front of the FlashPROM
module is set to WE (= write-protected).
WE The WE/WP on the front of the FlashPROM module is
set to WE (=write-enabled).
WP chip 2-4: WE or WP With a jumper on the FlashPROM module you can
select whether chips 2 - 4 are always set to WE, or if
they should match the WP front switch.
Number of chips: n Number of memory blocks in the FlashPROM module
(1 or 3; 1 ⇒ FP128, 3 ⇒ FP384).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-18

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

The following information is given for each chip.

Chip size in Kbytes: xxx Chip storage capacity (e.g. 128 Kbytes)
Format version: xx xx System module version number
Format date: xxxxxx Date of format received from real-time clock in the
CPU
Format time: xx:xx Time of format received from real-time clock in the
CPU
Format amount: xxxxx Indicates how many times the chip has been formatted
(e.g. 038 = the chip has been formatted 38 times)

Programming PLC Program

The current PLC program in the CPU RAM is to be programmed to chip 1 of the FlashPROM along
with the system module.

If you select this function with the [❖] keys and activate it with [↵], the CPU must be in the
following mode:

- the CPU must be in HALT mode

- the CPU must be SET to RAM

If one of these conditions is not met, one of the following error messages is displayed in the
message line:

E249 Function only possible if PLC in HALT mode !

E222 Function only possible in RAM mode !

If chip 1 of the FlashPROM has just been formatted, the PLC program and the system module are
programmed immediately. Otherwise, the entire chip is reformatted (approx. 1 minute).

If system or user data is stored on the chip, however, the following question appears in the message
line:

W302 FlashPROM also used otherwise ! SAVE (Y/N/ESC)?

[Esc] The function is aborted and you return to the FlashPROM menu.

[N] Chip 1 is formatted, the PLC program and the system module are programmed.

Caution: User and system data is deleted!

[Y] - All user and system data found on chip 1 is saved in a tempory file on the hard disk
of the PG.
- Chip 1 is formatted.
- The PLC program and the system module are programmed.
- The saved user and system data is programmed again.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-19

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

Programming B&R System Data 1)

When this function is selected, a list of all B&R system data files which are located in the default
directory appears for you to choose from.

Key FUNCTION

[F1 NEXTDIR] If one of the directories is marked (directory - indicated by <DIR>), it

will be opened. The contents of this directory will be displayed. This
function corresponds to the DOS command “cd <directory
name>”.
[F2 PREVDIR]
The previous directory is returned to and its contents are displayed. [F2
PREVDIR] corresponds to the DOS command “cd ..”.
[F3 DEFDIR]
The current directory is defined as the default directory of the current
[F6 SELECT] drive.
↵]
[↵
The system file chosen with the [❖] keys is selected.
[F7 PRINT]

[F8 EXIT] The directory displayed on the screen is printed out.

[Esc]
Exit returns you to the FlashPROM menu.
1) B&R system data is offered by B&R for various applications. (e.g. boot table for the MAC1).

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-20

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

When you select a system file with [F6 SELECT] or [↵], a window is displayed for entering the
FlashPROM block number (default value from the system file has already been entered). Various
information is given which is read from the header of the system file. The block number indicates
the target address in the FlashPROM where the system file is to be programmed.

The default value of the block number can be changed.

Blinking
Cursor

[F1 PROGRAM]

1) If the necessary blocks are free starting with the indicated block number, the selected
system file is programmed in the FlashPROM as module and entered in the module direc-
tory. In this case, the keys [F2 FORMAT] and [F3 DELETE] are not active. If they are
pressed, the appropriate message will appear in the message line.

2) If a module of the same name already exists on the FlashPROM (with the same or different
version number), it is displayed in an additional window under the first one. The appropri-
ate message is displayed in the message line:

In this case, the function key [F3 DELETE] is active.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-21

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

3) If the necessary blocks are not free starting with the indicated block number, this is shown
in the message line and a FlashPROM memory map is displayed. The overlapping areas are
marked in this map.

Overlapping
Area

The memory map can be exited with [F8 EXIT] or [Esc]. You now have the following options:
1) You can enter the number of a block that is free and program it to the FlashPROM with
[F1_PROGRAM].
2) You can format the necessary chips with the function [F2 FORMAT].

[F2 FORMAT]
The necessary chips are formatted.

[F3 DELETE]
If there is a module with the same name as the one to be programmed to the FlashPROM, the
module that is already there can be deleted from the module directory with this function. The
blocks occupied by the deleted module are not free, however; they can only be used again after
the chip has been reformatted. These modules are distinguished by lower-case letters in the
memory map (S => s, U => u).

[F8 EXIT] or [Esc]

Returns you to the FlashPROM menu.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-22

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

Formatting FlashPROM
When you select this function, a window appears where you can select whether all chips or
individual chips are to be formatted (deleted).

If the CPU is in RUN mode, the following error message is displayed:

E249 Function only possible if PLC in HALT mode !
HALT mode is selected for the CPU with [F1 STOP] or [F7 RESET] !

If the CPU is in HALT mode, the following window is opened:

Select a chip by moving the cursor up and down with the key [↑] and [↓]. Start formatting the chips
by confirming your choice with [↵]. (One chip takes approximately 50 seconds.)

If a chip is not present, this is shown in the message line:

E230 Chip not present !

If the CPU is in PROM mode, the following message is displayed:

E222 Function only possible in RAM mode !

If the CPU is in RAM mode, the chip selected is formatted.

Install Communication Services

The communication services module is usually transferred to the PLC and installed in the CPU
RAM in RUN mode. If there is operating trouble (power down, run-down accumulator, or no
battery in power supply unit), this module can be destroyed. With this function, the FlashPROM
communication services are installed without the need of a preceding RUN.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-23

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

Memory Map
This function gives you information on FlashPROM distribution. It offers an overview of all
occupied blocks in the PROM (1 block => 4 Kbytes). Each block contains a one-character code for
the type of occupancy:

R ........ reserved for PLC program and system module

D ........ directory (data is stored here for all blocks on a chip and their occupancy)
? ......... chip not formatted
U ........ user data 1)
u ......... “deleted” user data (entry in directory deleted)
S ......... B&R system data
s ......... “deleted” B&R system data (entry in directory deleted)
+ ......... chip not present

Note: Blocks with "deleted" user or B&R system data can be programmed
only after the chip has been reformatted.

The memory map has the following format:

1)
Not currently available. This function is being developed.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-24

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

Physical Backup
All occupied blocks of one or more chips are saved. The user can make one of the following
selections in the window.

With keys [↑] and [↓], either all chips or an individual chip is selected. The selection is confirmed
with [↵]. If the selected chip does not exist, an error message is displayed in the message line:

E230 Chip not present !

If the selected chip is present, a window is opened where a file name without extension must be
entered.

The physical backup is stored under this name in the default directory with the extension “.PHY”.
Any path name with drive code can also be entered in front of the file name (e.g:
A:\BACKUP\CHIP1).

After the file name is confirmed with [↵], the backup will be done.

If there are no occupied blocks on the chip, the following message is displayed:

E244 Chip not defined !

Only data with the proper module header is saved (system and user data).
The PLC program is not saved with a physical backup.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-25

 Appendix F New Functions for the PROgramming SYStem Version 5.50

Programming Physical Backup

When this function is activated (CPU must be in HALT mode), all files with the extension “.PHY”
are listed. The desired backup file can be selected with the [↑] and [ ↓] keys.

Key FUNCTION
[F1 NEXTDIR] If one of the directories is marked (directory - indicated by <DIR>), it
will be opened. The contents of this directory will be displayed. This
function corresponds to the DOS command “cd <directory
name>”.
[F2 PREVDIR]
The previous directory is returned to and its contents are displayed. [F2
PREVDIR] corresponds to the DOS command “cd ..”.
[F3 DEFDIR]
The current directory is defined as the default directory of the current
[F6 SELECT] drive.
↵]
[↵
The backup file chosen with the [❖] keys is selected.
[F7 PRINT]
[F8 EXIT] The directory displayed on the screen is printed out.
[Esc]
Exit returns you to the FlashPROM menu.

All blocks saved in the backup file are programmed again in their original positions in the
FlashPROM. For this reason, all required blocks must be free. Otherwise, the function is inter-
rupted with an error message.

E245 Function not possible ! One/more blocks occupied !

If blocks that should be saved on a chip which is not present on the PROM module are saved in the
backup file, this is recognized, and the function is interrupted with the following error message:

E250 Restore - required chip not present !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem F-26

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

APPENDIX G
PROGRAMMING SYSTEM UPDATES
VERSION 5.60

Contents: 1. Program Comparison G-3

1.1 General Information G-3
1.2. Comparison Procedures G-3
1.3. Change COMPARE Configuration G-4
1.4. Starting the Comparison G-9
1.5. Continue Compare G-11
2. Marking Functions G-13
Marking an Area G-13
Unmarking an Area G-13
Moving a Marked Area G-14
Copying a Marked Area G-14
Copy to Temporary Memory G-15
Deleting a Marked Area G-15
Inserting from Temporary Memory G-15
3. Print Menu G-16
4. PLC Memory Location Up / Download G-20
4.1. General G-20
4.1. Menu Call G-20
LOAD DATA FROM PLC G-21
STORE DATA TO PLC G-21
RESET PLC G-22
CONTINUE PLC G-22
5. Additional Changes G-23
5.1. Start parameter STDSYM G-23
5.2. Two Window Operation G-23

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-1

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-2

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

1. PROGRAM COMPARISON A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ●

1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION

Quite often a project must be developed in segments by different people or in fact by several
groups of people e.g. visualization by one group and the logic by another. In the initial stages of
operation the software can be modified again and again. These problems which arise can lead to a
degree of uncertainty in the exact state of development. In this case it is necessary to compare
programs or sub-programs.

Another case for the use of program comparisons within an application could be the absence of for
the valid documented version. This can be caused if, for example, changes are made to the structure
without updating the documented version or if the current software is lost because of a diskette
failure. Now, what is left is a program without documentation (LOAD from PLC) and an old
documented version. With the new COMPARE command these two programs can be checked for
differences which can be easily changed.

1.2. COMPARISON PROCEDURES

In principle a program in window one can be compared with a program in window two, which
means that no PLC is required for the procedure. If the last valid program is available in the PLC it
must be loaded from the PLC to one of the windows with the LOAD PLC command. The second
program is loaded in the other window. By entering the COMPCFG command now the COMPARE
command configuration is set. In most cases the standard settings are correct.

By all means the report function and auto mode should be switched on the first time that COM-
PARE is run. This causes the entire program to be searched for differences which are then reported.
This report of the differences can either be printed out through the serial or parallel interface or
they can be saved in a file. From these the amount of difference between the two programs can be
recognized immediately.

The second time COMPARE is run, either changes can be made directly line for line by going
through the report or auto mode and the report function can be switched off and the routine can be
restarted. When auto mode is off the routine will stop every time there is a difference and the
corresponding corrections can then be made. By entering the COMPCONT command the routine is
continued.

If individual lines in a window should be copied to the other window the "Mark" function is very
helpful. Of course it is possible to call other commands between steps in the COMPARE routine
such as e.g. "LOAD MACRO" etc.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-3

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

1.3. CHANGE COMPARE CONFIGURATION

Command: COMPCFG [↵]
Function: Calls a menu to modify the COMPARE configuration.

General Parameters
Match:
If the COMPARE operation is stopped because of a difference between the two programs it can
be restarted with the COMPCONT command. After the COMPARE operation is continued the
PROgramming SYStem searches for lines in both programs which are identical. This procedure
is known as synchronization. COMPARE is however only continued now if the amount of lines
defined for Match are identical, otherwise the function is interrupted with an error message.
A more precise explanation is given in the description of the COMPCONT command.

Resync:
If, during the synchronization, within the number of lines defined for Resync no block of
identical lines (defined in Match) is found the function is broken with an error message.
This procedure is explained in more detail under the COMPCONT command description.

Report:
A report of differences can be made with the PROgramming SYStem by executing the COM-
PARE function. The report function can be switched on or off from this position in the menu
with Y / N. The user can also define here with Y / N whether the report should be in short form.
This report can be either printed through one of the interface ports with a setting in the print
menu or put into a file.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-4

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

Auto Mode:
If Auto Mode is switched on the COMPARE function will not be interrupted when it comes to
a difference in program structure. This mode is only useful when used in connection with the
report function!

Statement List
Entire statement lists can either be compared with one another or not by selecting either Y or N
which turns the statement list comparison parameter on or off.

Sequential:
The behaviour of synchronization after the COMPCONT command can be influenced with this
option.

y Sequential Synchronization: After the COMPCONT command is entered and if those lines
according to the definitions for Match and Resync are found to be identical the following
lines are searched. This search procedure is explained in detail in the COMPCONT com-
mand description.
N Label synchronization: After the COMPCONT command is entered, the FIXED-window is
searched for the next label. When it is found the PROgramming SYStem searches the
second window for the same label and the compare is started again. This method is used if
an STL translation of a LAD is in different locations within the two STLs (when a LAD is
changed the old STL translation is deleted and the new translation is added to the end of the
STL).

Addresses relative:
Labels (for branch instructions etc.) can be assessed either absolute or relative with the COM-
PARE function.

Example:

(Window) Lines to be compared: Relative Absolute

(1) 0010 JSR LABX 2764 Program is Program is

the same different
(2) 0024 JSR LABX 1400

Label definition:
Label definition verification:

Example:

(Window) Lines to be compared: No Yes

(1) 0010 DEF1 LDAA R 0200 Program is Program is

the same different
(2) 0017 LDAA R 0200

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-5

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

Verify symbols:
Symbols to addresses can be verified

Example:

(Window) Lines to be compared: No Yes

(1) 0010 DEF1 LDAA R 0200 Motor on Program is Program is

the same different
(2) 0017 LDAA R 0200 Motor 1 on

Verify comments:
Verification of comments or comment lines

Example:

(Window) Lines to be compared: No Yes

(1) 0010 JSR INIT Initialize Program is Program is

the same different
(2) 0017 JSR INIT Init-Up

Ignore "NOP":
NOP lines are ignored

Example:

(Window) Lines to be compared: No Yes

(1) 0101 LDAA R 0020

0102 NOP
0103 = O 010 Program is Program is
different the same
(2) 0176 LDAA R 0020
0177 = O 010

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-6

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

Tables
The table comparison is switched on or off by selecting Y or N.

Verify contents:
N Only the source lines in a table are compared.
Y Only the table's binary contents are compared byte for byte.

Match:
This value is only used in comparing the binary contents of two tables. If a difference is found
while comparing the tables the COMPARE function is broken with an error message. The
Match value is used to synchronize the continuation of the COMPARE function with the
COMPCONT operation command.
If a value difference is found within the contents of the two tables all table entries with this
value are displayed in red (blinking with an B/W or LCD monitor). E.g.:

Value
difference

Value
difference

Verify comments:
N Comments and comment lines are ignored.
Y Comments and comment lines are verified for uniformity.

This parameter has no relevance in connection with the "verify contents" parameter.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-7

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

Symbols
Symbol comparison is switched on or off with this function by selecting Y or N.

Long (STL-SYMB):
N STL-SYMBs are not checked.
Y STL-SYMBs are verified for uniformity.

Short (LAD-SYMB):
N LAD-SYMBs are not checked.
Y LAD-SYMBs are verified for uniformity.

Exiting the Menu

Leaving the COMPARE menu is done by pressing either the [Esc] key or the [F8 EXIT] key. When
one of these keys is pressed the following message is displayed in the message line:

W300 WRITE DATA ? ( Y / N )

N Configuration changes are not saved!

Y Configuration changes are saved to a file!

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-8

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

1.4. STARTING THE COMPARISON

Command: COMPARE [↵]
Function: Overall program comparison is executed according to the parameters set in the
COMPARE configuration menu. After the command is entered both windows are
opened. The window arrangement which can be set with the WINDOW operation
command is ignored (this is replaced with the arrangement set for the COMPARE
command). The screen is set up as follows:

Program lines (STL, TAB and SYMB) are compared and checked for uniformity in both windows.
If a difference between the two is found the COMPARE function is broken with an error message
and the editors for both windows are in this line. Any one of the following messages can be
displayed:

W321 PROGRAMS ARE IDENTICAL !

W322 PROGRAMS NOT IDENTICAL !
W323 LABELDEFINITION NOT IDENTICAL !
W324 LABELNAME NOT IDENTICAL !
W325 ABSOLUTE ADDRESS NOT IDENTICAL !
W326 SYMBOLS NOT IDENTICAL !
W327 COMMENTS NOT IDENTICAL !
W329 NO PROGRAM LOADED !
W330 NO DATA TABLE EXISTS !
W331 DATA TABLE NAME NOT IDENTICAL !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-9

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

W337 COMPARE ONLY FOR IDENTICAL CPU TYPES !

If Auto mode is switched on the next identical line is found and the COMPARE routine is contin-
ued. If a synchronization is not possible the COMPARE routine is broken with the following
message.

W338 AUTO_MODE VERIFY - PROGRAMS NOT IDENTICAL !

Compare Sequence
The compare is carried out in the following sequence:

1. Statement lists
The STL editor is positioned in line 0 in both windows. The program is now compared line
for line.

2. Tables
The TAB editor is positioned to the first table following the alphabetical sequence. The
compare is then run for the names of the tables in alphabetical order. If a name is different
the corresponding error message is displayed. Otherwise the comparison is done according
to the COMPARE configuration.

3. Symbols
Both windows are positioned with the SYMB editor at R 0000. The synchronization for
SYMB compare is done by addresses only, i.e. only SYMBs (long or short - see configura-
tion) with the same address are compared.

Depending on the compare configuration one or more editors can be ignored in the compare
routine. If, for example, the statement list verification is switched off in the configuration menu
compare immediately starts the routine in the tables.

Intervention
The compare routine can basically be interrupted for other tasks at any time during most proce-
dures with the [Esc] key:

e.g.: Changing, deleting or inserting a line.

Changing, deleting or inserting a block.
Loading a macro etc.
Compare-configuration change

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-10

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

1.5. CONTINUE COMPARE

Command: COMPCONT [↵]
Function: Overall program comparison is continued according to the parameters set in the
COMPARE configuration menu. The user can optionally position the editor (STL,
SYMB, TAB) in both windows and subsequently continue the compare function.

Attention:

Both windows must have the same editor or the following error message is
displayed:

W335 Continue - EDITOR NOT IDENTICAL !

After the command is entered both windows are opened. The window arrangement
which can be set with the WINDOW operation command is ignored (this is replaced
with the arrangement set for the COMPARE command).

The screen is set up the same as with the COMPARE command.

Synchronization
If the lines where the cursors in both windows are positioned on are not the same the
PROgramming SYStem automatically does a synchronization, i.e. both windows are searched for
the next identical line.

The parameters set in the configuration menu differentiate between sequential synchronization and
Label synchronization.

The window in which the COMPARE command is given in is designated as the FIXED window.

Sequential synchronization

The Match and Resync parameters are used for this type of synchronization for which values can
be set by the user. Both programs are compared from the current position up to the current
position + Resync. Within this amount of lines a Match-amount of lines must be identical in both
programs for the compare routine to continue. When two identical blocks are found the synchroni-
zation is successful and the following message is displayed:

W328 MATCH CONDITION SATISFIED !

If the synchronization is not successful i.e. no block is found within the defined values set for
Resync and Match the following message is displayed:

W342 SYNCHRONIZATION NOT POSSIBLE !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-11

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

Label synchronization

In this type of synchronization the FIXED window is searched from the cursor position for the next
label. This label is then searched for in the second window. When it is found the compare routine is
started.

If no more labels exist in the FIXED window the following message is displayed:

W343 NO MORE LABELDEFINITIONS IN WINDOW !

If a label exists only in the FIXED window and not in the second window the compare routine is
broken with the following message:

W339 LABELSYNCHRONIZATION NOT POSSIBLE !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-12

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

2. MARKING FUNCTIONS A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Ranges within an STL, TAB or SYMB editor can be marked with this function. Marked areas can
be deleted, copied, moved or placed in temporary memory or inserted from temporary memory.

When the cursor is in an input line of an STL, TAB or SYMB editor the softkey line can be
switched with the [F9] function key:

[F9] + [F1 MARK] - Marking an Area

[F9] + [F2 UNMARK] - Unmarking an Area
These function keys are used to mark a specified area within an editor. The start or end of an area can
defined first. The cursor is placed at the start or the end of the area to be marked and with the [F9] +
[F1 MARK] function keys it is marked. E.g.:

Line is
marked

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-13

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

The cursor is then placed at the other end of the area (start or end depending on which was previ-
ously marked) and with [F9] + [F1 MARK] the entire area is marked. The area is marked on the left
side with a bar. E.g.:

Marked
area

If the mark function is called while a marked area exists the following error message is displayed:

E257 RANGE ALREADY MARKED !

In this case the [F9] + [F2 UNMARK] function keys must be used to unmark the area before a new
area can be marked.

[F9] + [F3 MOVE-M] - Moving a Marked Area

A marked area is moved from the previous position to the current cursor position. If the cursor is
inside the marked area or in a protected line in an STL the following message is displayed:

E256 INVALID TARGET POSITION FOR COPY, MOVE !

[F9] + [F4 COPY-M] - Copying a Marked Area

A marked area is copied to the current cursor position with this function. If the cursor is in a
marked area of a protected line within an STL the following message is displayed:

E256 INVALID TARGET POSITION FOR COPY, MOVE !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-14

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

[F9] + [F5 CUTPASTE] - Copy to Temporary Memory

A marked area is temporarily stored in the directory which the PROgramming SYStem was
installed in with the file name [Link]. The file remains in memory after the STL
program is deleted with NEW, after loading another program and after exiting the PROgramming
SYStem. I.e. the area stored in temporary memory can be inserted into another window or into a
newly loaded program.

[F9] + [F6 DEL-M] - Deleting a Marked Area

A marked area in an editor is deleted with this function.

[F9] + [F7 INSPASTE] - Inserting from Temporary Memory

An area which was stored in temporary memory can be retrieved and inserted in the current cursor
position with this function. If the cursor is within a marked range or a protected line of an STL the
following message is displayed:

E256 INVALID TARGET POSITION FOR COPY, MOVE !

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-15

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

3. PRINT MENU A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●
MODIFICATIONS
After calling the print menu with PMEN, PRINT or LIST the following menu is displayed:

Menu name

Header

Initialization

Menu field

Header: Four lines of optional text can be entered in this text field. The text entered here is
printed on every page as a "header". The header is saved with the corresponding
program which means that a different header can be defined for every program.
Initialization: A pre and post string can be defined respectively for printer initialization. The pre-
string is sent before a print entry and the post-string is sent after. The following
characters can be entered in both lines:

Entry ASCII-Value Entry ASCII-Value

Syntax dec. hex. Syntax dec hex.

<NUL> 0 0 ^Q 17 11
^A 1 1 ^R 18 12
^B 2 2 ^S 19 13
^C 3 2 ^T 20 14
^D 4 2 ^U 21 15
^E 5 2 ^V 22 16
^F 6 2 ^W 23 17
^G 7 2 ^X 24 18
^H 8 2 ^Y 25 19
^I 9 2 ^Z 26 1A
^J 10 A <ESC> 27 1B
^K 11 B <FS> 28 1C
^L 12 C <GS> 29 1D
^M 13 D <RS> 30 1E
^N 14 E <US> 31 1F
^O 15 F <DEL> 127 7F
^P 16 10

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-16

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

Menu field: The print menu is the same in all three expansion levels (A, B and C). Only those
commands which are allowed for the corresponding expansion level can be selected
however.
This section deals only with the modifications made to the menu field:
- Output device - File name - File size
- Baud - rate - Left margin

Output device: By placing the cursor on this menu point and pressing the [↵] key a
selection window is displayed from which the following outputs can be
selected:

File name: A maximum 12 character (including extension) file name can be entered in
this field. If FILE is chosen as the output the PRINT command sends the
data to the file created. If PRINT is executed more than once the output is
added to the end of the previous output with the same file name. If no drive
name of path is given the file is placed in the default directory.

Environment variable B&R$PRINTFILE=<file name> has been removed!

File size: Displays the current file size in bytes.

Baud - rate: By placing the cursor on this menu point and pressing the [↵] key a selection
window is displayed from which the desired baud rates can be set (for COM1
serial interface).

Left margin: The left margin is set with the menu point. A number between 0 and 9 can be
entered. If for example, 5 is selected a left margin of five blank characters is
set for the start of each line.
User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-17
 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

Form feed: Version 5.50 and previous versions of the PROgramming SYStem utilized
the Line feed in place of form feed. Version 5.60 now can send the ASCII
character <FF> as a replacement (Form Feed, hex.: $0C, dec.: 12).

Characters/line: 80 to 132.

Lines/page: 10 to 255.

Cross reference list: All unused SYMBs which are de- A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80
fined in the SYMB editor are now ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
printed as well. The list of unused
symbols is printed within the frame of the normal cross reference list which
means that the list can not be singled out in the print menu.

The cross reference list now consists of three elements:

1) Cross reference list (see “Chapter 9 PRINTING”)
2) Label reference list (see “Chapter 9 PRINTING”)
3) List of unused symbols

When printed the third element looks like the following example:

List of unused symbols

R0883 FBK DATA3 FBK DATA 03

R0885 FBK DATA5 FBK DATA 05
R0887 FBK DATA7 FBK DATA 07
R0889 FBK DATA9 FBK DATA 09
R0991 PS.1/100 PRESCALER ( 1/100 SEC )
R1056 P.MI_N HB POINTER MININET HOB

Address SYMB-short SYMB-long

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-18

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

Print Menu Softkey Line

The softkey line is laid out as follows in the print menu:

[F1 DEFAULT] The stored default settings are loaded. Any changes which may have been
made are lost.

[F7 EXECUTE] The print out is started according to the previously set parameters.

[F8 EXIT] or [Esc] Exits the print menu. After pressing one of these keys the following message
is displayed:

W300 WRITE DATA ? ( Y / N )

N Configuration changes are ignored!

Y Configuration changes are made and stored in a file!

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-19

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

4. PLC MEMORY LOCATION UP / DOWNLOAD

4.1. GENERAL
All flags and registers can be loaded in a file and saved to disk (upload) with this command. It is
also possible to reload the saved data back to the PLC (download). A safety device has been created
with these options to enable a security copy of PLC data on disk which can be loaded back to the
PLC if lost for any reason.

4.1. MENU CALL

Command: UPDL [↵]

Function: Displays the menu for use:

Module
Menu
information

Message line
Softkey line

Menu points are selected by moving the highlight bar in the menu up and down with the [↑] and [↓]
keys. By pressing [↵] the menu point selected is called.

[Esc] or [F8 EXIT] is pressed to exit the UP-/DOWN LOAD menu!

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-20

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

LOAD DATA FROM PLC

After this menu point is called all files in the default directory with the extension *.UPL are
displayed. The function keys can be used to select another directory or to change the default
directory.

By pressing the [↑] and [↓] keys an existing file can be selected which should be overwritten by the
new PLC data. An optional file name or extension can be entered by means of the keyboard. By
pressing the [↵] key now all flags and registers are loaded from the PLC and saved in the defined
file.

If the data has been loaded from a PP40 MEM or PP60 MEM the following message is displayed in
the message line:

W348 MEM FROM PLC <PLC RESET> (Y/N) ?

Y If the PP is in RUN mode it is put into RESET state and the 64 Kbyte memory and
registers and flags are all loaded and saved to the defined file.

N The PP is not put into RESET state. Only flags and registers are loaded and saved to
the defined file.

STORE DATA TO PLC

After this menu point is called all files in the default directory with the extension *.UPL are
displayed. The function keys can be used to select another directory or to change the default
directory.

By pressing the [↑] and [↓] keys a file to be loaded to the PLC can be selected. A file name
(without extension) can be entered by means of the keyboard. By pressing the [↵] key now all flags
and registers are loaded from the defined file to the PLC.

If the data has been loaded to a PP40 MEM or PP60 MEM the following message is displayed in
the message line:

W350 MEM TO PLC <PLC RESET> (Y/N) ?

Y If the PP is in RUN mode it is put into RESET state and the 64 Kbyte memory and
registers and flags are all loaded with the data saved in the defined file.

N The PP is not put into RESET state. Only the flags and registers are loaded with the
data from the file.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-21

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

The CPU type and program identification are saved with the data. If these values do not correspond
to the type of CPU used or with the currently running program the following message appears in
the message line:

W351 CPU-TYPE/PROGRAM-ID DIFFERENT - CONTINUE (Y/N) ?

Y Data is transferred to the PLC

N The function is broken and the data is not transferred.

RESET PLC
The PLC is put into RESET state. Before the function is executed the following message appears in
the message line:

W349 PLC RESET (Y/N) ?

Y The control is stopped and is set to a defined base state.

- All outputs are set to logic “0”

- R0000 to R0019 are cleared
- F 000 to F 499 are cleared
- All program registers are cleared

N The control operating state is not changed

CONTINUE PLC
If the control is in HALT or RESET state the program is started new or restarted with this option.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-22

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

5. ADDITIONAL CHANGES A B C PG1000 CP80 PG-PC PC80

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5.1. START PARAMETER STDSYM (see Chapter 3 INTRODUCTION)

Because of the modifications made for EMS -SYMB management, file extensions must now be
entered with the file name for the STDSYM start parameter.

Example: STDSYM=[Link]
or STDSYM=[Link]

5.2. TWO WINDOW OPERATION

The status line is displayed in both windows now.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-23

 Appendix G PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.60

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem G-24

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

APPENDIX H
PROGRAMMING SYSTEM UPDATES
VERSION 5.70

Contents: 1. Configuration Menu H-3

1.1. Modem Configuration H-4
1.2. Printer Menu H-6
1.3. Compare Configuration H-6
1.4. Color Settings H-7
1.5. Start parameters H-8
1.6. HW-Configuration H-10
1.7. COM1 Configuration H-11
1.8. MS-DOS Environment Variables H-12
1.9. Operational Commands H-12
2. Further Modifications H-13
2.1. Switching Drives H-13
2.1.1. Command Line H-13
2.1.2. Directory Overview H-13
2.2. Directory Overview H-13
2.3. Backup Files H-13
2.4. Escaping from “RUN” H-14
2.5. Escaping from “LOAD MACRO” H-14
2.6. Terminal Emulation H-14
3. Overview of all Operational Commands of the
PROgramming SYStem Version 5.7 H-15
4. PROgramming SYStem - Maximum Values H-20
5. BRADOL Online/Modem Converter H-21
5.1. General Information H-21
5.2. Model Number - Description H-21

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-1

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-2

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

1. CONFIGURATION MENU
Most of the parameters for version 5.7 of the PROgramming SYStem can be entered or changed
through on-screen menus. The new version has eliminated many operational commands and all of
the start parameters which in previous versions had to be entered before the actual start of the
PROgramming SYStem.

Command: ↵]
CONFIG [↵

Function: Configuration menu call.

Entries are now selected from the configuration menu by means of the [↑] and [↓] cursor keys. The
selected option can then be called with the [↵] key.

The following menus can be called from this configuration menu:

- Modem configuration
- Printer menu
- Compare configuration
- Color settings for the PROgramming SYStem
- Start parameters
- Hardware configuration
- COM1 configuration

The configuration menu is exited with [F8 EXIT] or [Esc].

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-3

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

1.1. MODEM CONFIGURATION

After selecting “Modem” from the configuration menu, the parameters which are used to change
the modem configuration are displayed on the screen.

Modem settings are entered in this menu the same as with previous versions of the PROgramming
SYStem.

The only differences are as follows:

❍ The COM1 interface is now configured from a different menu (COM1 configuration)!

❍ If “N” (No) is entered for “Auto Baud Rate Detect (Y/N)” it is interpreted
differently than before:
Before version 5.70: The PROgramming SYStem waits for a connect message from the
modem and compares this message with the message given under “connection recog-
nized”. The connection is only made if the message from the modem and one from the
PROgramming SYStem coincide.
From version 5.70: The PROgramming SYStem waits for a message from the modem. In
this case only the character chain “CONNECT” is waited for. The baud rate which is in-
cluded in the connect message has no influence. Therefore the data exchange can occur
over a telephone line at any non-standard baud rate (e.g. 14 4000 baud). The baud rate
between the PC and the modem corresponds to the value entered in the COM1 configu-
ration.
This mode of operation is only possible with modems which can communicate with the
opposite station at a different baud rate than with the PC whereas the PC ↔ modem
baud rate remains unchanged.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-4

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

❍ The function key assignment has be slightly modified:

Function keys Assignment

[F1 SAVE] Saves the given modem configuration
[F2 CCITT] Identical with [F1 CCITT] of the previous versions of the PROgramming SYStem
Identical with [F2 HAYES] of the previous versions of the PROgramming SYStem
[F3 HAYES] HAYES is the standard modem configuration setting after the PROgramming
SYStem is installed!
[F4 ~] Identical with previous versions of the PROgramming SYStem
[F5 TERMINAL] Identical with previous versions of the PROgramming SYStem
[F8 EXIT] or [Esc] Identical with previous versions of the PROgramming SYStem

❍ The terminal emulation function line has been changed as follows:

These function keys can only be called in combination with the [⇑] key:
Function keys Assignment
[Shift] + [F1 COM1] COM1 - configuration menu call
Terminal emulation initialization (character definition, cursor sizes, display format to
[Shift] + [F2 INIT]
default value, clear screen, cursor home)
[Shift] + [F8 EXIT] Exit terminal emulation

❍ The MODEM operation command has been replaced by the call in the configuration menu!

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-5

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

1.2. PRINTER MENU

After selecting the “Printer menu” option from the configuration menu the printer menu is
called. The printer menu for version 5.70 is different from the previous version in the following
ways:

❍ The baud rate configuration for the COM1 interface in no longer performed from this menu
(now done under the COM1 configuration menu)!

❍ There has been some minor function key changes:

The function of the function keys is sometimes different depending on the call (from the
configuration menu or operational commands PRINT or LIST):

Call from
Function keys Call with "PRINT" Call with "LIST"
configuration menu
[F1 SAVE] Saves the set printer configuration

Saves the set printer Saves the set printer Saves the set printer
[F2 EXE+SAVE] configuration and exits the configuration and starts the configuration and starts the
printer menu print job screen output

[F3 LOAD] Loads the saved printer configuration

Exits the printer menu and takes over the given changes as the current settings.
[F7 EXECUTE]
Then the printing job is Then the screen output is
started started
Exits the printer menu. If changes have been made a request as to whether the data should
[F8 EXIT] or [Esc] be saved or not is made. Regardless of the user's response, the changes made are used as
the current settings.

❍ The DMEN operational command has been replaced by the call in the configuration menu!

1.3. COMPARE CONFIGURATION

After selecting the “Compare” option from the configuration menu, the compare configuration is
called. This menu in version 5.70 is identical with the 5.60 version described in appendix G.

❍ The COMPCFG command has been replaced by the call from the configuration menu!

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-6

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

1.4. COLOR SETTINGS

After selecting the “Colors” option from the configuration menu, the menu in which the color settings
for the PROgramming SYStem screen color settings can be changed is called:

Example
window

Screen area
selection

Color select
window

The area of the PROgramming SYStem screen for which the colors should be changed is selected
through the Screen area selection menu. You can see what the color will look like by watching the
Example window.

❍ The functions keys are assigned as follows:

Function keys Assignment

[F1 SAVE] Saves the selected colors.
[F2 EXE+SAVE] Saves the selected colors and exits the menu.
[F3 LOAD] Loads the saved color settings.
[F5 <-]
Background color changes
[F6 ->]
[Shift] + [F5 <-]
Character color changes
[Shift] + [F6 ->]

[F7 EXECUTE] Activates the set values for the enire PROgramming SYStem without saving any changes.

Exits the menu. If any changes are made, a request as to whether the data should be saved
[F8 EXIT] or [Esc] or not is made. Regardless of the user's response the changes which are made are used as
the current settings.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-7

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

1.5. START PARAMETERS

All parameters which, with earlier versions of the PROgramming SYStem, had to be given during the
program start (start-up parameters and sometimes environment variables) can now be changed within
the start parameters menu. The following parameters can be given:

- Language - File name for standard symbols

- Mnemonics - EXE file at program start
- Operating mode - Parameters for MAESTRO terminal
- Default-directory emulation

After selecting the “Start parameters” option from the configuration menu the following menu
is called:

Entering parameters is done partially with pop-up menus and partially through keyboard entries:
1) Language is used to 2) Mnemonics: For the entry
determine the language or display of the STL
of messages and commands there are four
operational commands. possibilities also chosen
The desired option is out of a pop-up menu:
selected by means of the
[↑], [↓] and [↵] keys in 3) The Operating mode is
a pop-up menu. DEFAULT corresponds also selected by means of
with the language selected during the the pop-up menu tech-
start of the PROgramming SYStem: nique:

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-8

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

7) Standard symbols file name

4 to 6)
The path for the default, standard and user 8) Name of a LEARN file, which should
directories must be entered using the key- be executed at the start of the
board. The path name can also be given with PROgramming SYStem.
the respective drive name. If for example,
M:\B&R\PGDEF is entered as the default 9 to 10)
directory definition, the path in this case is Parameters for MAESTRO terminal
only valid with drive M:. If another drive is emulation.
switched to (e.g. C:) in the command line
the default directory is the root of C: (C:\) These start parameters have replaced operation
unless of course another default has been commands, start parameters (at the start of the
defined for this specific drive. PROgramming SYStem) and environment
variables.
These operation commands have been replaced and no longer are used from the command line:
B&R MOTOROLA MIXB MIXM LANG xxxx
PC DDIR SDIR UDIR

These (all) start-up parameters are replaced and are no longer used from the command line:
LANG= MNEM= PGMODE= DDIR= SDIR=
UDIR= STDSYM= EXE= PAR=

The following environment variables are no longer used from the command line:
B&R$SCREEN=COL B&R$CDEF=ON B&R$FDEF=ON

Detailed information on ...

... Start-up parameters can be found in the “Introduction” chapter under Startup Parameters of
the PROgramming SYStem.
... The parameters for MAESTRO terminal emulation can be found in “Appendix C” under
MS-DOS Environment Variables.

The function keys are assigned as follows:

Function keys Assignment

[F1 SAVE] Saves the entered start parameters
Saves the entered start parameter, exits the menu and executes the parameter which has be
[F2 EXE+SAVE]
defined.
[F3 LOAD] Loads the defined start parameter

[F7 EXECUTE] Activates the set values for the entire PROgramming SYStem without saving any changes.

Exits the menu. If any changes have been made a request is made to whether the data
[F8 EXIT] or [Esc] should be saved or not. Regardless of the user's response the changes which have been
made are used until the next parameter change or until a restart.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-9

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

1.6. HW-CONFIGURATION
After selecting the “HW-Configuration” option from the configuration menu the following menu
is called.

Entering parameters is done through the use of pop-up menus and the keyboard:

1) The EMS SYMB-assignment can be 6) Name of the keyboard driver used.

switched on and off. This can be selected through the
The desired entry (ON or OFF) is selected in list of drivers shown in the pop-
the pop-up menu by means of the [↑], [↓] up menu:
and [↵] keys.
2) Switch the test for whether an AT-Bus
Online interface is available or not, ON
and OFF.
3) Switch the test for whether an Centronics
Online interface is available or not, ON These parameters have replaced the following
and OFF. environment variables:
4) The LPTx-base address is typed in through B&R$LPT_OVER=<Base address>
the keyboard, if the centronics online inter- B&R$LPT_IRQ=<IRQ>
face should be connected to another parallel B&R$KBD=<Keyboard driver>
interface. B&R$EMS=ON

5) The interrupt number used is entered by Detailed information on the parameters for the
means of the keyboard if the centronics MAESTRO terminal emulation can be found in
online interface should be connected to an- “Appendix C” under MS-DOS Environment
other parallel interface. Variables.
User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-10
 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

No parameters are activated until after a restart of the PROgramming SYStem!

The function keys have been assigned as follows:

Function keys Assignment

[F1 SAVE] Saves the entered HW configuration
[F3 LOAD] Loads the saved HW configuration
Exits the menu. If changes have been made, a request as to whether the data should be
[F8 EXIT] or [Esc]
saved or not is made.

1.7. COM1 CONFIGURATION

After selecting the “COM1-Configuration” option from the configuration menu the following
menu is called:

Parameter selection is made partially through pop-up menus and partially through keyboard entries:
- Baud rate is selected in the - Parity is also selected by
pop-up menu by means of the means of a pop-up menu.
[↑], [↓] and [↵] keys.
- The number of data bits
Data bits (5, 6, 7 or 8) is typed in
through the keyboard.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-11

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

- The number of Stop Bits is also entered - Switches the hardware hand-
through the keyboard. shake ON or OFF:

The Handshake parameter is ignored for the following PROgramming SYStem functions:
- For the DIAL and STANDBY operational commands, the hardware handshake is always
switched off.
- For the LOAD/SAVE PG1000 operational command, the COM1 interface operates with the
following parameters independent of the configuration which has been defined:
Baud rate: 9600 Baud
Parity: None
Data bits: 8 Bit
Stop Bits: 1 Bit
Handshake: OFF
- The ONL-COM1 operational command uses its own individual protocol.

Since the baud rate is defined in this menu, the BAUD command is no longer available from the
command line.

1.8. MS-DOS ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES

Because of the introduction of the configuration menu, some environment variables are unnecessary.
With PROgramming SYStem version 5.70 the following variables are still used as before:

B&R$VIRT=<Directory> Directory for temporary files

B&R$NET=<Directory> Directory of user specific (private) files

More information on these variables can be found in “Appendix C”.

1.9. OPERATIONAL COMMANDS

Because of the introduction of the configuration menu (called with the CONFIG command), many
operational commands are unnecessary and have been replaced. These are shown below:

B&R BAUD COMPCFG DDIR DMEN

DRIVE LANG xxxx MIXB MIXM MODEM
MOTOROLA PC SDIR UDIR

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-12

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

2. FURTHER MODIFICATIONS

2.1. SWITCHING DRIVES

2.1.1. Command Line

Switching drives is no longer done with the DRIVE command, it is now done directly by entering
the letter of the drive with a colon.

Example: If the desire is to switch to drive A: the following must be entered:

↵]
A: [↵

If however, you wish to position the input cursor at a label in an STL program (e.g. A:) it must be
entered between quotation marks.

Example: ↵]
"A:" [↵

2.1.2. Directory Overview

For displaying a list of the directories on a specific drive, the drive can be changed to at any time
as is shown above in the first example.

Advantage:
When, for example, loading FBKs (macros, tables, ...) this has a great advantage
whereas you no longer must switch to the command line to change drives.

2.2. DIRECTORY OVERVIEW

The display of file names in the directory overview (commands such as LOAD, DIR, UPDL, ...) is
done alphabetically by name.

2.3. BACKUP FILES

If while saving a program (SAVE PROG), a file with the same name already exists, this file is renamed
to <[Link]>. If a file under the same name already exists as a BAK file it is deleted.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-13

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

2.4. ESCAPING FROM “RUN”

By pressing the [Esc] key during the transfer to the PLC the program completes its transfer but is not
started!

2.5. ESCAPING FROM “LOAD MACRO”

If after loading a macro, the PROgramming SYStem is found in the label exchange editor (because of
allocating a label twice) the [Ctrl] + [Esc] key combination can be used to escape the procedure without
accepting any changes.

2.6. TERMINAL EMULATION

With terminal emulations (TERM or MAESTRO) the baud rate can no longer be set by means of the
function keys. This must be done in the COM1 configuration menu.

The function keys now have the following allocation.

Function keys Assignment

[Shift] + [F1 COM1] COM1 - configuration menu call
Terminal emulation initialization (character definition, cursor sizes, display format to
[Shift] + [F2 INIT]
default value, clear screen, cursor home)
[Shift] + [F8 EXIT] Exit terminal emulation

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-14

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

3. OVERVIEW OF ALL OPERATIONAL COMMANDS OF

THE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM VERSION 5.7
To make finding commands and knowing what to do with them a little easier, a table is provided
here with all of the required PROgramming SYStem commands and the following descriptions:

<NAME>
<TNAME> 4 character name, the first character must be a letter
<LNAME>

<FNAME> Max. 8 character file name without extension

<[Link]> Max. 8 character file name with a 3 character extension

<Range> For block operations (E.g.: COPY, MOVE, ...) a range must first be
defined:

FROM <LN/LB/ADR> UP_TO <LN/LB/ADR> The range begins with FROM

<...> and ends at UP_TO <...>.

<DEST> This is the target area for the range to be copied/moved to.
↵]
[↵ The target will be marked by the
current cursor position.
↵]
TO <LN/LB/ADR> [↵ The target will be marked by the given data
(TO <...>).

<File Type> Determines the extension of a file name (<FNAME>)

Extension <File Type> Expansion level

A B C
*.PRG PROG ● ● ●
*.SYM SYMB ● ● ●
*.TAB TAB ● ● ●
*.LAD LAD ● ● ●
*.MSY MACRO (SYMB-Macro) ● ● ●
*.MTA MACRO (TAB-Macro) ● ●
*.MSL MACRO (STL-Macro) ●
*.ASY ASCII (ASCII-SYMB) ●
*.ATA ASCII (ASCII-Table) ●

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-15

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

Command Additional parameters Function Page

#AD# ↵]
<HEX-Address> [↵ Dump memory contents of the PLC processor (CPU or ----
PP) starting from the given address <HEX-Address>.

Example: #AD# 3000 (Hexadecimal 3000)

#LEARN# ↵]
<[Link]> [↵ The LEARN mode is switched on. All keys pressed C-3
afterwards are recorded and written to the
<[Link]> file.

#LOFF# ↵]
[↵ The LEARN mode is switched off. C-3

CHAN ... Replace / Exchange 5-20, F-11

↵]
EXCHANGE <Range> [↵ All program lines within the given range are 5-20
examined and compared with two defined search
masks. If either one of the two search masks coincide
with a line in the program the line that coincides is
exchanged with the other.
↵]
EXCHAN? <Range> [↵ This function is the same as the one above "EXCHAN" 5-21
with the exception that for each exchange an acknowl-
edgement is requested in the message line.
↵]
REPLACE <Range> [↵ All program lines within the given range are 5-21
examined and are compared with the first of two
defined search masks. If this search mask coincides
with one of the lines in the program that line is then
replaced by the second mask.
↵]
REPLACE? <Range> [↵ This function is the same as the one above "RE- 5-21
PLACE" with the exception that for each replace an
acknowledgement is requested in the message line.
Without a range entry If no <Range> is given, then all of the program lines,
starting from the beginning are searched with the
exception of the LAD translations .

CLEAR ... Deletes tables, ladder diagrams, and sequence

definitions from the program memory of the PC.
↵]
SEQCHART <NAME> [↵ The sequence definition with the name <NAME> is
deleted. 4-12
↵]
BLOCK <Range> [↵ Deletes STL, SECQ or TAB ranges. F-11
↵]
LAD <LNAME> [↵ The ladder diagram with the name <LNAME> is 4-42
deleted.
↵]
DATA_TBL <TNAME> [↵ The table with the name <TNAME> is deleted. 7-12

COMPARE ↵]
[↵ Starts the COMPARE procedure. G-9

COMPCONT ↵]
[↵ Continues the COMPARE procedure. G-11

CONFIG ↵]
[↵ Calls the configuration menu. H-3

COPY <Range> <Dest> Copies STL, SYMB or TAB ranges and inserts them F-11, 5-28,
to certain locations (targets). 6-8, 7-8
DISK <[Link]> TO <[Link]> [↵↵] F-13
The <[Link]> is copied and is saved as the
name <[Link]>.

CP40 ↵]
[↵ Switches from CP80 to PG1000 mode or from PC80 3-11
to PG-PC mode

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-16

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

CP80 ↵]
[↵ Switches from PG1000 to CP80 mode or from PG-PC 3-11
to PC80 mode.

DATA_TBL ↵]
[↵ Calls the DATA_TBL editor and the last processed 7-3
table.
↵]
<TNAME> [↵ Calls an existing DATA_TBL or one which is to be
defined with the given name <TNAME>.

DATE ↵]
<Program date> [↵ The current program date is replaced by <Program 3-25
date>.

DELETE ↵]
<[Link]> [↵ Deletes the file <[Link]>. F-13

DIR ↵]
<PATH> [↵ Displays directory contents of <PATH> (Possibly F-13
with drive name entry).
Without entering a <PATH> the contents of the
default directory are displayed.

DOS ↵]
[↵ Calls the MS-DOS command interpreter. 3-27
With the EXIT command you return to the
PROgramming SYStem.
↵]
"Command" [↵ Executes the MS-DOS command "Command" and
automatically returns to the PROgramming SYStem.

<Lname:> ↵]
[↵ The current drive is changed to <Lname:>. H-13

DUMPS ↵]
<FNAME> [↵ A PLC program is saved under a MOTOROLA S- C-13
record file under the name FNAME.S.

EEPROM ↵]
[↵ Calls the EEPROM menu. 5-50, F-15

END ↵]
[↵ Ends the PROgramming SYStem. 3-20

EXE ↵]
<[Link]> [↵ The LEARN file <[Link]> is executed. C-4

FBK ↵]
<NAME> [↵ Accesses the FBK definition editor in order to enable 10-8
the definition of the FBK with the given name
<NAME>.

FIND ↵]
<Range> [↵ Searches for STL program lines which coincide with 5-25, F-11
the given search mask.
If no <Range> is given, the STL entire program is
searched.

FINDL ↵]
<Range> [↵ All program lines which coincide with the given 5-27, F-11
search mask are listed on the screen.

FINDP ↵]
<Range> [↵ All program lines which coincide with the given 5-27, F-11
search mask are printed.

FORMAT ↵]
<Drivename:> [↵ Formats the diskette in the given drive. 8-22

FREE ↵]
<ADR/SYMB> [↵ Searches for addresses without symbols starting from 6-9
address <ADR/SYMB>. If no start address is given
the search starts at R000.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-17

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

GLOBCHAN ... Global exchange/replace through all addresses in the 5-24

entire STL program including the LAD translations.
↵]
EXCHANGE [↵ All program lines are examined and compared with
two given search masks. If one of the search masks
coincide with a program line, the line is exchanged
with the other search mask.
↵]
REPLACE [↵ All program lines are examined and compared with
the first given search mask. If this first mask
coincides with a program line, the line is replaced
with the second mask.

LAD ↵]
[↵ Calls the last processed LAD 4-13
↵]
<LNAME> [↵ Calls the LAD with the name <LNAME>.

LDMO ↵]
[↵ Calls the last LAD debugger and enters debug mode. 4-44
↵]
<LNAME> [↵ Calls the LAD debug (LAD with the name
<LNAME>).

LARGE ↵]
[↵ Defines the program memory to 4766 program lines. 3-26

LIST ↵]
[↵ Calls the printer menu where it can be defined what G-16 (F-
should be output on the screen. 13), 9-3

LOAD ... Loads programs or parts of programs 8-9

↵]
ASCII SYMBOLS <FNAME> [↵ Loads a SYMB which has been saved in ASCII format. 8-16, F-12
↵] Loads a TAB which has been saved in ASCII format.
ASCII DATA_TBL <FNAME> [↵ 8-16, F-12
↵]
EMSSYMBOLS <FNAME> [↵ The SYMB file <FNAME> is loaded to the EMS 8-15
memory (must be switched on).
All SYMBs, which exist before loading, are deleted.
↵] The ladder diagram <FNAME> is loaded and entered
LAD <FNAME> TO <LNAME> [↵ 8-14
to the program that exists with the name <LNAME>.
↵]
SYMB <FNAME> [↵ The SYMB file <FNAME> is loaded. 8-11
All SYMBs which exist before the load are deleted.
↵]
MACRO <FNAME> <Dest> [↵ The STL, SYMB or TAB macro <FNAME> is loaded F-12, 8-12
and bound to the existing STL/SYMB/TAB in the
given location <LN/LB/ADR>.
↵]
PG1000 [↵ The PROgramming SYStem switches to PG1000 3-22
mode and waits for the PG1000 programming device
to transmit a program through the serial interface to
the PC.
↵]
PLC [↵ The program which is in the RAM of the PLC is 5-65
loaded into the memory of the PC.
↵]
PROG <FNAME> [↵ The program <FNAME> is loaded. The program 8-9
which exists in memory is cleared.
↵]
DATA_TBL <TNAME> <FNAME> [↵ 8-11
The table <FNAME> is loaded. The loaded table is
saved as name <TNAME>.

MAESTRO ↵]
[↵ Emulation of a PROVIT 500/600 with external ASCII C-9
keyboard.

MOVE ↵]
<Range> <Dest> [↵ Moves an STL, SYMB or TAB range. F-11, 5-30,
6-8, 7-8

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-18

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

NAME ↵]
<Program name> [↵ The current program name is replaced by 3-24
<Program name>.

NEW ↵]
[↵ Deletes the program in the current window from the 3-25
memory of the PC.

ONL ↵]
<Interface> [↵ Selection of the online interface which should be used 3-26
for programming a PLC:
B&R0 ... Selection of the installed B&R online interface.
LPT1 ... Selection of the centronics online interface.
COM1 ... Selection of the modem attached to the COM1 serial interface.

P-VERS ↵]
[↵ Displays information about the program stored in the 5-54
PLC.

PRINT ↵]
[↵ Calls the printer menu which is used to define what 9-3, G-16,
will be printed. By means of a function key the print H-6
job can be started from this menu.

RENAME ↵]
<[Link]> TO <[Link]> [↵ F-13
Renames the file [Link] to [Link].

RNT ↵]
[↵ The program in the current window is checked for 5-49
missing labels and for exceeding the maximum
branch distance.

RUN ↵]
[↵ The program is transferred to the RAM of the PLC 4-11, 5-31
and started. The STL debugger is called.

RUN P ↵]
[↵ This instruction is the same as the RUN command with 5-49
the exception of the program being protected while it is
transferred to the PLC. I.e.: The program can no longer
be loaded from the PLC with LOAD PLC.

S_LIST ↵]
[↵ Used for calling the STL editor. 5-4
↵]
<LN/LB> [↵ The input line is set to the given STL line <LN/LB>. 5-4

SAVE ↵]
[↵ The entire program is saved with the name it was 8-5
defined with using the SAVE or LOAD command.
↵]
<FNAME> ASCII <Range/TNAME> [↵ F-12, 8-8
Saves a SYMB range or a table in ASCII format.
↵]
<FNAME> LAD <LNAME> [↵ The ladder diagram <LNAME> is saved. 8-6
↵]
<FNAME> SYMB [↵ All defined symbols are saved. 8-6
↵]
<FNAME> MACRO <Range> [↵ The given STL, SYMB or TAB range is saved as a F-12, 8-7
macro.
↵]
PG1000 <Mnemonics> [↵ Transfers a program to the PG1000. For <Mnemon- 3-23
ics> there are two possibilities :
• INTER (MOTOROLA-Mnemonics)
• GERMAN (B&R Mnemonics)
↵]
<FNAME> PROG [↵ The entire program is saved. 8-6
↵]
<FNAME> DATA_TBL <TNAME> [↵ 8-6
The table <TNAME> is saved.

SEQCHART ↵]
[↵ Used for calling the SEQC editor and the last 4-5
processed SEQC.
↵]
<NAME> [↵ Used to call an existing SEQC or to define a new SEQC 4-5
with the name given <NAME>.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-19

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

SMALL ↵]
[↵ Defines the program memory at 2719 program lines. 3-26

STANDBY ↵]
[↵ Calls the standby menu. The PROgramming SYStem 11-35
waits for a call from a remote PLC.

STAT ↵]
[↵ Calls the STL debugger. 5-32

SYMBOLS ↵]
[↵ Calls the SYMB editor. 6-4
↵]
<ADR> [↵ The input line is set to the corresponding address.

TERM ↵]
[↵ The PC can be used an entry terminal for operating a C-6
PROVIT 900/1000.

UPDL ↵]
[↵ Calls the Up-/Download menu. G-20

WINDOW ↵]
[↵ Calls the window definition menu. 3-18

XFER ↵]
[↵ Transfers a program to the PLC without interrupting 5-67
the program running in the PROM of the PLC.

4. PROGRAMMING SYSTEM - MAXIMUM VALUES

Many values must be considered while working with the PROgramming SYStem:

Number Length
STL-lines (including comment lines) 32767
Labels 1500 1)
SYMB without EMS 2000
SYMB with EMS 8000
Tables = Number of existing Labels 1) 16 KByte or 44 KByte
LAD 200 50 lines
FBK 200 50 lines
1) Since tables are headed with a label, the number of tables is limited by the number of labels.

The following prerequisites must be cared for before installing the PROgramming SYStem:

❍ The PC must be equipped with MS-DOS version 3.31 or higher.

❍ There must be at least 3 Mbytes of memory free on the hard disk for the installation.

❍ Operation of the PROgramming SYStem requires a maximum of 5 Mbytes (min.

300 KByte) memory on the hard disk (for temporary files).

❍ For starting the PROgramming SYStem program a minimum of 570 496 bytes
(557.2 Kbytes) main memory are required. In some cases, memory resident programs and
device drivers must be removed.

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-20

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

5. BRADOL ONLINE/MODEM CONVERTER

5.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

The BRADOL provides another possibility for the online connection to a PLC. The ONLINE/
MODEM CONVERTER is identical in almost all aspects with the Modem Online-Interface
(MONL) with the following exceptions:
- The ONLINE/MODEM CONVERTER has no user program memory.
- It sits in an external housing and is not put in as a replacement for user memory in the
CPU or PP.
- It has its own power supply (Primary: 220/110 VAC or 8 - 30 VDC)
- Contrary to the MONL the ONLINE/MODEM CONVERTER does not have to be installed
next to the PLC. This provides another possibility for PCs which cannot be equipped with a
B&R online interface or have problems with the parallel interface (centronics online
interfaces).
- With the ONLINE/MODEM CONVERTER any limitations in selecting user memory have
been eliminated (there are only two versions of the Modem Online-Interface).

These are additional features of the Modem Online-Interface:

- External diagnosis via modem
- Networking capabilities (up to 16 PLC processors can be programmed centrally and online
with the programming device through twisted pair cable)

The software operation of the Online/Modem Converter is identical with the User Program
Memory Module with Modem Interface.

For operation, at least PROgramming SYStem version 5.4 is required!

5.2. MODEL NUMBER - DESCRIPTION

Online/Modem Converter; for connecting HAYES modems, serial RS232 and RS485 BRADOL-0
interfaces (electrically isolated), node number switch, Status-LEDs

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-21

 Appendix H PROgramming SYStem Updates Version 5.70

User's Manual B&R PROgramming SYStem H-22